ALS

ALplus2, ALCplus2, ALCplus2e

Access Link Series

User manual

MN.00224.E - 018
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.
Property of Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the inter-
national regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from Siae Microelettronica S.p.A.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen dis-
played is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS®, MS Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
HP®, HP OpenView NNM and HP–UX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle® is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
 Contents

Section 1.
USER GUIDE 13

1 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ..............................................................................13

2 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES .........................................14

2.1 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK ....................................................................14
2.1.1 Artificial respiration .................................................................................14
2.1.2 Treatment of burns .................................................................................14
2.2 SAFETY RULES .................................................................................................15
2.3 CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL &
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT) .................................................................................17
2.4 INTERNAL BATTERY ..........................................................................................17

3 PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL ............................................................18

3.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL .................................................................................18
3.2 AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE ..........................................................................18
3.3 STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL .............................................................................18

Section 2.
DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION 21

4 ABBREVIATION LIST................................................................................................21
4.1 ABBREVIATION LIST .........................................................................................21

5 SYSTEM PRESENTATION ..........................................................................................23

5.1 RECOMMENDATION ..........................................................................................23
5.2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE ....................................................................................23
5.3 ALPLUS2 MODULAR IDU ....................................................................................23
5.3.1 LIM .......................................................................................................24
5.3.2 RIM.......................................................................................................24
5.3.3 Controller ..............................................................................................24
5.4 ALCPLUS2 COMPACT IDU...................................................................................24
5.5 ALCPLUS2E COMPACT IDU .................................................................................25
5.6 N+0................................................................................................................27
5.7 ODU ...............................................................................................................27

MN.00224.E - 018 1
 5.8 MANAGEMENT ..................................................................................................28
5.8.1 Hardware platform ..................................................................................28
5.8.2 Management ports ..................................................................................28
5.8.2.1 MNGT/1 and MNGT/2 ................................................................29
5.8.2.2 RS232 ....................................................................................29
5.8.2.3 LCT USB .................................................................................29
5.8.3 Protocols ...............................................................................................29

6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................33

6.1 IDU CHARACTERISTICS .....................................................................................33
6.1.1 Traffic interfaces .....................................................................................33
6.1.1.1 2 Mbit/s (E1 G.703) ..................................................................33
6.1.1.2 STM1 electrical ........................................................................34
6.1.1.3 STM1 optical............................................................................34
6.1.1.4 Ethernet interface ....................................................................35
6.1.2 Alarm interface.......................................................................................38
6.1.3 Service channels.....................................................................................38
6.1.3.1 E1 (Connector name is 2 Mbit/s wayside) ....................................39
6.1.3.2 64 kbit/s codirectional...............................................................39
6.1.3.3 64 kbit/s contradirectional .........................................................39
6.1.3.4 9600 bit/s synch/asynch ...........................................................40
6.1.3.5 9600 or 2x4800 bit/s synch/asynch ............................................40
6.1.4 Modulation and channel bandwidth ............................................................40
6.1.5 1+1 switching criteria..............................................................................41
6.1.6 Cable Interface .......................................................................................41
6.2 POWER SUPPLY AND CONSUMPTION ...................................................................42
6.2.1 IDU power consumption...........................................................................42
6.2.2 Max current absorption ............................................................................42
6.2.3 Power supply alarm.................................................................................43
6.2.4 Fuses ....................................................................................................43
6.3 ODU CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................................44
6.4 EQUIPMENT GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS............................................................44
6.4.1 Dimensions ............................................................................................44
6.4.2 Weight ..................................................................................................44
6.4.3 Environmental condition ..........................................................................45

7 ALplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................46

7.1 CONFIGURATION ..............................................................................................46
7.1.1 ALplus2 block diagrams ...........................................................................46
7.1.2 Controller ..............................................................................................46
7.1.2.1 Service signals.........................................................................47
7.1.2.2 Firmware ................................................................................47
7.1.2.3 Web Lct ..................................................................................47
7.1.2.4 Controller LEDs ........................................................................47
7.1.2.5 SD memory card management ...................................................48
7.1.3 LIM .......................................................................................................48
7.1.3.1 Switch for Ethernet ports...........................................................49
7.1.3.2 STM-1 synchronisation ..............................................................50
7.1.3.3 LIM LEDs.................................................................................51
7.1.4 RIM.......................................................................................................51
7.1.4.1 Modulator................................................................................52
7.1.4.2 Demodulator ...........................................................................52

2 MN.00224.E - 018
 7.1.4.3 Adaptive code modulation .........................................................52
7.1.4.4 Power supply ...........................................................................54
7.1.4.5 Telemetry IDU/ODU..................................................................54
7.2 LOOPS ............................................................................................................54
7.2.1 Tributary ...............................................................................................54
7.2.2 IDU loop ................................................................................................55

8 ALCplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................59

8.1 CONFIGURATION ..............................................................................................59
8.1.1 Switch for ethernet ports .........................................................................59
8.1.2 Service channels.....................................................................................59
8.2 SYNCHRONIZATION ..........................................................................................60
8.3 SD MEMORY CARD MANAGEMENT .......................................................................60
8.4 ALC BLOCK DIAGRAMS......................................................................................61
8.5 ALCPLUS2 NODE ..............................................................................................61
8.5.1 Expansion from 2 to 3 nodals ...................................................................62
8.5.2 Reduction from 3 to 2 nodes.....................................................................62
8.6 LAG - LINK AGGREGATION ................................................................................63
8.6.1 Line Trunking .........................................................................................63
8.6.2 Radio Link Trunking ................................................................................64
8.7 LINE PROTECTION THROUGH DISTRIBUTED ELP ...................................................66
8.8 ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE) .....................67
8.8.1 Service Layer OAM ..................................................................................67
8.8.2 OAM Example with ALCplus2 ....................................................................69
8.8.3 Reset Switch ..........................................................................................70
8.8.4 MAC Table clear ......................................................................................70
8.9 ALCPLUS2 FIRMWARE UPDATES .........................................................................70
8.9.1 Firmware release 1.3.3 ............................................................................70
8.9.2 Firmware release 1.3.4 ............................................................................71
8.9.3 Firmware Release 1.4.0 ...........................................................................71
8.9.4 Firmware Release 1.4.1 ...........................................................................71
8.9.5 Firmware release 1.5.0 ............................................................................72
8.9.6 Firmware release 1.6.0 ............................................................................73

9 ALCplus2E IDU DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................78

9.1 CONFIGURATION ..............................................................................................78
9.1.1 Service channels.....................................................................................78
9.2 ALCPLUS2E BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................................78
9.2.1 ADAPTIVE CODE MODULATION - ACM PROFILES .........................................79
9.3 FREQUENCY REUSE...........................................................................................79
9.4 XPIC 1+1 CONFIGURATION................................................................................80
9.4.1 XPIC 1+1 management ...........................................................................81
9.4.2 SSP protocol management .......................................................................81
9.5 2X(1+0) EST WEST CONFIGURATION..................................................................81
9.5.1 Selective E1 Protection ............................................................................81
9.6 N+0 CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................82
9.6.1 Frequency arrangement definitions............................................................82
9.6.2 GENERALS .............................................................................................82
9.6.3 2X(1+0) system with XPIC .......................................................................83
9.6.4 2X(1+0) system with hybrid coupler, two channels......................................84
9.6.5 2X(1+0) with circulator, low losses............................................................85
9.6.6 4X(1+0) with XPIC and hybrid coupler two CCDP channels ...........................86

MN.00224.E - 018 3
 9.6.7 4X(1+0) with XPIC, circulator, two CCDP channels ......................................87
9.6.8 8X(1+0) with XPIC and multicirculator .......................................................88
9.6.9 MULTICIRCULATOR FREQUENCY RESTRICTIONS .........................................89
9.7 SYNCHRONIZATION ..........................................................................................91
9.8 ALCPLUS2E NODE.............................................................................................92
9.8.1 Expansion from 2 to 3 IDUs......................................................................93
9.8.2 Reduction from 3 to 2 IDUs ......................................................................94
9.9 SWITCH FOR ETHERNET PORTS ..........................................................................94
9.10 LAG - LINK AGGREGATION ................................................................................99
9.10.1 Line Trunking .........................................................................................99
9.10.2 Radio Link Trunking .............................................................................. 100
9.11 LINE PROTECTION THROUGH DISTRIBUTED ELP ................................................. 101
9.12 ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE) ................... 101
9.12.1 Service Layer OAM ................................................................................ 101
9.12.2 OAM Example with ALCplus2e................................................................. 103
9.13 ALCPLUS2E FIRMWARE UPDATES...................................................................... 103
9.13.1 Firmware release 1.3.1 .......................................................................... 103
9.13.2 Firmware release 1.4.0 .......................................................................... 105
9.13.3 Firmware release 1.5.0 .......................................................................... 106
9.13.4 Firmware release 1.5.1 .......................................................................... 106
9.13.5 Firmware release 1.6.0 .......................................................................... 106
9.13.6 Firmware release 1.7.0 .......................................................................... 108
9.13.7 Firmware release 1.7.2 .......................................................................... 109
9.14 FIRMWARE UPDATES FOR ALCPLUS2E 1+1 XPIC ................................................. 110
9.14.1 Firmware release 1.0.1 .......................................................................... 110
9.14.2 Firmware release 1.2.0 .......................................................................... 110
9.14.3 Firmware release 1.2.2 .......................................................................... 111
9.14.4 Firmware release 1.2.3 .......................................................................... 111
9.14.5 Firmware release 1.3.0 .......................................................................... 111

10 ODU DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................115

10.1 ODU VERSIONS.............................................................................................. 115
10.1.1 AS ODU ............................................................................................... 115
10.1.2 ASN ODU ............................................................................................. 115
10.1.3 ASNK ODU ........................................................................................... 115
10.2 DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................ 116
10.3 IF CABLE INTERFACE ...................................................................................... 116
10.4 POWER SUPPLY .............................................................................................. 116
10.5 TX SECTION................................................................................................... 116
10.5.1 ATPC operation..................................................................................... 117
10.6 RX SECTION .................................................................................................. 117
10.7 1+1 TX SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 118

Section 3.
INSTALLATION 125

11 INSTALLATION AND PROCEDURES FOR ENSURING THE ELECTROMAGNETIC

COMPATIBILITY.....................................................................................................125
11.1 GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLATION........................ 125

4 MN.00224.E - 018
 11.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 126
11.3 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION............................................................................ 126
11.3.1 IDU..................................................................................................... 126
11.3.2 IDU installation..................................................................................... 126
11.4 ELECTRICAL WIRING....................................................................................... 126
11.5 OPTICAL CONNECTORS ................................................................................... 128
11.6 CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS .............................................................. 128
11.7 IDU-ODU INTERCONNECTION CABLE................................................................. 128
11.7.1 Electrical characteristics......................................................................... 128
11.7.2 Connectors .......................................................................................... 128
11.7.3 Max length........................................................................................... 128
11.7.4 Suggested cable ................................................................................... 128
11.8 GROUNDING CONNECTION .............................................................................. 129
11.9 IDU-ODU CABLE GROUNDING KIT INSTALLATION ............................................... 129
11.9.1 Grounding kit K09283F (for RG8 or 1/8” cable) ......................................... 129
11.9.2 Grounding kit ICD00072F (for any cable with shield) ................................. 130
11.10 SURGE AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION ............................................................... 131

12 ALplus2 CONNECTORS ...........................................................................................132

12.1 IDU FRONT PANEL .......................................................................................... 132
12.1.1 LIM connectors ..................................................................................... 132
12.1.2 RIM connectors..................................................................................... 132
12.1.3 Controller connectors ............................................................................ 132
12.2 IDU BODY CONNECTORS ................................................................................. 133

13 ALCplus2 CONNECTORS .........................................................................................139

13.1 IDU FRONT PANEL .......................................................................................... 139
13.2 ALCPLUS2 1+0/1+1 (GAI0157/GAI0152) ........................................................... 139
13.3 ALCPLUS2 16E1 1+0/1+1 (GAI0155/GAI0156) ................................................... 140
13.4 ALCPLUS2 NODAL 1+0/1+1 (GAI0163/GAI0162) ................................................ 140
13.5 ALCPLUS2 32E1 1+0/1+1 (GAI0169/GAI0168) ................................................... 141

14 ALCplus2E CONNECTORS........................................................................................142
14.1 IDU FRONT PANEL .......................................................................................... 142
14.2 ALCPLUS2E 1+0 (GAI0178), 2+0/1+1 (GAI0175), 2+0/XPIC (GAI0172) ................ 142
14.3 ALCPLUS2E 18E1 2XSTM1 NODAL (GAI0176), 2+0/1+1 (GAI0173),
2+0/XPIC (GAI0170) ...................................................................................... 143
14.4 ALCPLUS2E 34E1 2XSTM1 1+0 (GAI0177), 2+0/1+1 (GAI0174),
2+0/XPIC (GAI 0171) ..................................................................................... 144

15 INSTALLATION NOTE ON FREQUENCY REUSE SYSTEMS (XPIC)..............................145

15.1 FREQUENCY REUSE......................................................................................... 145
15.2 CHARACTERISTICS ......................................................................................... 145
15.2.1 Antennas ............................................................................................. 145
15.2.2 RF channel ........................................................................................... 145
15.2.3 ATPC................................................................................................... 145
15.2.4 IDU-ODU cable ..................................................................................... 145

16 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA ...........146
16.1 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 146
16.2 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 147
16.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 147

MN.00224.E - 018 5
 16.4 GROUNDING .................................................................................................. 149

17 INSTALLATION ONTO THE WALL OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA...........163

17.1 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 163
17.2 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 163
17.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 164
17.4 GROUNDING .................................................................................................. 166

18 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA .........177
18.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 177
18.2 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 177
18.3 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 178
18.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 178
18.4.1 Installation onto the pole of the support system and the antenna ................ 178
18.4.2 Installation of ODU................................................................................ 179
18.4.3 ODU installation.................................................................................... 180
18.5 ANTENNA AIMING........................................................................................... 180
18.6 COMPATIBILITY .............................................................................................. 180
18.7 GROUNDING .................................................................................................. 181

19 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA

(KIT V32307, V32308, V32309) .............................................................................196
19.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 196
19.2 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 196
19.3 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 197
19.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 197
19.5 1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 198
19.5.1 Setting antenna polarization ................................................................... 198
19.5.2 Installation of the centring ring on the antenna ......................................... 198
19.5.3 Installation of 1+0 ODU support ............................................................. 198
19.5.4 Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure ................................. 198
19.5.5 Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)....................................................... 198
19.5.6 Antenna aiming .................................................................................... 199
19.5.7 ODU grounding..................................................................................... 199
19.6 1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 199
19.6.1 Installation of Hybrid ............................................................................. 199
19.6.2 Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version) ....................................... 200

20 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED DUAL

POLARIZATION ANTENNA ......................................................................................210
20.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 210
20.2 INSTALLATION KIT FOR STANDARD LOCK ODU .................................................. 210
20.3 INSTALLATION KIT FOR FAST LOCK ODU ........................................................... 210
20.4 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 211
20.5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 211
20.6 STANDARD LOCK ODUS MOUNTING PROCEDURE ................................................ 212
20.6.1 Installation of the centring rings over the OMT .......................................... 212
20.6.2 Installation over the pole of the assembled structure: antenna, OMT and pole
support system..................................................................................... 212
20.6.3 Installation of the standard lock ODUs over the OMT.................................. 212
20.6.4 Antenna aiming .................................................................................... 213
20.6.5 ODU grounding..................................................................................... 213
20.7 FAST LOCK ODUS MOUNTING PROCEDURE ........................................................ 213

6 MN.00224.E - 018
 20.7.1 Installation of the centring rings over the OMT .......................................... 213
20.7.2 Installation of the fast lock 1+0 ODU support ........................................... 213
20.7.3 Installation over the pole of the assembled structure: antenna, OMT and
pole support system .............................................................................. 213
20.7.4 Installation of the fast lock ODUs over the OMT......................................... 214
20.7.5 Antenna aiming .................................................................................... 214
20.7.6 ODU grounding..................................................................................... 214

21 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH RFS INTEGRATED ANTENNA...218
21.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 218
21.2 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 218
21.3 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 219
21.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 219
21.5 1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 220
21.5.1 Setting antenna polarization ................................................................... 220
21.5.2 Installation of the centring ring on the antenna ......................................... 220
21.5.3 Installation of 1+0 ODU support ............................................................. 220
21.5.4 Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure ................................. 220
21.5.5 Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)....................................................... 220
21.5.6 Antenna aiming .................................................................................... 221
21.5.7 ODU grounding..................................................................................... 221
21.6 1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 221
21.6.1 Installation of Hybrid ............................................................................. 221
21.6.2 Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version) ....................................... 222

22 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF ODU ASN/ASNK WITH STANDARD LOCK ........233
22.1 ODU COUPLING KIT ........................................................................................ 233
22.1.1 ODU AS ............................................................................................... 233
22.1.2 ODU ASN/ASNK .................................................................................... 233
22.1.2.1 Fast lock coupling kit .............................................................. 233
22.1.2.2 Standard coupling kit .............................................................. 233
22.2 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA ........... 234
22.2.1 ODU AS and ODU ASN/ASNK (Fast Lock) ................................................. 234
22.2.2 ODU ASN/ASNK (Standard Lock)............................................................. 234
22.2.2.1 1+0 ODU .............................................................................. 234
22.2.2.2 1+1 ODU .............................................................................. 235
22.3 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA............. 236
22.3.1 ODU AS, ASN and ASNK (Fast Lock) ........................................................ 236
22.3.2 ODU ASN and ASNK (Standard Lock) ....................................................... 236
22.3.2.1 1+0 ODU .............................................................................. 237
22.3.2.2 1+1 ODU .............................................................................. 237
22.3.2.3 Waveguide towards the antenna............................................... 239

23 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF 8+0 ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA ...........247
23.1 GENERALS ..................................................................................................... 247
23.2 N+0.............................................................................................................. 247

MN.00224.E - 018 7
 Section 4.
LINE-UP 259

24 LINE–UP OF THE RADIO HOP .................................................................................259

24.1 LINE–UP OF THE RADIO HOP............................................................................ 259
24.1.1 Equipment configuration ........................................................................ 259
24.1.2 Antenna alignment and received field measurement .................................. 260
24.1.3 Network element configuration ............................................................... 260
24.1.4 Few considerations about addresses ........................................................ 261
24.1.5 Radio checks ........................................................................................ 261
24.1.6 ACM setting ......................................................................................... 261
24.2 RADIO LINK MANAGEMENT .............................................................................. 263
24.2.1 Out of Band management ...................................................................... 264
24.2.2 In Band management ............................................................................ 265
24.3 MULTIPLE LINK MANAGEMENT.......................................................................... 265
24.3.1 Chain of radio links ............................................................................... 266
24.3.2 Node ................................................................................................... 266

25 BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF

MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS ..............................................................................268
25.1 SCOPE .......................................................................................................... 268
25.2 CONFIGURATION UPLOAD AND DOWNLOAD USING SCT ...................................... 268
25.2.1 Configuration upload ............................................................................. 268
25.2.2 Configuration download ......................................................................... 268
25.3 CONFIGURATION UPLOAD AND DOWNLOAD USING WEBLCT ................................ 269
25.3.1 Configuration upload ............................................................................. 269
25.3.2 Configuration download ......................................................................... 269
25.3.3 SD Memory card ................................................................................... 269

26 LINE-UP FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC ..........................................................................270

26.1 LAN SETUP .................................................................................................... 270
26.2 LOCAL LAN-1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN-1 PORT TRANSPARENT CONNECTION LAN
PER PORT ...................................................................................................... 270
26.3 FROM 3 PORT TO 3 PORT CONNECTIONS ........................................................... 275
26.4 FROM 3 PORT TO 3 PORT CONNECTIONS ........................................................... 280

27 HOW TO CHANGE ADDRESS ON REMOTE EQUIPMENT WITHOUT LOSING THE

CONNECTION .........................................................................................................285
27.1 TOOLS .......................................................................................................... 285
27.2 PROCEDURE................................................................................................... 285

28 LINE-UP OF THE NODE WITH NODAL IDU ..............................................................297

28.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 297
28.2 NODE CONNECTIONS ...................................................................................... 297
28.3 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION .......................................................................... 298
28.4 TRIBUTARY CONFIGURATION ........................................................................... 299
28.5 CONFIGURATION OF THE CROSS-CONNECTION MATRIX ...................................... 300
28.5.1 Tributary - Radio Cross-connection.......................................................... 300
28.5.2 Tributary - Tributary Cross-connection ..................................................... 300
28.6 ETHERNET SWITCH......................................................................................... 301

8 MN.00224.E - 018
 29 EXAMPLE OF ALCplus2 NODE EXPANSION..............................................................316
29.1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................. 316
29.2 PRECONDITIONS ............................................................................................ 316
29.3 NBUS AND INTRA-NODE GE CABLING RULES ..................................................... 318
29.4 NODE EXPANSION FROM N TO N+K ELEMENTS................................................... 319
29.4.1 Step 1 ................................................................................................. 319
29.4.2 Step 2 ................................................................................................. 319
29.4.3 Step 3 (traffic affecting)......................................................................... 319
29.4.4 Step 4 ................................................................................................. 320
29.4.5 Step 5 (traffic affecting)......................................................................... 320
29.5 NODE REDUCTION FROM N+K TO N ELEMENTS .................................................. 321
29.5.1 Step 1 (traffic affecting)......................................................................... 321
29.5.2 Step 2 ................................................................................................. 321
29.5.3 Step 3 (traffic affecting)......................................................................... 321
29.5.4 Step 4 ................................................................................................. 321

30 LINE-UP RADIO TRUNKING (Link Aggregation Radio Side) ....................................322

30.1 RADIO TRUNKING MODE (INTERNAL PORT - PORT A) .......................................... 322
30.1.1 To verify the status of the internal port in relation to the trunking mode....... 322
30.1.2 To enable/disable the Trunking mode for the internal port .......................... 323

31 LINE-UP LINE TRUNKING (Link Aggregation Line Side) .........................................324

31.1 LINE TRUNKING MODE .................................................................................... 324

32 LINE-UP OAM .........................................................................................................326

32.1 FM DOMAIN ................................................................................................... 326
32.2 OAM-FM MA/MEP ............................................................................................ 327
32.3 VLAN IDENTIFIER - VLAN NAME - ETHERNET SWITCH PORT ................................. 328

33 LINE-UP ELP ..........................................................................................................329

33.1 ETHERNET LINE PROTECTION (ELP) .................................................................. 329

34 LINE-UP ACL ..........................................................................................................330

34.1 ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL) .......................................................................... 330

35 LINE-UP SYNCHRONISATION .................................................................................332

35.1 LINE-UP SYNCHRONISATION........................................................................... 332
35.2 SYNCHRONISATION FROM LAN3 AT 1GBIT/S...................................................... 333
35.3 SYNCHRONIZATION FROM E1........................................................................... 333

Section 5.
COMMISSIONING REPORT 339

36 COMMISSIONING REPORT FOR ALCPLUS2E IDU ....................................................339

36.1 GENERAL INFORMATIONS................................................................................ 339
36.1.1 Documentation ..................................................................................... 339
36.1.2 Site Identifiers...................................................................................... 340
36.1.3 Configurations ...................................................................................... 340

MN.00224.E - 018 9
 36.1.4 Network addresses (DCN) ...................................................................... 341
36.2 SITE INSPECTION ........................................................................................... 343
36.3 COMMISSIONING CHECKS ............................................................................... 344
36.4 COMMISSIONING MEASURES ........................................................................... 347
36.4.1 Tributary connections stability ................................................................ 347
36.4.2 Link Fade Margin .................................................................................. 348
36.4.3 Loops and maintenance ......................................................................... 349
36.5 ETHERNET TEST ............................................................................................. 351
36.5.1 Link Residual BER test ........................................................................... 353
36.6 FINAL CHECK LIST.......................................................................................... 354
36.7 FINAL REPORT ............................................................................................... 355
36.7.1 Link activation date ............................................................................... 355
36.7.2 Certificate ............................................................................................ 356

Section 6.
MAINTENANCE 357

37 ALARMS AND TROUBLESHOOTING .........................................................................357

37.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 357
37.2 TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................... 357
37.2.1 Front LEDs ........................................................................................... 357
37.3 SYMPTOMS AND HYPOTHESIS .......................................................................... 358
37.4 TOOLS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................... 358
37.5 MULTIPLE ALARMS.......................................................................................... 359
37.6 ALCPLUS2E ALARMS ....................................................................................... 359
37.6.1 Most common scenarios......................................................................... 360
37.6.2 Common alarm group............................................................................ 361
37.6.3 ETH LAN group alarms........................................................................... 363
37.6.4 IDU group alarms ................................................................................. 364
37.6.5 Node group alarms................................................................................ 365
37.6.6 Plug-in module group alarms .................................................................. 366
37.6.7 Radio group alarms ............................................................................... 367
37.6.8 RIM group alarms ................................................................................. 368
37.6.9 RT group alarms ................................................................................... 368
37.6.10STM-1 group alarms ............................................................................. 369
37.6.11SETS group alarms .............................................................................. 370
37.7 TROUBLESHOOTING TEST ............................................................................... 371
37.7.1 PRBS................................................................................................... 371
37.7.2 VLAN test: OAM MEP and CCM ................................................................ 371
37.8 LOOPS .......................................................................................................... 372
37.8.1 Results of loops .................................................................................... 372
37.9 QUALITY ALARMS ........................................................................................... 373
37.10 RADIO LINK QUALITY PROBLEMS...................................................................... 374
37.10.1Radio link affected by fading.................................................................. 374
37.10.2Radio link affected by interference ......................................................... 374

10 MN.00224.E - 018
 Section 7.
PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION 375

38 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION .......................................................................375

38.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 375
38.2 WEBLCT ........................................................................................................ 375

Section 8.
COMPOSITION 379

39 COMPOSITION OF ALplus2 IDU..............................................................................379

39.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 379
39.2 IDU PART NUMBER ......................................................................................... 379
39.3 COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT ................................................................ 380

40 COMPOSITION OF ALCplus2 IDU............................................................................382

40.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 382
40.2 IDU PART NUMBER ......................................................................................... 382

41 COMPOSITION OF ALCplus2e IDU ..........................................................................384

41.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 384
41.2 IDU PART NUMBER ......................................................................................... 384

42 COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT.........................................................................387

42.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 387

Section 9.
LISTS AND SERVICES 413

43 LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................413

44 LIST OF TABLES .....................................................................................................421

45 ASSISTANCE SERVICE............................................................................................423

MN.00224.E - 018 11
12 MN.00224.E - 018
 Section 1.
USER GUIDE

1 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A. declares that the products:

- digital radio relay system AS6 and ASN6

- digital radio relay system AS7 and ASN7

- digital radio relay system AS8 and ASN8

- digital radio relay system AS10 and ASN10

- digital radio relay system AS11 and ASN11

- digital radio relay system AS13 and ASN13

- digital radio relay system AS15 and ASN15

- digital radio relay system AS18 and ASN18

- digital radio relay system AS23 and ASN23

- digital radio relay system AS25 and ASN25

- digital radio relay system AS28 and ASN28

- digital radio relay system AS32 and ASN32

- digital radio relay system AS38 and ASN38

complies with the essential requirements of article 3 of the R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC) and therefore is
marked CE.

The following standards have been applied:

- EN 60950-1: 2006 “Safety of information technology equipment”.

- EN 301 489–4 V.1.3.1 (2002–8): “Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum Matters (ERM);
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 4. Specific con-
ditions for fixed radio links and ancillary equipment and services”

- ETSI EN 301 751 V.1.1. (2002–12): “Fixed Radio Systems; Point–to point equipment and antennas;
generic harmonized standard for point–to–point digital fixed radio systems and antennas covering the
essential requirements under article 3.2 of the 1999/5/EC Directive”.

MN.00224.E - 018 13
 2 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY
RULES

2.1 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK

Do not touch the bare hands until the circuit has been opened. pen the circuit by switching off the line
switches. If that is not possible protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the con-
ductor.

2.1.1 Artificial respiration

It is important to start mouth respiration at once and to call a doctor immediately. suggested procedure
for mouth to mouth respiration method is described in the Tab.1.

2.1.2 Treatment of burns

This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while
artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).

Warning

• Do not attempt to remove clothing from burnt sections

• Apply dry gauze on the burns

• Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.

14 MN.00224.E - 018
 Tab.1 - Artificial respiration

Step Description Figure

Lay the patient on his back with his arms parallel to the body.
If the patient is laying on an inclined plane, make sure that his
1 stomach is slightly lower than his chest. Open the patients
mouth and check that there is no foreign matter in mouth (den-
tures, chewing gum, etc.).

Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put an hand under
the patient’s head and one under his neck.

Lift the patient’s head and let it recline backwards as far

2 as possible.

Shift the hand from the patient’s neck to his chin and his
mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the other fingers
closed together.

3 While performing these operations take a good supply of oxy-

gen by taking deep breaths with your mouth open

With your thumb between the patient’s chin and mouth keep
his lips together and blow into his nasal cavities

While performing these operations observe if the patient’s

chest rises. If not it is possible that his nose is blocked: in that
case open the patient’s mouth as much as possible by pressing
on his chin with your hand, place your lips around his mouth
and blow into his oral cavity. Observe if the patient’s chest
5
heaves. This second method can be used instead of the first
even when the patient’s nose is not obstructed, provided his
nose is kept closed by pressing the nostrils together using the
hand you were holding his head with. The patient’s head must
be kept sloping backwards as much as possible.

Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of

twelve/fifteen expirations per minute. Go on like this until the
6
patient has regained conscious–ness, or until a doctor has as-
certained his death.

2.2 SAFETY RULES

When the equipment units are provided with the plate, shown in Fig.1, it means that they contain compo-
nents electrostatic charge sensitive.

MN.00224.E - 018 15
 Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication

In order to prevent the units from being damaged while handling, it is advisable to wear an elasticized band
(Fig.2) around the wrist ground connected through coiled cord (Fig.3).

Fig.2 - Elasticized band

Fig.3 - Coiled cord

This device has Class I LASER modules: it is not required to have a laser warning label or other laser state-
ment (IEC 60825-1).

16 MN.00224.E - 018
 2.3 CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL &
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT)

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems). This
marking of Fig.4 shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with other
household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human
health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it
responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either
the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and
how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier
and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other
commercial wastes for disposal.

Fig.4 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419

2.4 INTERNAL BATTERY

Inside the equipment, in IDU unit, there is a lithium battery.

CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries
according to law.

MN.00224.E - 018 17
 3 PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL

3.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL

The purpose of this manual consists in providing the user with information which permit to operate and
maintain the ALS radio family.

Warning: This manual does not include information relevant to the SCT/LCT management program win-
dows and relevant application. They will provided by the program itself as help-on line.

3.2 AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE

The following knowledge and skills are required to operate the equipment:
• a basic understanding of microwave transmission

• installation and maintenance experience on digital radio system

• a good knowledge of IP/OSI networks and routing policy.

3.3 STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL

The manual is subdivided into sections each of them developing a specific topic entitling the section.

Each section consists of a set of chapters, enlarging the main subject master.

Section 1 – User Guide

It provides the information about the main safety rules and expounds the purpose and the structure of the
manual.

Section 2 – Description and specifications

It traces the broad line of equipment operation and lists the main technical characteristics of the whole
equipment and units it consists of.

List of abbreviation meaning is also supplied.

18 MN.00224.E - 018
 Section 3 – Installation

The mechanical installation procedures are herein set down as well as the user electrical connections.

The content of the tool kit (if supplied) is also listed.

Section 4 – Line–Up

Line–up procedures are described as well as checks to be carried out for the equipment correct operation.
The list of the instruments to be used and their characteristics are also set down.

Section 5 – Commissioning report

This section describes how to prepare a commissioning report regarding the installation of a link

Section 6 – Maintenance

In this section a description of alarms is given in order to help operators to perform equipment mainte-
nance and troubleshooting.

Section 7 – Programming and supervision

The ALS radio family is programmed and supervised using different software tools. Some of them are al-
ready available, some other will be available in the future.

This section lists the tools implemented and indicates if descriptions are already available.
Each description of software tools is supplied in a separated manual.

Section 8 – Composition

Position, part numbers of the components the equipment consist of, are shown in this section.

Section 9 – Lists and assistance

This section contains the lists of figures and tables and the assistance service information.

MN.00224.E - 018 19
20 MN.00224.E - 018
 Section 2.
DESCRIPTIONS AND
SPECIFICATION

4 ABBREVIATION LIST

4.1 ABBREVIATION LIST

- ACM Adaptive Code Modulation

- AF Assured Forwarding
- AL Access Link

- ALS Access LInk Series

- AIS Alarm Indication Signal

- ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control

- BB Baseband

- BBER Background Block Error Radio

- BER Bit Error Rate

- CCM Continuity Check Message

- DSCP Differentiated Service Code Point

- DSP Digital Signal Processing

- E1 2 Mbit/s

- EMC/EMI Electromagnetic Compatibility/Electromagnetic Interference

- EOC Embedded Overhead Channel

- ERC European Radiocommunication Committee

- ESD Electrostatic Discharge

- FEC Forward Error Corrector

- FEM Fast Ethernet Module

- HDLC High Level Data Link Control

MN.00224.E - 018 21
 - IDU Indoor Unit

- IF Intermediate Frequency

- IpToS Type of Service IP

- LAN Local Area Network

- LAPS Link Access Procedure SDH

- LC Lucent Connector

- LCT Local Craft Terminal

- LIM Line Interface Module

- LLF Link Loss Forwarding

- LOF Loss Of Frame

- LOS Loss Of Signal

- MA Maintenance Association

- MAC Media Access Control

- MD Maintenance Domain

- MDI Medium Dependent Interface

- MDIX Medium Dependent Interface Crossover

- MEP Maintenance End Point

- MIB Management Information Base

- MIP Maintenance Intermediate Point

- MMIC Monolitic Microwave Integrated Circuit

- MTBF Mean Time Between Failure

- NE Network Element

- OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance

- ODU Outdoor Unit

- OSI Open System Interconnection

- PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

- PPI Plesiochronous Physical Interface

- PPP Point to Point Protocol

- PTOS Priority Type Of Service

- RIM Radio Interface Module

- SCT Subnetwork Craft Terminal

- SFP Small Form-factor Pluggable

- SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

- TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

- TOS Type Of Service

- VID Virtual LAN Identifier

- VLAN Virtual LAN

- WFQ Wait Fair Queue

- Wayside Traffic Additional 2 Mbit/s Traffic

22 MN.00224.E - 018
 5 SYSTEM PRESENTATION

5.1 RECOMMENDATION

The equipment complies with the following international standards:

• EN 301 489–4 for EMC

• EN 302 217 for all frequency bands

• ITU–R recommendations for all frequency bands

• EN 300 132–2 characteristics for power supply

• EN 300 019 environmental characteristics (Operation class 3.2 for IDU and class 4.1 for ODU; stor-
age: class 1.2; transport: class 2.3)

• EN 60950 for safety.

5.2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

The ALS “plus2 family” is the new packet radio link from SIAE. These packet radio links are split mount
equipment made up of:

• an indoor unit called IDU for 19” rack mounting that interfaces tributaries and supervises the full
equipment

• an outdoor unit called ODU for pole or wall mounting with RF circuitry and antenna flange.

IDU units are available in the following versions

• ALplus2: modular. Main circuits are divided in modules, replaceable in case of failure

• ALCplus2: compact. All the circuitry is housed in a single board

• ALCplus2e: compact. All the circuitry is housed in a single board.

ODU units are available in the following versions:

• AS (max capacity of 341 Mbit/s)

• ASN (max capacity of 341 Mbit/s)

• ASNK (max capacity of 341 Mbit/s).

5.3 ALPLUS2 MODULAR IDU

The unit is available in the following configurations:

• ALplus2 1+0 for E1 and Ethernet traffic (see Fig.5)

• ALplus2 1+1 for E1 and Ethernet traffic (see Fig.6)

The following modules make up the modular IDU.

MN.00224.E - 018 23
 5.3.1 LIM

The LIM interfaces the in (out) E1 streams and Ethernet traffic and, through a multiplexing (demultiplex-
ing) and bit insertion (bit extraction) process, supplies (receives) the aggregate signal to the modulator
(from the demodulator). In addition the LIM performs the digital processing of the QAM modulator.

Moreover the module duplicates the main signals at the Tx side and performs the changeover at the Rx
side in the 1+1 version.

5.3.2 RIM

The RIM contains:

• the IF section of the programmable modemodulator (8 available profiles: 4QAM, 4QAM strong,
8PSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM)

• the power supply unit that processes the battery voltage to supply power to the IDU circuits and
send the battery voltage towards the ODU

• the cable interface for the bidirectional communication between IDU and ODU via interconnecting
cable

• thanks to ACM (Adaptive Code Modulation) actual modulation can be automatically changed accord-
ing to available S/N.

5.3.3 Controller

The Controller performs the following operations:

• interfaces the service signals as 1x9600 bit/s or 2x4800 bit/s, 64 kbit/s, 2 Mbit/s (details are given
in the system technical specification)
• contains the equipment software that permits to control and to manage all the equipment function-
ality through a main controller and associated peripherals distributed within IDU and ODU

• interfaces the SCT/LCT management system through Ethernet, RS232 and USB ports

• receive external alarms and route them to relay contact along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.

5.4 ALCPLUS2 COMPACT IDU

The unit is available in the following configurations:

• ALCplus2 1+0 see Fig.7

• ALCplus2 1+1 see Fig.8

• ALCplus2 1+0 exp 16E1 see Fig.9

• ALCplus2 1+1 exp 16E1 see Fig.10

• ALCplus2 1+0 exp 32E1 see Fig.11

• ALCplus2 1+1 exp 32E1 see Fig.12

• ALCplus2 1+0 exp nodal see Fig.13

• ALCplus2 1+1 exp nodal see Fig.14

24 MN.00224.E - 018
 The compact IDU are made by a single board.

The line interfaces contain the tributary connectors and, by means of processes of multiplexing/demulti-
plexing and of bit insertion/extraction, provide/receive the aggregate signal to/from the modulator/de-
modulator. The line interfaces realize the digital processing for the QAM modulator and, in 1+1
configuration, duplicate the main signals on the transmission side and execute the switch on the reception
side.

The interfaces to the ODU contain the interface of the cable for the bidirectional communication between
ODU and IDU, and implement the IF section of the mo-demodulator. The power supply units of the IDU
process the battery voltage and supply power to the circuits of IDU and ODU. The controller section of the
radio contains the interfaces of the service channels, stores the firmware of the IDU, interfaces the SIAE
management systems through dedicated supervision ports and forwards external and internal alarms to
the relay contacts.

5.5 ALCPLUS2E COMPACT IDU

The unit is available in the following configurations listed in Tab.2.

Tab.2 - ALCplus2e IDU configurations

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1 See Fig.15

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 See Fig.16

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL See Fig.17

1+0
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1 EPP See Fig.15

EPP ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 EPP See Fig.16

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL EPP See Fig.17

ALCplus2 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1 See Fig.18

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 See Fig.19

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL See Fig.20

2+0/1+1 EPP
ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1 EPP See Fig.18

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 EPP See Fig.19

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL

See Fig.20
EPP

ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 2xE1 See Fig.18

ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 See Fig.19

ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1

See Fig.20
NODAL
2+0 or
XPIC ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 2xE1 EPP See Fig.18
1+0 XPIC

ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1

See Fig.19
EPP EPP

ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1

See Fig.20
NODAL EPP

MN.00224.E - 018 25
 ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC 4GE 2xE1 See Fig.18

ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 See Fig.19

ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL See Fig.20

XPIC 1+1 XPIC
ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC 4GE 2xE1 EPP See Fig.18

ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 EPP See Fig.19

EPP
ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL
See Fig.20
EPP

The Compact IDU and EPP (Enhanced Packet Processing) are made of a single board and expansions like
34E1 2xSTM1 or 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL.

The line interface contain the tributary connectors and, by means of processes of multiplexing/demulti-
plexing and of bit insertion/extraction, provide/receive the aggregate signal to/from the modulator/de-
modulator. The line interfaces realize the digital processing for the QAM modulator and, in 1+1
configuration, duplicate the main signals on the transmission side and execute the switch on the reception
side.

The interfaces to the ODU contain the interface of the cable for the bidirectional communication between
ODU and IDU, and implement the IF section of the mo-demodulator. The power supply units of the IDU
process the battery voltage and supply power to the circuits of IDU and ODU.
The controller section of the radio contains the interfaces to internal circuits, stores the firmware of the
IDU, interfaces the SIAE management systems through dedicated supervision ports and forwards external
and internal alarms to the relay contacts.

The IDU ALCplus2e XPIC permits different transmission methods:

• ACAP Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarization

• ACCP Adjacent Channel Co Polarization

• CCDP Co Channel Dual Polarization

CCDP, with XPIC technology, in ALCplus2e IDU doubles the capacity of radio link, a clear advantage to the
network operator at the dense frequency bands.
CCDP operation provides two parallel radio streams in the same RF channel with orthogonal polarizations,
thus doubling the radio hop total capacity. Separate and independent signals are transmitted, over the
same RF channel using a single antenna with a double polarization feeder. However, despite of the orthog-
onality of the two signals, some interference between the signals almost inevitably occurs, due to imperfect
antenna isolation and channel degradation.

Each polarization demodulator path receives a large signal from the orthogonal polarization, causing cross-
polarization interference. XPIC systems cancels this interference in order to demodulate both vertical and
horizontal signal successfully. In XPIC technology, each polarization path receives both the polar and the
cross-polar interference.

In ALCplus2e XPIC, the XPIC circuitry and ACM engine gives to the network operator high capacity and
high availability.

Tab.3 - ALCplus2e IDU configurations (updated hardware)

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 See Fig.15

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 See Fig.16

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL See Fig.17

1+0
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 EPP See Fig.15

EPP ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP See Fig.16

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL See Fig.17

26 MN.00224.E - 018
 ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 18E1 See Fig.18

ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 See Fig.19

ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL See Fig.20

1+1
ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 18E1 EPP See Fig.18

EPP ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP See Fig.19

ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL See Fig.20

Hw
PWE3 1+0 EPP ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 PWE3 See Fig.15
ready

Hw
PWE3 2+0/1+1 EPP ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18E1 EPP PWE3 See Fig.15
ready

Hw
PWE3 2+0 EPP ALFCplus2e 2+0 XPIC 4GE 18E1 EPP PWE3 See Fig.15
ready

Hw
STM1 bulk
PWE3 1+0 EPP ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP PWE3 See Fig.16
transmission
ready

Hw
STM1 bulk ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP
PWE3 2+0/1+1 EPP See Fig.16
transmission PWE3
ready

Hw
STM1 bulk ALCplus2E 2+0 XPIC 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP
PWE3 2+0 EPP See Fig.16
transmission PWE3
ready

Some IDUs with updated hardware are PWE3 ready.

Some IDUs with updated hardware permit STM-1 bulk transmission and are PWE3 ready.

5.6 N+0

The ALCplus2e radio links can be combined together up to 4 ODU connected to a multicirculator to feed
vertical antenna port and other 4 ODU connected to another multicirculator to feed horizontal antenna port.

The result is a radio link with eight streams 8+0 with XPIC. This is at 7GHz and channel bandwidth of
28MHz. See Fig.21.

5.7 ODU

The ODU unit contains IF and RF circuits that permits to transmit and receive the signals relevant the user
traffic, the management and the telemetry and it is connected with its IDU unit through a single cable.

The ODU employs four different passband filters with the following bandwidth: 7, 14, 28 and 56 MHz. A 40
MHz bandwidth is available in some RF band only (ASN6U, ASN11). The ODU unit is available in three dif-
ferent versions: AS (only from hardware version 003), ASN and ASNK.

MN.00224.E - 018 27
 The configuration of the ODU can be 1+0 or 1+1 with integrated or separated antenna. In 1+1 configura-
tion the antenna coupling is performed through a balanced or an unbalanced hybrid system (branching
unit).

For ALCplus2e 8+0 configuration is also available. This configuration is performed through a multicirculator
for each polarization.

5.8 MANAGEMENT

ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e equipment can be locally and remotely controlled via an internal dedicated
application software called WebLCT through Internet Browser and LAN connection. A serial/USB connection
can be used through the WebLCT console, an application that can be downloaded from SIAE site (http://
www.siaemic.com)

It provides a friendly graphic interface complying with current standard use of keyboard, mouse, windows
and so on.

Other software available for management of a network of ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e is SCT (Windows)

and NMS5UX/NMS5LX (Unix/Linux).

5.8.1 Hardware platform

The hardware platform used by SCT/LCT is based on personal computer having at least following charac-
teristics:

• microprocessor Pentium 4 or similar

• 1GB RAM

• windows compatible graphic monitor

• HD with 200 Mbyte of free space

• Windows 95/Windows NT/Windows 98/Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Vista/Windows 7

• LAN or USB connection (or RS232 ALplus2 only)

5.8.2 Management ports

The SCT/LCT program is connected to the equipment via the following communication ports:

• MNGT/1 or MNGT/2 (Ethernet LAN 10BaseT)

• RS232 (asynchronous serial line) for ALplus2 only

• LCT (USB)

• Embedded Overhead Channel (EOC) embedded into the radio frame

• Embedded Overhead Channel (EOC) embedded into a 16 kbit/s or 4x16 kbit/s time slot of one of
the 2 Mbit/s tributary signals
• In band management through traffic LAN (separated VLAN required)

28 MN.00224.E - 018
 5.8.2.1 MNGT/1 and MNGT/2

• LAN cable type 802.3 10BaseT

• Connector RJ45

• Connection to LAN direct with a CAT5 Twisted Pair

• Protocol TCP/IP or IPoverOSI

5.8.2.2 RS232

• Electrical interface V.28

• Connector SUB-D 9pin

• Asynchronous baud rate 9600,19200,38400,57600

• Protocol PPP

5.8.2.3 LCT USB

• Electrical interface USB 1.1 version

• Baud rate 1.5 Mbit/s

• Protocol PPP

5.8.3 Protocols

SNMP along with IP or OSI protocol stacks are used to reach and manage the equipment operation.

1 2 3 ON 48V
SPEED
PoE
ACT FAIL
LINK
+

10-100-1000 BaseT/100-1000 BaseX 1 STM1 2 Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16

-
LINK LINKNURG URG
ACT ACT WAY
SIDE
SW TEST
LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT MNGT/1 MNGT/2 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s

Fig.5 - ALplus2 1+0

1 2 3 ON 48V
SPEED
PoE
ACT FAIL
LINK
+

10-100-1000 BaseT/100-1000 BaseX 1 STM1 2 Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16

-
LINK LINK NURG URG 48V
ACT ACT WAY
SIDE
+

SW TEST
LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT MNGT/1 MNGT/2 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
-

Fig.6 - ALplus2 1+1

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 Trib. B

2
M 3.15A
250VAC 48VDC
MNGT LAN 3 LAN 4 NURG URG
1 LCT
SW
+

GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A SD USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.7 - ALCplus2 1+0 and ALCplus2e 2E1 1+0

MN.00224.E - 018 29
 YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 Trib. B

2 2
M 3.15A
250VAC
MNGT 48VDC
LAN 3 LAN 4 NURG URG
1 LCT 1 2 1
SW

+
GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A SD USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.8 - ALCplus2 1+1 and ALCplus2e E1 2+0/1+1 and ALCplus2e 2E1 XPIC 2+0

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16

2
M 3.15A
250VAC 48VDC
MNGT LAN 3 LAN 4 NURG URG
1 LCT
SW

+
GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A SD USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.9 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp 16E1

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16

2 2
M 3.15A
250VAC
MNGT 48VDC
LAN 3 LAN 4 NURG URG
1 LCT 1 2 1
SW

+
GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A SD USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.10 - ALCplus2 1+1 exp 16E1

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 STM1 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16 Trib. 17-24 Trib. 25-32
1 2
2
ON M 3.15A 48V
MNGT LAN 3 LAN 4 250V
NURG URG
1 LCT
SW
-
+
GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A SD USER IN/OUT TEST ON

Fig.11 - ALCplus2 1+0 32E1

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 STM1 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16 Trib. 17-24 Trib. 25-32
1 2 2
2
ON M 3.15A
MNGT 48V
LAN 3 LAN 4 NURG URG 250V
1 LCT 1 2 1
SW
-
+

GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A SD USER IN/OUT TEST ON

Fig.12 - ALCplus2 1+1 32E1

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 STM1 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16
1 2 1 2
2
M 3.15A
ON 250VAC 48VDC
MNGT NBUS
LAN 3 LAN 4 NURG URG
1 LCT
SW
+

GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A SD USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.13 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp nodal

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 STM1 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16
1 2 1 2
2 2
M 3.15A
ON 250VAC
MNGT NBUS 48VDC
LAN 3 LAN 4 NURG URG
1 LCT 1 2 1
SW
+

GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A SD USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.14 - ALCplus2 1+1 exp nodal

30 MN.00224.E - 018
 YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 Trib. B

2 M 3.15A
250V 48V
MNGT LAN 3 LAN 4 NURG URG
1
LCT
R SW

+
GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.15 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 STM1 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16 Trib. 17-24 Trib. 25-32
1 2
2
ON M 3.15A 48V
MNGT LAN 3 LAN 4 250V
NURG URG
1
LCT
R SW

+
GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.16 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 STM1 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16
1 2 1 2
2 M 3.15A
ON 250V 48V
MNGT NBUS
LAN 3 LAN 4 NURG URG
1
LCT
R SW
-

+
GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A USER IN/OUT TEST ON

Fig.17 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 Trib. B

2
2 M 3.15A
250V
MNGT 1 2 48V
LAN 3 LAN 4 NURG URG
1 1
LCT
R SW

+
GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.18 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 STM1 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16 Trib. 17-24 Trib. 25-32
1 2 2
2
ON M 3.15A 48V
MNGT LAN 3 LAN 4 1 2 250V
NURG URG
1 1
LCT
R SW
+

GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.19 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 STM1 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16
1 2 1 2
2
2 M 3.15A
ON 250V
MNGT NBUS 48V
LAN 3 LAN 4 1 2 NURG URG
1 1
LCT
R SW
+

GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.20 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL

MN.00224.E - 018 31
 Fig.21 - N+0

32 MN.00224.E - 018
 6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

6.1 IDU CHARACTERISTICS

In the following paragraphs are listed only the main characteristics of an IDU typology.

Further information are included in the chapter relevant that IDU.

6.1.1 Traffic interfaces

• ALplus2, max transmitted capacity 341 Mbit/s:

- 16E1 G.703 75/120 Ohm (2SCSI connector, 8E1 each)

- 2 STM1 (SFP connector)

- 3 Ethernet ports: 2 RJ45, electrical (LAN1 and LAN2) and 2 SFP, optical (LAN1 and LAN3). LAN1
can be set electrical or optical.

• ALCplus2, max transmitted capacity 341 Mbit/s. Traffic options can vary depending on IDU version:

- 18E1 G.703 75/120 Ohm (2SCSI connectors, 8E1 each + 2RJ45)

- 34E1 G.703 75/120 Ohm (4SCSI connectors, 8E1 each + 2RJ45)

- 2 STM1 (SFP connector)

- 4 Ethernet ports: 4 RJ45, electrical (LAN1, LAN2, LAN3 and LAN4) and 2 SFP, optical (LAN3 and
LAN4). LAN3 and LAN4 can be set electrical or optical
- 2 BUS for traffic connections with other ALCplus2 IDUs (same version).

• ALCplus2e, max transmitted capacity 682 Mbit/s, 341 Mbit/s, per carrier (IDU 2+0/XPIC). Traffic
options can vary depending on IDU version:

- 18E1 G.703 75/120 Ohm (2SCSI connectors, 8E1 each + 2RJ45)

- 34E1 G.703 75/120 Ohm (4SCSI connectors, 8E1 each + 2RJ45)

- 2 STM1 (SFP connector)

- 4 Ethernet ports: 4 RJ45, electrical (LAN1, LAN2, LAN3 and LAN4) and 2 SFP, optical (LAN3 and
LAN4). LAN3 and LAN4 can be set electrical or optical

- 2 BUS for traffic connections with other ALCplus2e IDUs (same version, TBA).

6.1.1.1 2 Mbit/s (E1 G.703)

Input side

• Bit rate 2048 kbit/s ±50 ppm

• Line code HDB3

• Rated impedance 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm

MN.00224.E - 018 33
 • Rated level 2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm

• Return loss 12 dB from 57 kHz to 102 kHz

18 dB from 102 kHz to 2048 kHz
14 dB from 2048 kHz to 3072 kHz

• Max attenuation of the input cable 6 dB according to f trend

• Accepted jitter see Tab. 2, CCITT Rec. G.823

• Transfer function see Fig. 1, CCITT Rec. G.742

• Connector type SCSI 50 pin

Output side

• Bit rate 2048 kbit/s ±50 ppm

• Rated impedance 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm

• Rated level 2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm

• Output jitter according to G.742/G.823

• Pulse shape see Fig. 15, CCITT Rec. G.703

• Connector type SCSI 50 pin

6.1.1.2 STM1 electrical

Input side

• Bit rate 155520 kbit/s ±4.6 ppm

• Line code CMI

• Rated impedance 75 Ohm

• Rated level 1 Vpp ±0.1V

• Return loss 15 dB from 8 MHz to 240 MHz

• Max attenuation of the input cable 12.7 dB at 78 MHz ( f trend)

Output side

• Bit rate 155520 kbit/s ±4.6 ppm

• Rated level 1 Vpp ±0.1 V

• Pulse shape see Fig. 24 and Fig. 25 of ITU-T Rec. G.703

6.1.1.3 STM1 optical

The STM1 interface can be specialised for different applications, by simply equipping the STM1 interface
with the appropriate pluggable optical or electrical transceiver. Optical interface has LC connectors. Electric
interface has 1.0/2.3 connectors. The characteristics of all the possible optical interfaces are summarised
in Tab.4.

34 MN.00224.E - 018
 Tab.4 - Optical interface characteristics

Minimum
Launched Operating Distance
Interface Ref. sensitivity Transceiver Fibre
power (dBm) wavelength (km)
(dBm)

L-1.2 G.957 0 ... -5 -34 1480 - 1580 Laser Single-Mode Up to 80

L-1.1 G.957 0 ... -5 -34 1263 - 1360 Laser Single-Mode Up to 40

S-1.1 G.957 -8 ... -15 -28 1263 - 1360 Laser Single-Mode Up to 15

I-1 ANSI -14 ... -20 -28 1263 - 1360 Laser MultiMode Up to 2

The LIM is provided with Automatic Laser Shutdown as prescribed by ITU-T G.664 Recommendation.

6.1.1.4 Ethernet interface

- Ethernet connectors IEEE 802.3 10/100/1000 BaseT RJ45

see also Tab.5

Tab.5 - Ethernet optical interfaces characteristics, SFP and LLC connectors

Operating wave-
Interface Ref. Link budget Fibre Distance
length nm

Fast Ethernet IEEE

1310 Multimode Up to 550m
100BaseFx 802.3

Gigabit Ethernet IEEE

850 Multimode Up to 2km
1000BaseSx 802.3z

Gigabit Ethernet IEEE

9.5dB 1310 Single Mode Up to 10km
1000BaseLx 802.3z

Gigabit Ethernet IEEE

19dB 1310 Single Mode Up to 40km
1000BaseLx 802.3z

Gigabit Ethernet IEEE

25dB 1550 Single Mode Up to 80km
1000BaseLx 802.3z

- Ethernet switch functionality MAC Switching

MAC Learning
MAC Ageing
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IEEE 802.3x Flow Control
IEEE 802.1p QoS
IP-V4 ToS/DSCP
IP-V6 TC/DSCP
IEEE 802.1D STP
IEEE 802.1W RSTP

- Guaranteed Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) see Tab.6

MN.00224.E - 018 35
 Tab.6 - Guaranteed Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) for ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e
(Ethernet only)

Frame Size (byte)

Bandwidth Modulation
64 128 256 512 1024 1518

4QAMs 10.1 9.4 9.1 8.9 8.7 8.7

4QAM 12.5 11.6 11.2 11.0 10.8 10.7

8PSK 17.1 16.0 15.4 15.1 14.8 14.7

16QAM 24.3 22.7 21.8 21.4 21.0 20.9

7 MHz
32QAM 29.3 27.4 26.4 25.8 25.4 25.2

64QAM 36.3 33.8 32.6 31.9 31.3 31.2

128QAM 40.7 38.0 36.6 35.8 35.2 35.0

256QAM 47.9 44.7 43.0 42.2 41.4 41.2

4QAMs 20.3 18.9 18.2 17.8 17.5 17.4

4QAM 24.2 22.6 21.7 21.3 20.9 20.8

8PSK 33.7 31.4 30.3 29.6 29.1 29.0

16QAM 47.6 44.5 42.8 41.9 41.2 41.0

14 MHz
32QAM 59.7 55.8 53.7 52.6 51.6 51.4

64QAM 71.5 66.7 64.2 62.9 61.8 61.5

128QAM 83.1 77.6 74.7 73.2 71.9 71.5

256QAM 97.7 91.2 87.7 85.9 84.4 84.0

4QAMs 41.5 38.6 37.2 36.4 35.8 35.6

4QAM 48.7 45.3 43.6 42.7 41.9 41.7

8PSK 72.8 67.7 65.2 63.9 62.7 62.4

16QAM 96.7 90.0 86.6 84.8 83.4 82.9

28 MHz
32QAM 121.1 112.7 108.5 106.2 104.4 103.8

64QAM 145.0 135.0 129.9 127.3 125.0 124.4

128QAM 168.7 157.0 151.1 148.0 145.4 144.7

256QAM 198.1 184.4 177.5 173.9 170.8 169.9

4QAMs 82.3 76.6 73.6 72.1 71.2 70.9

4QAM 95.7 89.1 85.6 83.8 82.8 82.5

8PSK 142.9 133.0 127.7 125.0 123.5 123.1

16QAM 192.9 179.0 171.9 168.3 166.1 165.5

56 MHz
32QAM 235.3 218.4 209.8 205.3 202.7 201.9

64QAM 280.0 259.8 249.6 244.3 241.1 240.2

128QAM 333.3 309.6 297.4 291.0 288.2 287.2

256QAM 396.2 369.9 355.3 347.7 343.2 341.9

- Estimated Ethernet throughput (Mbit/s) see Tab.7

36 MN.00224.E - 018
 Tab.7 - Estimated Ethernet throughput

Frame size (byte)

Bandwidth Modul.
64 1518

4QAMs 57 49

4QAM 69 60

8PSK 100 86

16QAM 136 117

40 MHz
32QAM 164 141

64QAM 202 174

128QAM 238 205

256QAM 277 239

- Guaranteed ethernet latency (ms) see Tab.8

Tab.8 - Guaranteed Ethernet Latency (ms) for ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e (Ethernet only)

Frame Size (byte)

Bandwidth Modulation
64 128 256 512 1024 1518 10000

4QAMs 1.042 1.111 1.248 1.522 2.09 2.609 11.684

4QAM 0.844 0.900 1.011 1.233 1.693 2.113 9.465

8PSK 0.627 0.668 0.750 0.913 1.229 1.541 6.974

16QAM 0.477 0.505 0.560 0.67 0.895 1.115 4.755

7 MHz
32QAM 0.401 0.426 0.475 0.573 0.756 0.938 4.214

64QAM 0.477 0.496 0.533 0.607 0.768 0.908 3.35

128QAM 0.52 0.537 0.572 0.642 0.774 0.914 3.222

256QAM 0.507 0.521 0.550 0.608 0.726 0.845 2.761

4QAMs 0.954 0.987 1.053 1.186 1.462 1.715 6.104

4QAM 0.8 0.828 0.884 0.995 1.226 1.439 5.12

8PSK 0.575 0.596 0.637 0.719 0.882 1.044 3.557

16QAM 0.418 0.432 0.461 0.518 0.639 0.757 2.634

14 MHz
32QAM 0.345 0.357 0.381 0.428 0.518 0.618 2.176

64QAM 0.439 0.449 0.469 0.51 0.59 0.669 2.02

128QAM 0.458 0.467 0.486 0.523 0.594 0.663 1.907

256QAM 0.444 0.452 0.468 0.499 0.557 0.623 1.656

MN.00224.E - 018 37
 4QAMs 0.475 0.492 0.526 0.595 0.735 0.867 3.136

4QAM 0.406 0.421 0.450 0.508 0.628 0.74 2.677

8PSK 0.274 0.284 0.305 0.347 0.426 0.508 1.881

16QAM 0.214 0.222 0.238 0.271 0.334 0.395 1.483

28 MHz
32QAM 0.176 0.183 0.197 0.224 0.276 0.326 1.235

64QAM 0.227 0.232 0.243 0.265 0.311 0.356 1.067

128QAM 0.237 0.242 0.252 0.272 0.312 0.351 1.003

256QAM 0.231 0.236 0.246 0.265 0.298 0.333 0.982

4QAMs 0.241 0.250 0.268 0.304 0.377 0.447 1.651

4QAM 0.207 0.215 0.230 0.261 0.324 0.384 1.418

8PSK 0.14 0.146 0.158 0.181 0.226 0.27 1.052

16QAM 0.112 0.117 0.126 0.144 0.179 0.214 0.83

56 MHz
32QAM 0.094 0.098 0.106 0.122 0.154 0.185 0.697

64QAM 0.125 0.129 0.137 0.152 0.178 0.205 0.71

128QAM 0.126 0.129 0.135 0.147 0.172 0.196 0.601

256QAM 0.121 0.124 0.129 0.14 0.162 0.183 0.549

6.1.2 Alarm interface

User output

- Relay contacts normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC)

- Open contacts R min. 100 MOhm at 500 Vdc

- Closed contacts R max. 0.5 Ohm

- Switching voltage V max. 60 Vdc 30 Vac

- Switching current I max. 1A

User input

- Equivalent circuit recognized as a closed contact 200 Ohm resist. (max) referred to -6V (min)

- Equivalent circuit recognized as an open contact 60 kOhm (min) referred to +4 v (max)

6.1.3 Service channels

ALplus2 only.

Two service channels are available:

• V11 64 kbit/s co/contradirectional

• E1: configurable as Extra E1-1 or Extra E1-2 (connector name is “2 Mbit/s wayside” but is “in band”.

38 MN.00224.E - 018
 6.1.3.1 E1 (Connector name is 2 Mbit/s wayside)

This E1 is “in band”. Only the name is “wayside”.

Input side

• Bit rate 2048 kbit/s ±50 ppm

• Line code HDB3

• Rated impedance 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm

• Rated level 2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm

• Return loss 12 dB from 57 kHz to 102 kHz

18 dB from 102 kHz to 2048 kHz
14 dB from 2048 kHz to 3072 kHz

• Max attenuation of the input cable 6 dB according to f trend

• Accepted jitter see Tab. 2, CCITT Rec. G.823

• Transfer function see Fig. 1, CCITT Rec. G.742

• Connector type RJ45 (in/out in the same conn.)

Output side

• Bit rate 2048 kbit/s ±50 ppm

• Rated impedance 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm

• Rated level 2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm

• Output jitter according to G.742/G.823

• Pulse shape see Fig. 15, CCITT Rec. G.703

• Connector type RJ45 (in/out in the same conn.)

6.1.3.2 64 kbit/s codirectional

• Tolerance ± 100 ppm

• Coding synch + data + octet as per G.703

• Impedance 120 Ohm

• Max attenuation of the input cable 3 dB at 128 kHz

• User side CCITT Rec. G.703

• Input/output level 1 Vp/120 Ohm ±0.1 V

• Return loss see par. 1.2.1.3 in CCITT Rec. G.703

• Connector RJ45

6.1.3.3 64 kbit/s contradirectional

• Tolerance ± 100 ppm

• Coding clock and data on separate wires

• Impedance 120 Ohm

• Max attenuation of the input cable 3 dB at 128 kHz

MN.00224.E - 018 39
 • Equipment side contradirectional

• Input/output level 1 Vp/120 Ohm ±0.1 V

• Electrical interface CCITT Rec. V.11

• Connector RJ45

6.1.3.4 9600 bit/s synch/asynch

• Data interface RS232

• Electrical interface CCITT Rec. V.28

• Input speed 9600 baud

• Control wires DTR, DSR, DCD

• Connector RJ45

6.1.3.5 9600 or 2x4800 bit/s synch/asynch

• Electrical interface CCITT Rec. V.28

• Input speed 4800 or 9600 bit/s

• Electrical interface CCITT Rec. V.28

• Connector RJ45

6.1.4 Modulation and channel bandwidth

• Carrier IF mo-demodulating frequency Tx side 330 MHz

Rx side 140 MHz

• Type of modulation 4QAM strong, 4QAM, 8PSK, 16QAM, 32QAM,

64QAM, 128QAM, 256 QAM

• Bandwidth 7MHz, 14MHz, 28MHz, 56MHz

• Bandwidth ALCplus2e 7MHz, 14MHz, 28MHz, 40MHz, 56MHz

• Modulation approach ACM

• Modulating signal depending on selected capacities

• Equalization 24 taps

• Coding gain 2.5 dB at 10-6 1 dB at 10-3

• Correction LDPC

40 MN.00224.E - 018
 6.1.5 1+1 switching criteria

Rx switch

Rx switch is hitless and the system has built in capabilities of minimizing errors during the detection time.
Branch 1 is preferential and the system switches to branch 2 only when branch 1 is error affected. The
switching facility provides automatic synchronization of the two incoming streams up to:

• dynamic difference ±100 bytes

• static delays ±100 bytes.

Tab.9 shows Rx Alarm Priority.

Tab.9 - Rx Alarm Priority

Levels Definition

Priority 1 Manual forcing (selectable by software)

Priority 2 CRC pulse from demodulator

Tx switch (1+1 hot stand-by)

Tx switch is not hitless. Maximum outage due to the Tx switching (sum of the maximum automatic change-
over + Rx IDU re-synchronisation time), with ACM (Adaptive Code and Modulation) activated, is shown in
Tab.10.

Tab.10 - Maximum outage due to the Tx switching

Bandwidth Maximum outage due to the Tx switching (msec)

7 MHz < 1500

14 MHz < 1200

28 MHz < 900

56 MHz < 400

6.1.6 Cable Interface

• Interconnection with ODU unit single coaxial cable for both Tx and Rx

• Cable length 300 m

• Cable rated impedance 50 Ohm

• Signal running along the cable

- Tx nominal frequency 330 MHz

- Rx nominal frequency 140 MHz

- Telemetry IDU -> ODU 17.5 MHz

- Telemetry ODU <- IDU 5.5 MHz

- In band management through traffic LAN or VLAN

• Transceiver management signals 388 kbit/s bidirectional

• Remote power supply direct from battery voltage.

MN.00224.E - 018 41
 6.2 POWER SUPPLY AND CONSUMPTION

- Operating voltage range: -40.8 ÷-57.6 Vdc

6.2.1 IDU power consumption

- Power consumption (IDU): see Tab.11

Tab.11 - IDU power consumption

Typical Power Guaranteed Power

Typical Power Consumption (W) Config.
Consumption (W) Consumption (W)

1+0 40.0  45.0

ALplus2
1+1/2+0 48.0  53.0

1+0 34.0  39.5

ALCplus2 - 1 RU
1+1 41.0  47.0

1+0 42.0  48.5

ALCplus2e - 1 RU 1+1/2x(1+0) 56.0  64.5

2x(1+0) XPIC 64.0  73.5

1+0 45.0  52.0

ALCplus2e PWE3 - 1 RU 1+1/2x(1+0) 61.0  70.0

2x(1+0) XPIC 67.0  77.0

6.2.2 Max current absorption

In this paragraphs are listed the following three characteristics: the max current (IMAX) at the power con-
nector of the IDU alone, the max current (IMAX) at the power connector of the IDU with the complete equip-
ment (IDU 1+1 and relevant 2 ODUs) and the consumption of the IDU alone. The consumption of the
complete equipment is described inside the ODU attachment (one for each frequency) with high precision,
at this point we have considered the ODU with the higher consumption (about 25W) among all the avail-
able.

Indicated voltage is related to max current and max consumption.

N.B. The consumption of the complete equipment is described inside the ODU attachment (one for each
frequency).

• ALplus2 IMAX see Tab.12

• ALCplus2 IMAX see Tab.12

• ALCplus2e IMAX see Tab.12

The power supply connectors of ALplus2 are independent. The power supply connectors of ALCplus2 and
ALCplus2e are in parallel (through diode).

42 MN.00224.E - 018
 Tab.12 - IMAX

IDU IMAX (IDU only) IMAX (IDU+ODUs)

ALplus2 1+0 1A (@40.8 Vdc) 1.7A (@40.8 Vdc)

ALplus2 1+1 1.2A (@40.8 Vdc) 1.7A (@40.8 Vdc)

ALCplus2 1+0 0.81A (@40.8 Vdc) 1.42A (@40.8 Vdc)

ALCplus2 1+1 0.92A (@40.8 Vdc) 2.15A (@40.8 Vdc)

ALCplus2 1+0 exp 16E1 0.88A (@40.8 Vdc) 1.5A (@40.8 Vdc)

ALCplus2 1+0 exp nodal 0.91A (@40.8 Vdc) 1.52A (@40.8 Vdc)
ALCplus2 1+1 exp 16E1 1A (@40.8 Vdc) 2.23A (@40.8 Vdc)

ALCplus2 1+1 exp nodal 1.1A (@40.8 Vdc) 2.33A (@40.8 Vdc)

ALCplus2e 1+0 2E1 1.22A (@40.8 Vdc) 1.8A (@40.8 Vdc)

ALCplus2e 1+0 34E1 2xSTM-1 1.42A (@40.8 Vdc) 2A (@40.8 Vdc)

ALCplus2e 1+0 18E1 2xSTM-1 nodal 1.42A (@40.8 Vdc) 2A (@40.8 Vdc)

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 2E1 1.35A (@40.8 Vdc) 2.55A (@40.8 Vdc)

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 34E1 2xSTM-1 1.54A (@40.8 Vdc) 2.75A (@40.8 Vdc)

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 18E1 2xSTM-1 1.54A (@40.8 Vdc) 2.75A (@40.8 Vdc)

ALCplus2e 2+0 2E1 XPIC 1.45A (@40.8 Vdc) 2.1A (@40.8 Vdc)

ALCplus2E 2+0 34E1 2xSTM-1 1.64A (@40.8 Vdc) 2.85A (@40.8 Vdc)
ALCplus2e 2+0 18E1 2xSTM-1 nodal 1.64A (@40.8 Vdc) 2.85A (@40.8 Vdc)

6.2.3 Power supply alarm

Alarms describing power supply unit malfunctioning are:

• Power supply presence of power conn.

• RIM power supply internal Vdc  3 Vdc

6.2.4 Fuses

Power supply circuits are protected against overcurrent with fuses on supply line:

• ALplus2 there is an internal soldering fuse on the RIM PCB behind front panel

- Nominal current 3A

- Nominal voltage 125 Vac/dc

- Type timed

- Dimensions 6.10 mm x x2.59 mm

• ALCplus2/ALCplus2e accessible on the front panel

- Nominal current 3.15A

- Nominal voltage 250 Vac/dc

- Type medium timed

- Dimensions 5 mm x x20 mm

MN.00224.E - 018 43
 6.3 ODU CHARACTERISTICS

• Frequency range see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

• RF channelling see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

• Go-return frequency see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

• Frequency stability see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

• Spurious transmission see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

• Output power see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

• BER Rx threshold see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

• Max RF level in Rx for BER 10-3 see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

• Additional Tx and Rx losses for 1+1 version see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

• Antenna configuration see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

• Consumption see attachment relevant to ODU frequency

6.4 EQUIPMENT GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

6.4.1 Dimensions

The dimensions of the unit are the following:

• IDU ALplus2 (1+0/1+1) 480mm x 45mm x 270mm (wxhxd)

• IDU ALCplus2/ALCplus2e (1+0/1+1, all versions)480mm x 45mm x 213mm (wxhxd)

• ODU 1+0 ASN/ASNK ODU version 254mm x 254mm x 114mm (wxhxd)

• ODU 1+0 AS ODU version 254mm x 254mm x 154mm (wxhxd)

• ODU 1+1 ASN/ASNK ODU version 278mm x 254mm x 296mm (wxhxd)

• ODU 1+1 AS ODU version 358mm x 254mm x 296mm (wxhxd)

6.4.2 Weight

The weight of the units is the following:

• IDU ALplus2 (1+0/1+1) 3.5 kg

• IDU ALCplus2/ALCplus2e (1+0/1+1, all versions)2.5 kg

• ODU AS (1+0) 5.5 kg

• ODU AS (1+1, with branching unit) 15.5 kg

• ODU ASN/ASNK (1+0) 4.5 kg

• ODU ASN/ASNK (1+1 with branching unit) 13.5 kg

44 MN.00224.E - 018
 6.4.3 Environmental condition

• IDU operating temperature -5° C to +45° C

• ODU operating temperature -33° C to +55° C

• IDU survival temperature -10° C to +55° C

• ODU survival temperature -40° C to +60° C

• ODU operating humidity 95% at 35° C

• ODU operating condition according to IP65

• ODU dissipation thermal resistance 0.5° C/W

• ODU solar heat gain < 5° C

• Wind speed (ODU with integrated antenna) < 200 km/h

• ODU max height 4000m

• Storage condition according to T.1.2 ETSI EN 300 019-1-1 (weather

protected, not temperature controlled storage
locations)

MN.00224.E - 018 45
 7 ALPLUS2 IDU DESCRIPTION

7.1 CONFIGURATION

The IDU of the ALplus2 is available in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration.

The IDU is made up by the following modules:

• Controller

• LIM

• RIM (one module in 1+0 configuration, two modules in 1+1 configuration).

7.1.1 ALplus2 block diagrams

In Fig.24 you can find the block diagram of ALplus2 with 16E1, version 1+0 and 1+1 configuration. In
Fig.25 you can find the block diagram of Alplus2 with 16E1, 2x(1+0) configuration.

7.1.2 Controller

The module performs the following operations:

• communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IPoverOSI

as communication protocol stacks. The interface ports for the equipment management are the fol-
lowing:

- 2 LAN Ethernet 10BaseT (MNGT/1 and MNGT/2, both RJ45)

- USB port
- RS232 asynchronous used for SCT/NMS connection (using PPP protocol and baud rate speed up
to 57600)

- RS232 asynchronous used for connecting further NEs (using PPP protocol and baud rate speed
up to 57600)

- EOC embedded within the packet radio frame for connection to the remote NEs

- EOC into a 16kbit/s or 64kbit/s of an E1 timeslot.

• WEB LCT interface can be used with EOC capacity equal or bigger than 64 kbit/s

• max 2 WEB LCT users can access the same controller

• log-in: the main controller manages the equipment or network login/logout by setting and then con-
trolling the user ID and relevant password

• database (MIB): equipment configuration is stored in a non-volatile memory

• equipment configuration: the equipment is configured through stored configuration parameters or

user commands

46 MN.00224.E - 018
 • alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered logger and alarm
sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT - NMS5UX. Management of the alarm LEDs on the
LIM front panel.

• user in and alarm out management: it receives external alarms and route them to relay contacts
along with the internal alarms generated by the equipment

• performance monitoring: PM management as per Recc. G.828

• download: firmware, Web Lct and configuration file can be downloaded. Download activity is based
on FTP protocol.

Warning: Lithium battery inside, refer to national rules for disposal.

7.1.2.1 Service signals

The controller offers an electrical interface to the following three service channel:

• 9600 baud/V.28 or 2x4800 baud/V.28 or 9600 baud V.28/RS232 synch/asynch channels

• 64 kbit/s/V.11 codirectional or contradirectional

• E1 wayside G.703.

Service signals connected to the controller modules are sent to the LIM module for MUX/DEMUX process-
ing.

7.1.2.2 Firmware

Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality and it is distributed on
two hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers.

Firmware can be updated through the Web Lct and it is stored in two different memory banks: one con-
taining the running firmware and the other the stand-by firmware. This permits to download a new firm-
ware release to the stand by bank without cutting the traffic. Bank switch enables the new release to be
used.

7.1.2.3 Web Lct

The Web Lct allows the configuration and the management of the local equipment. When the remote one
is configured properly, the whole radio link can be managed.

Web Lct runs on Internet Explorer and Firefox with Flash player plug-in. WLC is a utility to connect to
ALplus2 with USB cable.

WLC and Flash player plug-in for IE and Firefox can be downloaded from the site www.siaemic.com after
registration.

7.1.2.4 Controller LEDs

On Controller front panel are present four LEDs to summarize the terminal status:

• URG - red, ON with critical or major alarms active

• NURG - red, ON with minor or warning alarms active

• SW - red, ON with firmware mismatch alarm

• TEST - yellow, ON with at least a manual operation active.

Always on Controller front panel are present two Ethernet ports for management, MNGT1 and MNGT2,
whose LEDs are:

MN.00224.E - 018 47
 • during the boot with Ethernet cable inserted:

- green LED = ON

- yellow LED = blinking

• during the boot without Ethernet cable inserted:

- green LED = OFF

- yellow LED = OFF

• in standard working condition:

- green LED = ON -> LINK UP

- green LED = OFF -> LINK DOWN

- yellow LED = ON -> LINK 100BaseT

- yellow LED = OFF -> LINK 10BaseT.

7.1.2.5 SD memory card management

On the Controller board is present a slot, not accessible from the external, for the insertion of a memory
card. The memory card allows the upload/download of the equipment configuration and the equipment
firmware

- Memory card format SD, SDHC

- Memory card capacity up to 4 GB.

7.1.3 LIM

The LIM performs the following operations:

• multiplexing and demultiplexing (MUX/DEMUX process) of traffic (tributaries and Ethernet frames)
• aggregation of the multiplexed signals along with services through a Bit Insertion circuit and vice-
versa. The aggregate frame contains:

- the main signal from the MUX(s)

- the framed service signal from the service MUX

- the EOC signals for supervision message propagation towards the remote equipment

- the frame alignment word (FAW)

- the bits dedicated to the FEC

• switch functionality for Ethernet ports

• processing of the signals during the mo-demodulation

• STM1 signal processing and RSOH management

• duplication of the digital processed signals to supply two RIMs in 1+1 configuration.

From the two RIMs the LIM receives I and Q analogue signals then digital converted for the following pro-
cessing:

• clock recovery

• frequency and phase carrier locking

• baseband equalisation and filtering

• bit polarity decision

• differential decoding

• parallel to serial conversion to recover the aggregate signal at the receive side.

48 MN.00224.E - 018
 The aggregate signal is then sent to a frame alignment circuit and CRC analysis and then to the error cor-
rector. The errors uncorrected by the FEC are properly counted to achieve:

• BER estimate measurement

• radio performances.

7.1.3.1 Switch for Ethernet ports

Inside LIM is present an Ethernet switch with 3 external ports (electrical 1000BaseT or optical 1000BaseX)
and one internal. Only port 1 is present with both kind of interface, the port 2 is electrical and port 3 optical.
The external interfaces (3 operational on 4 presents) are placed on the front panel. Internal port is repre-
sented by the local radio stream where through native Ethernet transport is connected with the remote
equipment.
• Ethernet port LEDs

There are 2 LEDs:

• Speed
- one blinking = 10BaseT
- two blinking = 100BaseT
- three blinking = 1000BaseT
• LINK/ACT
- on = link up, no activity
- off = link down
- blinking = activity.

Switch function

LIM can operate like a switch between two or more separated LANs with the following advantages:

• to connect two separate LANs

• to connect two LANs via radio within a complex digital network

• to keep separated the traffic into two LANs towards MAC filtering to get a total traffic greater than
the traffic in a single LAN.

The switch realised into LIM/Ethernet module is transparent (IEEE 802.1d and 802.q) into the same Vlan
described by VLAN Configuration Table.

It works at data link level, Layer 2 of OSI pile, and leave untouched Layer 3 and it takes care to send traffic
from a local LAN to another one (Local and Remote).

Routing is only on the basic of Level 2 addresses, sublevel MAC.

The operation is the following: when a LAN port receives a MAC frame, on the basis of destination address,
it decides which LAN to send it:

• if destination address is on originating LAN the frame is discarded

• if destination address is a known address (towards address learning procedure) and is present into
local address table, the frame is sent only on destination LAN (MAC switching)
• otherwise the frame is sent to all ports with the same VLAN ID (flooding).

Ethernet Full Duplex function

Full duplex mode can be activated into 10/100BaseT interfaces manually or with autonegotiation.
100BaseFx operates always into full duplex mode.

MN.00224.E - 018 49
 Link Loss Forwarding

Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) is an alarm status of Ethernet interface. LLF can be enabled or disabled.

If LLF is enabled, any linkdown alarm will generate the alarm status of Ethernet interface blocking any
transmission to it. LLF can be enabled for each ports at front panel.

With LLF enabled the equipment connected (routers, switches so on) can be notified that radio link is not
available and can temporarily re-route the traffic.

MDI/MDIX cross-over

The Ethernet electrical interface into FEM module can be defined by WebLCT as MDI or MDIX to cross-over
between pairs so that external cross-over cable is not required.

VLAN functionality

LIM Ethernet module works with IEEE 802.1q and 802.1p tag. Tag is made up with:

• a fixed word of 2 bytes

• 3 bits for priority according with 802.1p

• 1 fixed bit
• 12 bits VLAN identifier (VLAN ID) according with 802.1q.

Switch cross-connections are based on Vlan Configuration Table where input and output ports or only out-
put ports should be defined for any used VID. Vlan ID (VID) has a range from 1 to 4095.

7.1.3.2 STM-1 synchronisation

Refer to Fig.22.
STM-1 frame generation requires that it is synchronised to a SDH network.

Into ALplus2 a synchronisation circuit, called SETS, gets the synchronisation signal from the following dif-
ferent sources:
• radio

• STM1

• tributary A/WST

• tributary B

• tributary n

• Lan3
• Lan4

• Internal source

As shown in Fig.22 the clocks extracted from the sources are sent to a selection circuit that chooses one
of the signals depending on the control sent by a selection logic.

This latter acts on the base of alarm roots (LOS-loss of input signal, LTI-loss of timing input, LOF-loss of
frame), on the base of assigned priority and manual forcing.
The selected clock drives an oscillator through a PLL circuit. The oscillator will generate the required syn-
chronisation for the STM-1 frame generation. If no input signals are available the internal oscillator source
is used for the local restart.

50 MN.00224.E - 018
 Radio
Trib A
Trib B/n Synchronisation
Source
for
STM-1 selector
STM-1 interface
Lan3
Lan4

LOS
Logic circuit
LTI
for
Priority Control clock
Manual Forcing synchronisation

Fig.22 - Synchronisation block diagram

7.1.3.3 LIM LEDs

On LIM front panel are present two LEDs to describe the following aspect:

• PoE - green, ON if Power over Ethernet facility is active

• FAIL - red, ON if the boot of the module wasn’t successful.

7.1.4 RIM

The RIM consists of the following main circuits:

• IF part of the QAM modulator

• IF part of the QAM demodulator

• power supply

• telemetry IDU/ODU.

MN.00224.E - 018 51
 7.1.4.1 Modulator

Signals from LIM are connected to a programmable modulator. It consists of the following circuits:

• recovery low pass filter to eliminate signal periodicity

• two mixers for carrier amplitude and phase modulation process

• 330 MHz local oscillator

• a combiner circuit to generate the QAM modulation.

The obtained 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier is then sent to the cable interface for connection with ODU.

7.1.4.2 Demodulator

At the receive side, from the cable interface, the 140 MHz QAM modulated carrier is sent to the QAM de-
modulator passing through a cable equalizer circuit.

The QAM demodulator within the RIM converts the signal to be sent to the digital part of the demodulator
within the LIM.

7.1.4.3 Adaptive code modulation

ACM profiles

In ALplus2/ALplus2 radio family uses Adaptive Code and Modulation (ACM) in order to employ the correct
modulation profile depending on the Rx signal quality.

Available ACM profiles are the following:

• 4QAM strong

• 4QAM
• 8PSK

• 16QAM

• 32QAM
• 64QAM

• 128QAM

• 256QAM.

These profiles operate in an RF channel with the following bandwidth:

• 7 MHz

• 14 MHz

• 28 MHz

• 56 MHz.

ACM switching

The usage of the previous modulation profiles in a fixed channel bandwidth results in a variable capacity.

The criteria defining the necessity of an ACM switching, upshift or downshift, is the Rx S/N ratio.

• Upshift - When there is an increase of received S/N, within the same Channel Spacing, the modu-
lation complexity is increased in the direction from 4QAM strong to 256QAM increasing the spectral
efficiency

52 MN.00224.E - 018
 • Downshift - When there is a decrease of received S/N, within the same Channel Spacing, the mod-
ulation is reduced in the direction from 256QAM to 4QAM strong reducing the spectral efficiency,

In order to configure properly the radio link using ACM facility, an optimization must be found between
max traffic during good propagation conditions and max availability during bad propagation conditions. To
obtain this purpose the ACM in ALplus2/ALCplus2 family can be configured via software setting the follow-
ing parameters: ACM setting and Tx Power mode.

ACM setting

The ACM can vary modulation profiles between two extremes defined by the operator through software
configuration: Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation.

• Upper modulation - When propagation into the given radio channel is in the better condition (high
Rx S/N), the radio link is working at the maximum throughput defined at Upper Modulation: the
highest modulation profile that ACM can employ

• Lower modulation - When propagation into the given radio channel is in the worst condition (low
Rx S/N), the radio link is working at the minimum throughput, defined at Lower Modulation: the
lowest modulation profile that ACM can employ

Tx power mode

Tx power mode can be set as Constant Peak or Constant Average (constant bolometer measurement).

• Constant Peak - Tx power is at maximum at 4QAM and at 256QAM is reduced (typical 4.5 dB) so
the RF Tx amplifier can operate in better linear conditions.

• Constant Average - Tx power is the same at any modulation.

The Tx Power mode is set depending on the modulation license of the user and depending on the Lower
Modulation that has been set.

For example:

In case of a 4QAM licence, all the other modulations must remain into the 4QAM mask. In this condition
Tx power must be Constant Peak (Tx Power Constant Peak Mode = Enable): max Tx power at 4QAM and
reduced power at all the other modulations.

In case of a 16QAM licence (or higher complexity) and Lower Modulation is set at 4QAM, the emitted spec-
trum must remain into the emitted spectrum defined for 16QAM even if the equipment is transmitting at
4QAM. In this case Tx power must be Constant Average (Tx Power Constant Peak Mode = Disable): Tx
power is always the same at any modulation and typically is the Upper Modulation's power. As an alterna-
tive the Lower Modulation can be set at 16QAM so Tx power Constant Peak can be activated.

With Constant Average Tx power (Tx Power Constant Peak Mode = Disable), the Tx power at 4QAM and
any other modulation is the same of Upper Modulation, so if Upper Modulation is 256QAM the output power
at any modulation is the same of 256QAM which is 4.5 dB less than 4QAM. The result is that enabling
256QAM is a big advantage for traffic but less link budget margin at 4QAM.

E1 priority

E1 available tributaries belong to two groups.

One is Permanent E1 equal to High Priority E1 that will never be interrupted during modulation downshift.

Downshift modulation will be limited to the minimum to obtain the selected Permanent E1.

The second group is Extra E1 equal to Low Priority, these tributaries will be interrupted progressively during
modulation downshift. They will start to be cut from the highest e.g. tributaries 16th or 32nd up to the first.

In Tab.13 it is reported the priority of tributaries, the lowest will be cut first.

Ethernet traffic

Once defined the bandwidth, Permanent E1 and Extra E1 at any modulation the amount of Ethernet ca-
pacity is the total radio capacity minus the Permanent + Extra E1 at any modulation.

MN.00224.E - 018 53
 Tab.13 - E1 priority

Priority ALplus2 ALCplus2

Permanent E1 never Permanent E1 never

Highest
disappears disappears
l
l Tributary A
l WST
l Tributary B
l
l E1 tributary n°1 E1 tributary n°1
l
V E1 tributary n°16 E1 tributary n°16
Lowest
E1 tributary n°32 E1 tributary n°32

7.1.4.4 Power supply

The -48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltage for the IDU feeding are
achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for -5 V.

Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents. The same battery running through the
interconnection cable gives the power to the ODU.

An electronic breaker protects the battery against cable failure.

7.1.4.5 Telemetry IDU/ODU

The dialogue IDU/ODU is made-up by the main controller and associated peripherals within the ODU. Con-
trols for ODU management and alarm reporting is performed making use of a bidirectional 388 kbit/s
framed signals.
The transport along the interconnecting cable is carried out via two FSK modulated carriers:

• 17.5 MHz from IDU to ODU

• 5.5 MHz from ODU to IDU.

7.2 LOOPS

To control the IDU correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The commands
are forwarded by the WebLCT/NMS program. Loop block diagram is shown by Fig.23.

7.2.1 Tributary

Tributary local loop

Each input tributary is routed directly to the tributary output upon receiving the command. The Tx line
transmission is still on.

54 MN.00224.E - 018
 Tributary remote loop

Each tributary directed towards the Rx output line is routed back to the Tx line. The Rx line is still on.

7.2.2 IDU loop

This kind of loop permits to check the full IDU operation. When activated, the modulator output is connect-
ed to demodulator input.

The loop is assured by converting the frequency of the modulator from 330 MHz to 140 MHz.

MN.00224.E - 018 55
56
LIM RIM

Trib. IN 330 MHz

MUX BI MOD to ODU
Trib. rem.
loop

330
DEMUX BE
Trib. OUT 140
IDU loop

Fig.23 - IDU loopback

Trib. loc. loop DEM

140 MHz
from ODU

MN.00224.E - 018
 10/100BaseT
LAN1 Ethernet
1000BaseT
packet switch
10/100/1000BaseT
LAN2 Port A

1000BaseSX,LX
LAN3

Permanent E1 Radio
up to 60E1 1+0
1+1

E1
cross-connect

STM-1 MSP
Extra E1
up to 19E1

16E1

WST

Up to 80E1

- Permanent = High Priority

- Extra = Low Priority

Fig.24 - ALplus2 with 16E1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram

MN.00224.E - 018 57
 Ethernet
10/100BaseT packet switch Port A
LAN1
1000BaseT

10/100/1000BaseT
LAN2

Port B
1000BaseSX,LX
LAN3

Permanent E1 Radio A
up to 60E1
1+0

E1
cross-connect
Extra E1
STM1 MSP up to 19E1

16E1

E1 WST

Permanent E1 Radio B
up to 60E1 1+0
- Permanent = High Priority
- Extra = Low Priority
Extra E1
up to 19E1

Fig.25 - ALPlus2 with 16E1, 2x(1+0) configuration, block diagram

58 MN.00224.E - 018
 8 ALCPLUS2 IDU DESCRIPTION

8.1 CONFIGURATION

The IDU of ALCplus2 is available in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration.

Into the IDU there are the following circuits:

• Controller

• LIM

• RIM (one circuit in 1+0 configuration, two circuits in 1+1 configuration).

The IDU of ALCplus2 is one RU subrack.

All the listed circuits are inserted into a single board.

Circuits for others 16xE1 or 32xE1 are inserted into the ALCplus2 IDU, one RU subrack, with exp16E1 or
exp32E1 options.

Please refer to chapter 7 ALplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION for any information relevant to functionalities of the
listed circuits.

8.1.1 Switch for ethernet ports

Inside IDU is present an Ethernet switch with 4 external ports (electrical 1000BaseT or optical 1000BaseX)
and one internal. Port 3 and Port 4 have both interfaces, Port 1 and Port 2 are electrical only.

The external interfaces (4operational on 6 present) are placed on the front panel. Internal port is repre-
sented by the local radio stream where, through native Ethernet transport, is connected with the remote
equipment.
For Ethernet switch functionalities, please refer to chapter 7 ALplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION.

8.1.2 Service channels

No service channels ports are available for ALCplus2 IDU.

MN.00224.E - 018 59
 8.2 SYNCHRONIZATION

Refer to Fig.52.

STM-1 frame generation requires that it is synchronised to a SDH network.

Into ALplus2e a synchronisation circuit, called SETS, gets the synchronisation signal from the following dif-
ferent sources:

• radio A

• radio B
• STM1(1)

• STM1 (2)

• tributary A/B

• tributary A/B as T3

• tributary nE1

• node1

• node2

• Lan A (Lan1,2,3,4) Gbit Electrical

• Lan B (Lan1,2,3,4) Gbit Electrical

• Internal source

As shown in Fig.52 the clocks extracted from the sources are sent to a selection circuit that chooses one
of the signals depending on the control sent by a selection logic.

This latter acts on the base of alarm roots (LOS-loss of input signal, LTI-loss of timing input, LOF-loss of
frame), on the base of assigned priority and manual forcing.

The selected clock drives an oscillator through a PLL circuit. The oscillator will generate the required inter-
nal synchronisation signal T0.

Trib A or B selected as T3 can be the source of T4 signal (2MHz) for other equipment like for example into
nodal structure.

If no input signals are available the internal oscillator source is used for the local restart of STM1 genera-
tion.

8.3 SD MEMORY CARD MANAGEMENT

On the front panel a protected slot for the insertion of a memory card is present.

The memory card allows the upload/download of the equipment configuration and the equipment firmware.

- Memory card format SD, SDHC

- Memory card capacity up to 4 GB.

60 MN.00224.E - 018
 8.4 ALC BLOCK DIAGRAMS

On Fig.31, Fig.32, Fig.33 and Fig.34 you can find block diagrams of ALCplus2 with 32E1 expansion, with
16E1 expansion and NBUS, with 16E1 expansion and without any expansion.

8.5 ALCPLUS2 NODE

A node can be made up of max 8 subracks of ALCplus2 IDU so that we can have:

• up to 8 maximum independent radio directions, with max 80E1 per direction

• up to 8 STM1 MST or MSP

• up to 8 x 16E1 = 128E1

• up to 8 x 2 x 1Gbit Lan ports.

On the front panel of ALCplus2 there are two “NBUS” ports (1 and 2) which must be connected to the other
IDU subrack as in Fig.35 for E1 traffic and Ethernet traffic.

For Ethernet traffic Lan1 and Lan2 must be connected as in Fig.35 Lan1 and Lan2 connection can be made
with normal Lan cables CAT5e/CAT6.

NBUS connection among the IDUs are made by cables of CAT7 quality, only by proprietary SIAE cable to
insert into the NBUS connectors (1 and 2) on the front panel. See Tab.15 for cable length and SIAE code.

Warning: for NBUS do not use normal Lan cables.

For any IDU into WebLCT it is necessary to define how many IDU are into the Node from 2 to 8.

Into WebLCT each IDU must be defined as node number 1, 2...8.

NBUS can operate in Protected mode or in Not Protected mode. Each NBUS carries 126 E1’s.

In case of Not Protected mode, all the 126 E1’s of the NBUS are used to connect a subrack to the others
for a total amount of 252 E1 connections available on NBUSes from one IDU.

In case of Protected mode, the unused connections, are used as protection of the connections between the
other IDUs; for example 63 E1’s are used between Node1 and Node2 and the other 63 E1’s are used as
protection of the connections between the other nodes, the connections used as protection pass into others
IDUs as passthrough without any need to be programmed.

The troubles in the connections between the NBUS buses are identified by alarms.

In case of protected modality, if the cable carrying the traffic is broken, an alarm is issued on the relevant
NBUS port, the equipment software switches the traffic on the other operating NBUS cable.

For Ethernet traffic Lan1 and Lan2 must be connected as in Fig.35.

With SCT/LCT program it is possible to configure a Node made up of some Nodals so into the window of
Node Manager it is possible to program only one big Crossconnect matrix for E1 and only one Ethernet
switch for all Lan traffic.

The software hides all NBUS connection for E1 and Lan connection from an IDU to others IDUs, so to op-
erate on one big Crossconnection matrix and one big Ethernet switch.
For any IDU the Node Manager shows for E1s 16E1, STM1 E1s, radio permanent E1, radio extra E1 and for
Ethernet Lan3, Lan4, radio port Port A.

The Nodal equipment with SDH STM1 interface is a Regenerator Section Termination (RST) and a Multiplex
Section Termination (MST) therefore it generates the STM-1 frame and has an internal synchronization cir-
cuit SETS. The synchronization of the Node can be distributed on the NBUS.

The ALCplus2 subracks must be synchronised together via NBUS or other interface.

MN.00224.E - 018 61
 For each Nodal subrack, the STM-1 interface can be duplicated (1+1 MSP) for the possible protection of
cable. The switching criteria in Rx are:

• Unequipped

• LOS

• LOF

• MSAIS

• TIM

• B2 excessive BER

• B2 degraded BER.

8.5.1 Expansion from 2 to 3 nodals

Suppose that the nodals 1 and 2 already exist and that you must add the nodal 3.

Disconnect the cable between NBUS1 nodal2 and NBUS2 nodal1, the traffic is automatically switched to
the other cable, if necessary.

Disconnect the cable between LAN1 nodal2 and LAN2 nodal1, the traffic is automatically switched to the
other cable, if necessary.

By WebLCT or SCT/LCT, re-program the nodal1 and nodal2 as node with 3 items.

By WebLCT or SCT/LCT, re-program the nodal3 as nodal3, protected and define the node with 3 items.

Connect the NBUS1 of the nodal2 with NBUS2 of nodal3, connect the NBUS1 of the nodal3 with NBUS2 of
the nodal1 as in Fig.35.

Connect the LAN1 of the nodal2 with LAN2 of nodal3, connect the LAN1 of the nodal3 with LAN2 of the
nodal1 as in Fig.35.

By SCT/LCT, with Nodal ALCplus2 Manager, Nodal Configuration add nodal3 IP address.

Program the interested cross-connections and Ethernet switch connections with external interfaces of
nodal3, Node Manager will take care of connections on NBUSes and LAN1, 2.
The same procedure can be used even if the added node is different from nodal3.

8.5.2 Reduction from 3 to 2 nodes

Suppose that the nodals 1, 2 and 3 already exist and that the nodal 3 must be removed.

By SCT/LCT, with Nodal ALCplus2 Manager, delete all the cross-connections to the external interfaces of
nodal3.

Remove the cables of the NBUS and LAN going to nodal3.

Connect nodal2 NBUS1 to nodal1 NBUS2 as in Fig.35.

Connect nodal2 LAN1 to nodal1 LAN2 as in Fig.35.

The same procedure can be used even if the deleted nodal is different from nodal3.

62 MN.00224.E - 018
 8.6 LAG - LINK AGGREGATION

Link Aggregation (LAG) is a feature available on SIAE ALCplus2 equipment that allows assigning up to four
physical links to one logical link (trunk) that functions as a single, higher-speed link.

In SIAE equipment LAG is named Trunking and two different implementations are possible:

• Line trunking: it works by aggregating LAN interfaces.

• Radio trunking: it works by aggregating radio interfaces.

Radio Trunking is available only when the Nodal Ethernet functionality is enabled.
The nodal Ethernet configuration can be deployed on all the ALCplus2 IDU models.

More details about this implementation will be provided in next paragraph 8.5 ALCplus2 NODE.

8.6.1 Line Trunking

Line Trunking is available on the ALCplus2 IDU. SIAE ALCplus2 support IEEE 802.3ad LACP (Link Aggrega-
tion Control Protocol). See Fig.26.

Fig.26 - Enabling Line Aggregation, Enable trunk1

LACP allows a network device to negotiate an automatic bundling of links by sending LACP packets to the
peer (directly connected device that also implements LACP). In addition to the increased capacity of the
logical link, LACP provides additional advantages:

• failover detection when a link fails, allowing for a trunk reconfiguration in order to avoid systematic
packet loss (after the reconfiguration the packets will be lost only if the throughput exceed the trunk
capacity).

• it introduces an agreement between the two LACP peers before to start data transmission over the
trunk. This prevent anomalous behaviour in case of cabling or configuration mistakes.

LACP works by sending frames (LACPDUs) over the links belonging to the trunk. Also the equipment de-
ployed on the other end of the trunk will send LACP frames over the same links: this enables the two units
to establish the trunk. LACP can be configured two modes: active or passive. In active mode it will always
send frames along the configured links. SIAE ALCplus2 implements an "active" LACP.

MN.00224.E - 018 63
 Each IDU allows to define up to 4 different trunks on its LAN interfaces. A Line Trunk can aggregate up to
4 LAN interfaces with the following restrictions:

• all the LAN interfaces must be defined with the same speed (either 10, 100 or 1000 Mbit/s).

• all the LAN interfaces must be set in Full Duplex mode

• all the interfaces must belong to the same IDU, even if the IDU is deployed in Nodal Ethernet con-
figuration.

When a Trunk is defined on SIAE ALCplus2, the end-to-end traffic is transmitted over all the aggregated
lines. As a results, the overall capacity of the trunk can be theoretically equal to the number of aggregated
lines multiplied by the capacity of a single line. In the example of Fig.27, four 100Mbs connection are
grouped into the same trunk, carrying all the capacity in transit from a radio link to another. In this con-
figuration, the theoretical maximum capacity that can transit on this trunk is 400 Mbit/s.

LAN1 100 Mbit/s LAN1

LAN2 100 Mbit/s LAN2

ALCplus2 ALCplus2

LAN3 100 Mbit/s LAN3

LAN4 100 Mbit/s LAN4

Line
trunking

Fig.27 - Line trunking

The packets carried by the trunk are assigned to each line depending on their Source MAC (SA) and Des-
tination MAC (DA) Addresses (MAC hashing).

A possible problem that could occur when Link Aggregation protocols are used is a change in the transmis-
sion order of packets belonging to the same logical session. The MAC hashing method prevents such a
problem: the traffic transmitted from one host to another one in the network (fixed SA and DA) is always
sent over the same physical line of the trunk, avoiding any order change.

If a line of the trunk fails (for example due to a cable disconnection), the LACP protocol automatically re-
configure the trunk group into a lower order trunk. So doing, the traffic that before was carried over the
failed line, now will be re-distributed over one of the remaining trunk lines, ensuring continuity to the traffic
transmission. The typical LAG reconfiguration time in case of a LAN cable failure is below 1 second.

8.6.2 Radio Link Trunking

Radio Link Trunking is a feature available on SIAE ALCplus2 equipment when deployed in Nodal Ethernet
configuration.

This feature allows to bundle up to 4 radio links to increase the capacity of an Ethernet connection between
two radio sites (see Fig.28).

64 MN.00224.E - 018
 LAN4 LAN4

LAN3 LAN3
ALCplus2 ALCplus2
Node 1 Node 1
LAN2 LAN2

LAN1 LAN1

LAN4 LAN4

LAN3 LAN3
ALCplus2 ALCplus2
Node 2 Node 2
LAN2 LAN2

LAN1 LAN1

LAN4 LAN4

LAN3 LAN3
ALCplus2 ALCplus2
Node 3 Node 3
LAN2 LAN2

LAN1 LAN1

LAN4 LAN4

LAN3 LAN3
ALCplus2 ALCplus2
Node 4 Node 4
LAN2 LAN2

LAN1 LAN1

Radio
trunking
SITE A SITE B

Fig.28 - Radio trunking

Each Nodal Ethernet stack can belongs to one Radio Trunk. Each IDU of the trunk sends over the air only
a portion of the traffic, according to the same hashing rule used for the line trunking (see paragraph 8.6.1
Line Trunking). The traffic received from the radio trunk is sent towards the IDU where is located the out-
going interface according to standard MAC learning/switching mechanisms.

Resiliency between the radio links aggregated into the trunk is managed by means of a proprietary proto-
col. If a radio link of the trunk fails (due to fading or equipment failure), this protocol automatically recon-
figure the trunk group into a lower order trunk. In this way, the traffic that before was carried over the
failed link, now will be re-distributed over one of the remaining trunk lines, ensuring continuity to the traffic
transmission. The typical Radio Trunk reconfiguration time is about 600msec.

It is important to note that also if it could be possible to aggregate up to four 340Mbit/s radio links (by
using 56 MHz frequency channel with 256 QAM modulation), the maximum capacity that can be carried
over the radio link cannot exceed 1Gbit/s in each direction of transmission (referring to Fig.28, from Site
A to Site B and vice-versa).

Regarding multicast/broadcast, the total traffic entering the stack (sum of the packets entering from LAN3/
LAN4 interfaces and from the radio ports) cannot exceed 1Gbit/s. This because also the traffic received
from the radio trunk is flooded towards all the IDUs belonging to the Nodal Ethernet stack (MAC learning
cannot be performed over multicast packets).

MN.00224.E - 018 65
 8.7 LINE PROTECTION THROUGH DISTRIBUTED ELP

ELP (Ethernet Line Protection) is a feature available on ALCplus2 IDU that allows to protect a GE interface
against cable failure or accidental disconnection. With ELP it is possible to connect an ALCplus2 IDU to an-
other network element by using two GE interfaces. Both interfaces are active but just one is enabled to
forward and receive traffic (forwarding state), while the other does not allow any traffic to pass (blocking
state). If the forwarding interface goes down, the other one passes to the forwarding state. The typical
switching time is around 1.5 sec. This feature does not imply the use of any protocol, but is simply based
on the status of the physical interfaces. As a consequence, no particular protocol support is required on
the connected equipment: it is simply required to enable the two GE interfaces.

When the Nodal Ethernet configuration is used, ELP can be used to protect the traffic of two GE interfaces
belonging to two different IDUs of the stack. In this way the traffic can be protected against IDU failure,
in addition to the cable protection.

This feature is particularly useful when the Nodal stack is connected to an external equipment like a core
router (see the example of the following Fig.29).

LAN4

LAN3
ALCplus2
Node 2
LAN2

LAN1

LAN4

LAN3
ALCplus2
Node 3
LAN2

LAN1
Core router

LAN4
ELP
protection LAN3
ALCplus2
Node 4
LAN2

LAN1

Fig.29 - Line protection through distributed ELP

It is recommended to disable any Spanning Tree protocol on the external equipment: this could cause long-
er traffic recovery times.

66 MN.00224.E - 018
 8.8 ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTE-
NANCE)

As native Ethernet is originally designed for LAN (local Area Network), OAM is not included into the native
Ethernet network equipment. In order to provide a carrier grade service, the OAM protocol can be used in
any point-to-point Ethernet link (made up of a single radio link or many radio links). The aim of this pro-
tocol is to check and monitor the functionality of the service that the provider guarantees on the network.

8.8.1 Service Layer OAM

The Service Layer OAM fully monitors a customer End-to-End Ethernet Service. Two main standards cover
this topic, the IEEE 802.1ag and ITU-T Y.1731.

The IEEE 802.1ag provides CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) useful for detecting, isolating and re-
porting connectivity faults. The ITU-T Y.1731 Standard comprehends the CFM plus some additional fea-
tures, like RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) that allows to report back to the start of the chain the Alarm
message.

SIAE ALCplus2 supports CFM according to both standards ITU-T Y.1731 and 802.1ag.
The IEEE 802.1ag and the ITU-T Y.1731 are End-to-End service, i.e. provides the tools to monitor the
Ethernet Service regardless of the layers, Network Path and operators. Since the spectrum of application
can include many applications a more hierarchical structure is needed.
The Standards define:

• Maintenance Domains (MD): these specify the Domains of operators, users and service providers.
Levels from 0 to 7 are possible depending on the type of service to be monitored. Customer Domain
is the higher which includes both ends of the Ethernet service (from one End user to the other End
user), Standard Default values for Customer Domain are 7, 6 and 5. Service Provider Domains
should have a MD lower than the Customer Domain since include the whole network except the End
Users. Standard default values for Provider Domains are 3 and 4. Operator Domains are lower than
Service Provider Domains since just a part of the network is included. Standard Default values for
operator domains are 0, 1 and 2. A domain is transparent to all messages with higher priority while
blocking all lower priority messages. Fig.30 shows the hierarchical structure of Maintenance Do-
mains.

MN.00224.E - 018 67
 CE PE PE CE
Access Operator 1 Operator 2 Access
Network Core Network Core Network Network

High Level

Customer MEP MEP

Service MEP MEP

Provider

MEP MIP MIP MEP

Operator 1

Low Level
MEP MIP MIP MEP

Operator 2

Fig.30 - Hierarchical structure of Maintenance Domains

ALCplus2 equipment belongs to one Maintenance Domain.

At each end of the Maintenance Domain two MEPs (Maintenance End Point) will be specified. One MEP is
local, the other one is in the remote equipment. The MEPs are "markers" that defines the end of a domain
and are in charge of originating OAM frames.

In a domain also MIPs (Maintenance Intermediate Points) can be specified. The MIPs are passive check-
points. The MEPs and MIPs configuration are discussed in details in the following points. The choice of the
domain that is the Domain Label (name) is left to the user. Particular attention must be paid to use exactly
the same MD label (and level) in each equipment where the MD is specified, i.e. different equipment with
same value of MD domain but different MD labels (or levels) belongs to different Domains.

• A Maintenance Association (MA) is one association which correlates the VLAN to the MD in which
the MEPs and MIPs have to be defined.
When a specified traffic needs to be monitored, then it is necessary to relay the VLAN to a Domain
and to the corresponding MEPs or MIPs through the MA. Before creating the Maintenance Associa-
tion, the VLAN, either SVLAN (Service VLAN Tag o Stacked VLAN Tag) or C-VLAN, has to be specified
in the VLAN Table. In each SIAE equipment it is possible to set up to 32 different MA. Particular
attention must be paid to use the same MA label in each equipment where the MA is specified, i.e.
different MA labels on the same VLAN correspond to different MA associations.

68 MN.00224.E - 018
 • At the Edge of a MD there are MEPs (Maintenance End Points) and in the middle there could be MIPs
(Maintenance Intermediate Points). MEPs are the units in charge of managing the CFM to correctly
monitor the status of the Ethernet service provided. MIPs are passive check-points that answer to
polling coming from MEPs. MEPs will forward OAM messages coming from higher domains and will
discard OAM messages generated from lower domains.
Each interface can be configured as MEP, Port A interface (radio interface) included. Once chosen
the interface, depending on the network topology, the direction of the MEP has to be specified. Two
Directions are possible, MEP "up" and MEP "Down". With MEP "Down" configured the OAM PDUs are
sent from the interface in the direction outside the equipment, i.e. the OAM PDUs are sent from the
interface on the cable toward next equipment. With MEP "Up" configured the OAM PDUs are sent
from the interface toward the inside of the equipment and will follow the VLAN table previously con-
figured. MEPs are distinguished from each other through a MEP ID, therefore MEPs belonging to
same MA must have different MEP Ids. In order to configure a MIP the MA has to be enabled on the
equipment. Up to 32 MIPs or MEPs can be configured on each equipment.

The protocols belonging to the Connectivity Fault Management implemented in SIAE equipment are follow-
ing listed:

• Continuity Check Protocol: this protocol enables the sending of a periodic message (like a Heartbeat
message) which enables the other MEPs deployed in the network to distinguish the status of a vir-
tual connection. This message can only be originated by a MEP. Time between messages is adjust-
able with 1s, 10s, 1min, 10min. These messages do not trigger any automatic reply from the
destination entity.

• LoopBack Protocol: it resembles an IP PING message; once this message is sent (e.g. MEP1 sends
a Loopback Message to MEP2). MEP2 replies to MEP1 confirming therefore the status of the connec-
tion. This is done to check the status of the connection between the MEP originating the message
and the MEP/MIP to which the message is addressed. This message can only be originated from one
MEP and can be addressed to both MEPs or MIPs. ALCplus2: The number of Loopback Messages in
ALCplus2 equipment is adjustable from 1 to 5 consecutive Loopbacks. In each equipment, it is pos-
sible for each MEP to check the presence of other MEPs in the same MA. This is done through the
"Remote MEP" application which allows this acknowledgement and distinguishes the other MEP
through means of MEP IDs and MAC address.

• Link Trace Protocol: This protocol sends a message similar to the LoopBack protocol. Every equip-
ment that is reached by this message will answer to the sender providing its own MAC Address. In
this way the sender is able to understand of which equipment the MA is composed. E.g. a MEP sends
the Link Trace Message to another MEP belonging to the same Maintenance Association. The MIPs
that are eventually deployed in the middle of the path will forward this message and answer to the
initiating MEP with their own MAC Address. By doing so the initiating MEP knows the OAM-devices
deployed in the path and their order.

• Remote Defect Indicator: This Feature allows a MEP, in presence of a fault or a defect, to send a
RDI to inform the other MEPs, belonging to the same MA, of the presence of this Defect. The ad-
vantages of this procedure are to avoid multiple Alarms created by the same cause and to be able
to check the status of other Remote MEPs. This RDI information is reported in the Continuity Check
Message. ALCplus2: This feature is present in ALCplus2 equipment and the presence of this alarm
can be checked as well in the Remote MEPs screen on the equipment.

8.8.2 OAM Example with ALCplus2

As an example, let's consider a network where a sequence of 8 SIAE ALCplus2 Radio links is deployed. In
this case a Maintenance Domain, a VLAN and a Maintenance Association have to be defined. The VLAN car-
rying the traffic must be present in the VLAN table of each equipment.

Two MEPs at the end of the chains and a variable number of MIPs in the middle has to be defined with
Continuity Check Message (CCM) enabled.

In case of defect or Ethernet problem, the Continuity Check Message will result in an "Inactive" status trig-
gering one Alarm.

By logging on one MEP it is sufficient to configure the Loopback message and Link Trace Message correctly
detects the location of the Bottleneck or defect related to this traffic. If More than one VLAN is present then
more than one MA has to be defined.

MN.00224.E - 018 69
 8.8.3 Reset Switch

Reset Switch button forces factory default values into switch but this is true only at next restart.

8.8.4 MAC Table clear

This is a button to clear all the MAC Table.

MAC Learning on Port basis and MAC Learning on VID basis.

The purpose of these two selection is dividing the MAC table into some independents parts named FID (For-
warding Indication Database).

8.9 ALCPLUS2 FIRMWARE UPDATES

In this chapter are described the new features available in an ALCplus2 with new firmware releases. Only
the main releases are considered (....the firmware releases with new features).

Every firmware release is included in a System Version and is supplied with the right WebLCT version.

FW update procedure

The order of file download is the following:

1. FW_Boot E82101
2. FW_appl N90634

3. WEBLCT N96106

All the files are in a compressed container called System Version v.XX.YY.ZZ.
If ODU needs a firmware update, it must be done after there three.

8.9.1 Firmware release 1.3.3

The new features included in this release are the following:

MAC Address Table

The MAC address in the MAC Address Table can be managed also in this way:

• MAC Learning on Vid basis: MAC address table can be managed depending on Vid

• MAC on port basis: MAC address table can be managed depending on port

Management Port Speed

The two management ports can be set in different ways separately:

• Full duplex 10M

70 MN.00224.E - 018
 • Half duplex 10M

• Full duplex 100M

• Half duplex 100M

• Auto-Speed-Dplx (the speed is set automatically during the handshake of the interfaces)

Management Port VLAN Tagging

The two management ports can be inserted in a VLAN.

The setting are the following:

• both ports are in the same VLAN

• one port is a VLAN and the other port is without Vid

• both ports are without the Vid management

8.9.2 Firmware release 1.3.4

The new features included in this release are the following:

Tx Transmitter Permanent Off

Now is available a new manual operation in the radio management: the Tx side of the radio can be turned
off with or without the timeout checking.

LAN Port Ingress Rate Limiting

New values are available in each LAN port to limit the input throughput (PIRL - Port based Ingress Rate
Limiting).

8.9.3 Firmware Release 1.4.0

The new features included in this release are the following:

LAN3/LAN4 syncE Management

Now LAN port3 and LAN port4 can be used in equipment synchronization without considering the interface
kind: the syncE management is available with optical and with electrical interface.

8.9.4 Firmware Release 1.4.1

The new features included in this release are the following:

MN.00224.E - 018 71
 SOH-STM1 Transport

Now the SOH of a STM1 stream can be transmitted: the SOH transport is made up by a permanent TDM,
one for STM1-1 and another for STM1-2.

A proper symbol is present in the cross connection matrix for this kind of usage.

SSM Management in Synchronization Sources

The SSM management (quality status of a synch source) is available on the following sources:

• STM1

• Nodal Bus

• E1
• Lan Port

SSM allows:

• the traceability to an identifiable primary clock reference source

• the presence of two synch sources to all the network elements, a primary and a secondary source
in case of a primary failure

• the lack of timing loops

SSM can be enabled on all the LAN ports in order to distribute the quality of the clock, according to Rec.
G8264/Y.1364.

Radio E1 type

The E1 streams carried through the radio link can be set as framed or not framed.

In case of “Framed” setting, the TU-AIS alarms can be used for VC12 management.

8.9.5 Firmware release 1.5.0

The new features included in this release are the following:

Management Port Secure Mode

The management ports can be set in secure mode: only traffic with the Vid pointed out can be managed.

Ethernet Traffic Rate Limiter

The Ethernet switch is protected against traffic storming.

In each LAN port, up to three different limits can be set for the following kind of traffic and/or a combination
of them: Unicast, Unknown Unicast, Unknown Multicast, Broadcast, ARP.

SSM Management

The SSM management can be set on port basis on Ethernet ports.

72 MN.00224.E - 018
 CWDM SFP modules

A bigger range of optical plug-in modules can be used.

8.9.6 Firmware release 1.6.0

The new features included in this release are the following:

Management of CWDM SFP module from any supplier

This release increases the range of CWDM SFP modules that can be used in the IDU.

Egress shaping functionality

This feature allows limiting the egress throughput of the ALCplus2e LAN interfaces, by properly exploiting
the buffer of this port.

The egress shaping rate can be configured with the following values:

• if Egress Rate < 1Mbit/s: 64kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 512 kbit/s

• if Egress Rate > 1 Mbit/s & Egress Rate <10 Mbit/s: values with granularity of 1 Mbit/s
• if Egress Rate > 10 Mbit/s (up to 1 Gbit/s): values with granularity of 10 Mbit/s.

In this way each Ethernet port has separate limits for input and output throughput.

Asymmetric Link Loss Forwarding functionality

In some cases, the radio link failure can be unidirectional, for example when the local equipment has an
Rx signal failure but the remote Rx signal is OK (i.e. unidirectional radio fail due to failure of a transmitter).
However, also in these cases there can be the need to shutdown the link in both directions even if there is
only a unidirectional link failure.

Using the bidirectional LLF feature, in case of LLF in the local equipment, the local equipment can notify
this LLF status to the remote equipment, shutting down the link on both directions.

Extended buffer (128 Mb) on Ethernet queues of radio port

This release assigns up to 128 Mbit (16Mbyte) to a single queue.

The following buffer configuration are available on the 8 output queues of the radio port:

• each queue is configurable from 128 kbit to 128 Mbit (see the below screenshot of the queue con-
figuration)

• every radio port has a total available buffer of 184 Mbit (23 Mbyte), so the sum of the 8 output
queue lengths of a single radio port does not have to exceed this value.

MN.00224.E - 018 73
 10/100BaseT
LAN1 Ethernet
1000BaseT
packet switch
10/100/1000BaseT
LAN2 Port A

10/100/1000BaseT
LAN3 1000BaseT,SX,LX

10/100/1000BaseT
LAN4 1000BaseSX,LX

Radio
Permanent E1
1+0
up to 60E1
1+1

E1
cross-connect

STM-1 MSP Extra E1

up to 19E1

32E1

2E1

Up to 80E1

- Permanent = High Priority

- Extra = Low Priority

Fig.31 - ALCplus2 with 32E1 expansion, STM-1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram

74 MN.00224.E - 018
 10/100BaseT
LAN1 Ethernet
1000BaseT
packet switch
10/100/1000BaseT
LAN2 Port A

10/100/1000BaseT
LAN3 1000BaseT,SX,LX

10/100/1000BaseT
LAN4 1000BaseSX,LX

Radio
Permanent E1
1+0
up to 60E1
1+1

E1
cross-connect
STM-1 MSP
Extra E1
16E1 up to 19E1
NBUS1
NBUS2

2E1

Up to 80E1

- Permanent = High Priority

- Extra = Low Priority

Fig.32 - ALCplus2 with 16E1 expansion, STM1, NBUS, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram

MN.00224.E - 018 75
 10/100BaseT
LAN1 Ethernet
1000BaseT
packet switch
10/100/1000BaseT
LAN2 Port A

10/100/1000BaseT
LAN3 1000BaseT,SX,LX

10/100/1000BaseT
LAN4 1000BaseSX,LX

Radio
1+0
1+1

2E1

Fig.33 - ALCplus2 with 2E1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram

10/100BaseT
LAN1 Ethernet
1000BaseT
packet switch
10/100/1000BaseT
LAN2 Port A

10/100/1000BaseT
LAN3 1000BaseT,SX,LX

10/100/1000BaseT
LAN4 1000BaseSX,LX

16E1 Radio
1+0
1+1

2E1

Fig.34 - ALCplus2 with 16E1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram

76 MN.00224.E - 018
 1 2 NBUS
STM1
16E1 up to 80E1

E1 CrossConnect
Nodal 1
Ethernet Switch
LAN3
LAN4 up to 340 Mbit/s

LAN 1 2

1 2 NBUS
STM1
16E1 up to 80E1

E1 CrossConnect
Nodal 2
Ethernet Switch
LAN3
LAN4 up to 340 Mbit/s

LAN 1 2

1 2 NBUS
STM1
16E1 up to 80E1

E1 CrossConnect
up to Nodal 8
Ethernet Switch
LAN3
LAN4 up to 340 Mbit/s

LAN 1 2

Fig.35 - Node block diagram in protected configuration

MN.00224.E - 018 77
 9 ALCPLUS2E IDU DESCRIPTION

9.1 CONFIGURATION

The IDU of ALCplus2e is available in the following configurations

• 1+0

• 1+1

• 1+0 XPIC

• 1+1 XPIC

• 2x (1+0)

• 2x (1+0) East West

• N+0

• N+0 XPIC

All the IDUs are made up with the following circuits:

• Controller

• LIM

• RIM (one circuit in 1+0 configuration, two circuits in 1+1 configuration).

The IDU of ALCplus2e is one RU subrack.

Please refer to chapters 7 ALplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION and 8 ALCplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION for any informa-
tion relevant to functionalities of the listed circuits.

9.1.1 Service channels

No service channels ports are available for ALCplus2e IDU.

9.2 ALCPLUS2E BLOCK DIAGRAM

On Fig.55 you can find block a diagram of ALCplus2e with 32E1 expansion.

78 MN.00224.E - 018
 9.2.1 ADAPTIVE CODE MODULATION - ACM PROFILES

In ALplus2e radio family uses Adaptive Code and Modulation (ACM) in order to employ the correct modu-
lation profile depending on the Rx signal quality. Available ACM profiles are the following:

• 4QAM strong

• 4QAM

• 8PSK

• 16QAM

• 32QAM

• 64QAM

• 128QAM

• 256QAM.

These profiles operate in an RF channel with the following bandwidth:

• 7 MHz

• 14 MHz

• 28 MHz
• 40 MHz

• 56 MHz.

With 1+0 configuration the E1 number is:

• Number of permanent (fixed) E1: max 80E1

• Number of extra (dynamical) E1: max 21E1

• Total number of E1 per direction: 82 E1

• Total number of E1 per unit: 82 E1.

9.3 FREQUENCY REUSE

The frequency reuse makes use of an XPIC circuit (Cross Polar Interference Canceller) and allows the co-
existence of two radio bearer transmission on the same RF channel. Each radio bearer carries an individual
radio frame up to 341 Mbit/s.
The system consists of two fully independent transceivers, and a cross-polarized antenna with polarization
H connected to one transceiver and polarization V connected to the other transceiver.

The initial co-channel interference is featured by the antenna cross polar discrimination factor (example
29 dB). This value may be not sufficient for frequency reuse system making use of modulations 32QAM

After all, it may be impaired by the propagation condition giving rise to a BER degradation. To get a suitable
discrimination value, an adaptive canceller, based on a fully numeric adaptive coefficient filter, must be
used.

As shown in Fig.58 the received signals at the IF receiver outputs are processed by the demodulator placed
on the copolar branch as well as by the canceller annexed to the demodulator processing the signals from
the cross polar polarization. This process operates in baseband time domain.
An adaptive equalizer minimizes the intersymbolic interference within the copolar demodulator whereas a
circuit similar to the equalizer, processes the signal on the cross route.

Such a signal, summed with the one available at the equalizer output permits the cancelling of the inter-
ference contained in the copolar signal. XPIC circuit is used into configuration 1+0 XPIC and 1+1 XPIC.

IDU-ODU coaxial cable to ODU for vertical polarization and ODU for horizontal polarization should not differ
more than 1.5 meters in length.

MN.00224.E - 018 79
 9.4 XPIC 1+1 CONFIGURATION

The XPIC 1+1 configuration is made up of two ALCplus2e IDU with XPIC and 4ODU connected as in Fig.56.

Interconnections between the two IDU are as follows:

• one IDU is defined Master, the other is defined Reserve, while one of them is Active the other is
Stand-by

• LAN protection with ring connection within LAN1 Master with LAN2 Reserve and LAN1 Reserve with
LAN1 Master

• TDM protection with Nodal Bus, NBUS1 Master with NBUS2 Reserve and NBUS1 Reserve with
NBUS2 Master.

The Active IDU has Tx and Rx on and it is communicating bidirectionally with remote end. The stand-by
IDU has Tx off. The following user interfaces are available:

• STM1

- 4x(1+0), the four STM1s (two on Master and two on Reserve) are independent
or

- 2x(1+1 MSP), two STM1s in MSP

- protection are always in the same IDU

• 4x1Gbit Ethernet, (LAN3, 4 Master LAN3, 4 Reserve). ELP (Ethernet Line Protection) can be used to
protect LAN connection with another port of the same IDU or the other IDU.

• no E1 port is available.
A max number 160 (2x80) VC12s are available via radio. Nodal bus from Master and Reserve can carry a
max of 126xVC12s.

The Active IDU is using completely the Radios, the Stand-by IDU has the two Radios in Tx off. HW failure
activate protection switch. Radio traffic is moved on new Active IDU. Switching from one IDU to the other
is traffic affecting.

The four STM1 available on front panel of IDU Master and IDU Reserve can get the traffic from Master Radio
1A and 2A or from Reserve Radio 1A and 2A depending on which IDU is Active: Master or Reserve.

Connection from Radio (Active IDU) to Active IDU STM1 ports is done through cross connection matrix.

Connection from Radio (Active IDU) to Stand-by IDU STM1 ports is done through Active cross connection
matrix, NBUS1, 2, and Stand-by cross connection matrix. Some Ethernet Enchanced features are not avail-
able:

• Not available: transparent point to point

• MAC Learning must be always enabled

• Not available: Priority management is the same for all LAN ports

• Not available: Customer VID Rewrite

• Not available: CVid Rewrite & Selective QinQ

• Not available: MPLS priority to SVLAN priority. MPLS priority to CVLAN priority is available

• Not available any CIR/EIR feature

• Not available RED/WRED feature

• Advance statistic counters are available only on radio port

Cable to be used for short connections

• MNGT1 to MNGT2 F03596

• LAN1 to LAN2 F03596

• LAN2 to LAN1 F03596

• NBUS1 upper to NBUS2 lower F03598

• NBUS1 lower to NBUS2upper F03598

80 MN.00224.E - 018
 9.4.1 XPIC 1+1 management

Master and Reserve IDUs have two different IP address shown to the user with WebLCT.

MNGT1 is connected with MNGT2 with a Lan cable. The two local IP address and remote IP Address are in
the same subnet. Local to remote connection of management channel is in Bridge mode.

9.4.2 SSP protocol management

Synchronization Setup Protocol (SSP) is on only into Active IDUs. Into Standby IDUs the SSP is off.

9.5 2X(1+0) EST WEST CONFIGURATION

The 2x(1+0) Est West configuration is made up of one IDU and 2 ODUs connected as in Fig.57.
One ODU to an antenna directed to Est, one ODU connected to an antenna directed to West.
The following interfaces are available:

• 16E1 and 2E1

• 2xSTM1

• 4x1Gbit Ethernet
Cross connection is possible among STM1s, 16E1, radio side E1s. At receiving end the IDU receives E1s
from two ODUs East and West and decides which is going to use on the basis of alarms.

Ethernet traffic may arrive from East or West, switching between the two sides can be done with rapid
spanning tree protocol, activated on both radio ports.

Number of permanent (fixed) E1: max 2x80E1

Number of extra (dynamical) E1: max 2x21E1

Total number of E1 for any direction: 82 E1

Total number of E1 per unit: 164 E1.

9.5.1 Selective E1 Protection

A selective E1 subset defined into WebLCT can be routed, for protection purposes, to both radio directions
Vertical and Horizontal or Est and West.
With 1+0 XPIC configuration the ALCplu2e on the other side receives the two E1s and decides which one
to select on the basis of alarms.
With 2x(1+0) Est West configuration, if the equipment is part of a loop, the equipment is receiving the
two E1s and on the basis of alarms decides which incoming E1 to select.

MN.00224.E - 018 81
 9.6 N+0 CONFIGURATION

The ALCplus2e can be configured with a number of ODU depending on frequency arrangement.

9.6.1 Frequency arrangement definitions

The following frequency arrangement definitions will be used. See Fig.36, Fig.37 and Fig.38.

Fig.36 - ACAP: Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarization

Fig.37 - ACCP: Adjacent Channel CoPolarization

Fig.38 - CCDP: CoChannel Dual Polarization

9.6.2 GENERALS

ALCplus2e high capacity radio links N+0 are available in some configurations:

• 2x(1+0) with frequency reuse (XPIC),

82 MN.00224.E - 018
 • 2x(1+0) with hybrid coupler, two channels adjacent or not adjacent

• 2x(1+0) with circulator, two channels adjacent or not adjacent, low losses, narrow band ODU

• 4x(1+0) with XPIC, hybrid coupler, two not adjacent channels or two CCDP adjacent channels

• 4x(1+0) with XPIC, circulator, two not adjacent channels or two CCDP adjacent channels, low loss-
es, narrow band ODU

• 8x(1+0) with XPIC, CCDP frequency arrangement, narrow band ODUs

New software license may be necessary for some configurations.

Any single radio stream can be used as:

• a STM1 SDH stream + nxE1 + Ethernet stream

• whole capacity can be used for an Ethernet stream

For maximum Ethernet throughput, depending on channel bandwidth, modulation, frame size and proto-
cols, please refer to relevant paragraph in this manual

9.6.3 2X(1+0) system with XPIC

See Fig.39 and Fig.40

Fig.39 - Frequency arrangement

Fig.40 - Layout of 2x(1+0) with XPIC

MN.00224.E - 018 83
 The solutions ALCplus2e 2x(1+0) with frequency reuse (XPIC) have the following characteristics:

• XPIC,

• dual polarization antenna,

• Channel bandwidth: 14MHz, 28MHz, 40MHz, 56 MHz Horizontal and Vertical polarization

• No branching loss

• Standard ASN/ASNK can be used

• Frequency bands: any frequency in which ASN/ASNK is available

• Ethernet dual pipe or single pipe

9.6.4 2X(1+0) system with hybrid coupler, two channels

See Fig.41 and Fig.42

Fig.41 - Frequency arrangements

Fig.42 - Layout of 2x(1+0) two channels with hybrid coupler

84 MN.00224.E - 018
 The solutions ALCplus2e 2x(1+0) with hybrid coupler two channels, adjacent and not adjacent, have the
following characteristics:

• No XPIC,

• Single polarization antenna,

• Channel bandwidth: 14MHz, 28MHz, 40MHz, 56 MHz Horizontal and Vertical polarization

• Hybrid coupler losses: <4dB at TX and <4dB at RX (according frequency)

• Two standard ASN/ASNK ODUs with same code

• Frequency bands: any frequency in which ASN/ASNK is available

• Ethernet dual pipe or single pipe

9.6.5 2X(1+0) with circulator, low losses

See Fig.43 and Fig.44

Fig.43 - Frequency arrangement

Fig.44 - Layout of 2x(1+0) with circulator

MN.00224.E - 018 85
 The solutions ALCplus2e 2x(1+0) with circulator two channels not adjacent (ACAP) or two channels adja-
cent (ACCP), have the following characteristics:

• No XPIC,

• single polarization antenna,

• channel bandwidth: 28MHz or 40MHz one polarization

• circulator losses <1,5 dB per link (Tx + Rx)

• ODU:

- AS 28MHz single channel ACAP at 7, 13, 15 GHz, and AS 40MHz single channel ACAP 6U, 11 GHz

- High power ASN7HP 28MHz single channel ACCP, 7,1-7,4 and 7,4-7,7 GHz, other frequencies
available on request

• Ethernet dual pipe or single pipe

9.6.6 4X(1+0) with XPIC and hybrid coupler two CCDP channels

See Fig.45 and Fig.46

Fig.45 - Frequency arrangement

Fig.46 - Layout 4x(1+0) with XPIC and hybrid coupler

86 MN.00224.E - 018
 The solutions ALCplus2e 4x(1+0) with XPIC and hybrid coupler two not adjacent channels or CCDP adja-
cent channels have the following characteristics:

• XPIC,

• dual polarization antenna,

• channel bandwidth: 14MHz, 28MHz, 40MHz, 56 MHz Horizontal and Vertical polarization

• Hybrid coupler losses: <4dB at TX and <4dB at RX (according frequency)

• Four standard ASN/ASNK ODUs same code

• Frequency bands: any frequency in which ASN/ASNK is available

• Ethernet combined into 2 dual pipes or 4 single pipes

9.6.7 4X(1+0) with XPIC, circulator, two CCDP channels

See Fig.47 and Fig.48

Fig.47 - Frequency arrangement

Fig.48 - Layout of 4x(1+0) with circulator

MN.00224.E - 018 87
 The solutions ALCplus2e 4x(1+0) with XPIC, circulator coupler, two not adjacent channels or CCDP adja-
cent channels have the following characteristics:

• XPIC,

• dual polarization antenna,

• channel bandwidth: 28MHz or 40MHz, two polarizations

• circulators losses <1,5 dB per link (Tx+Rx)

• ODU:

- AS 28MHz single channel, two not adjacent channels at 7, 13, 15 GHz, and AS 40MHz single
channel, two not adjacent at 6U, 11 GHz

- High power ASN7HP 28MHz single channel, CCDP, 7,1-7,4 and 7,4-7,7 GHz, other frequencies
available on request

• Ethernet combined into 2 dual pipes or 4 single pipes

9.6.8 8X(1+0) with XPIC and multicirculator

See Fig.49 and Fig.50.

ƒ1 ƒ2 ƒ4

28 28

Fig.49 - Frequency arrangement

88 MN.00224.E - 018
 Fig.50 - 8x(1+0) with XPIC and multicirculator

The solutions ALCplus2e 8x(1+0) with XPIC, Multicirculators and 4 adjacent CCDP channels have the fol-
lowing characteristics:
• XPIC,

• dual polarization antenna,

• channel bandwidth: 28MHz two polarizations CCDP

• 256QAM modulation, no ACM

• branching loss <5 dB per link (TX + RX)

• ODU:
- High power ASN7HP 28MHz single channel CCDP, 7,1-7,4 and 7,4-7,7 GHz, other frequencies
available on request

• same output power on all 8 ODUs

• Ethernet: 4 dual pipes or 8 single pipes

A reflector must be mounted on multicirculator ports without ODU.

9.6.9 MULTICIRCULATOR FREQUENCY RESTRICTIONS

See Fig.51.

MN.00224.E - 018 89
 2 1

3 4

Fig.51 - Slot numbering into multicirculator ODUs

7GHz 7L band frequencies are:

• CH1: 7121 MHz

• CH2: 7149 MHz

• CH3: 7177 MHz

• CH4: 7205 MHz

• CH5: 7233 MHz

• CH1’: 7317 MHz

• CH2’: 7345 MHz

• CH3’: 7373 MHz

• CH4’: 7401 MHz

• CH5’: 7429 MHz

It is possible to select 4 frequency low or high . But the following limitation apply:

Don’t use CH1 together with CH5.

Don’t use CH1’ together with CH5’.

Channel arrangements into the multicirculator slots follow Tab.14

90 MN.00224.E - 018
 Tab.14

Channel numbers Channel numbers

CH 1,2,3,4 CH 2,3,4,5
7L band 7L band

SLOT1 CH4/CH4’ CH5CH/5’

SLOT2 CH3/CH3’ CH4/CH4’

SLOT3 CH2/CH2’ CH3/CH3’

SLOT4 CH1/CH1’ CH2/CH2’

9.7 SYNCHRONIZATION

Refer to Fig.52.
STM-1 frame generation requires that it is synchronised to a SDH network.

Into ALplus2e a synchronisation circuit, called SETS, gets the synchronisation signal from the following dif-
ferent sources:
• radio A

• radio B

• STM1(1)

• STM1 (2)

• tributary A/B

• tributary A/B as T3
• tributary nE1

• node1

• node2

• Lan A (Lan1,2,3,4) Gbit Electrical, (LAN 3, 4) Gbit Optical

• Lan B (Lan1,2,3,4) Gbit Electrical, (LAN 3, 4) Gbit Optical

• Internal source

As shown in Fig.52 the clocks extracted from the sources are sent to a selection circuit that chooses one
of the signals depending on the control sent by a selection logic.

This latter acts on the base of alarm roots (LOS-loss of input signal, LTI-loss of timing input, LOF-loss of
frame), on the base of assigned priority and manual forcing.

The selected clock drives an oscillator through a PLL circuit. The oscillator will generate the required inter-
nal synchronisation signal T0.

Trib A or B selected as T3 can be the source of T4 signal (2MHz) for other equipment like for example into
nodal structure.

If no input signals are available the internal oscillator source is used for the local restart of STM1 genera-
tion.
Synchronization quality is connected to synchronization source (SSM).

All ALCplus2e SSM characteristics will be available from second FW release.

ALCplus2e manages quality information (synchronization status message SSM) from the following sources:

• 2MHz: from TribA/B selected as T3

MN.00224.E - 018 91
 • E1: tribA or triB for one 2Mbit/s within the 16 E1 available; quality info uses a spare bit of G.704
time slot 0 frame B.

• STM1: Quality info is into S1 byte

• Nodal interface: proprietary field into frame (to be announced)

• Ethernet (ITU G.8264): a dedicated slow protocol transfers quality info (second FW release)

• Radio: with a proprietary message.

ALCplus2e synchronization follows G813, G823, G8262 and G781.

(Sync transmitted via Radio frame timing)

Local Remote

SETS SETS
NBUS

STM-1 NBUS
LAN3, 4 STM-1
TRIB A= LAN3, 4
2MHz/2Mbit TRIB A=2MHz/2Mbit
TRIB B=2Mbit
TRIB B=2Mbit
TRIB 1-16=2Mbit TRIB 1-16=2Mbit

Fig.52 - Synchronization circuit

9.8 ALCPLUS2E NODE

A node can be made up of max 8 subracks of ALCplus2e IDU so that we can have:

• up to 8 maximum independent radio directions, with max 82E1 per direction

• up to 8 STM1 MST or MSP

• up to 8 x 16E1 = 128E1

• up to 8 x 2 x 1Gbit Lan ports.

On the front panel of ALCplus2e there are two “NBUS” ports (1 and 2) which must be connected to the
other IDU subrack as in Fig.35 for E1 traffic and Ethernet traffic.

For Ethernet traffic Lan1 and Lan2 must be connected as in Fig.35 Lan1 and Lan2 connection can be made
with normal Lan cables CAT5e/CAT6.

NBUS connection among the IDUs are made by cables of CAT7 quality, only by proprietary SIAE cable to
insert into the NBUS connectors (1 and 2) on the front panel. See Tab.15 for cable length and SIAE code.

Warning: for NBUS do not use normal Lan cables.

For any IDU into WebLCT it is necessary to define how many IDU are into the Node from 2 to 8. Into We-
bLCT each IDU must be defined as node number 1, 2...8.

92 MN.00224.E - 018
 NBUS can operate in Protected mode or in Not Protected mode. Each NBUS carries 126 E1’s.

In case of Not Protected mode, all the 126 E1’s of the NBUS are used to connect a subrack to the others
for a total amount of 252 E1 connections available on NBUSes from one IDU.

In case of Protected mode, the unused connections, are used as protection of the connections between the
other IDUs; for example 63 E1’s are used between Node1 and Node2 and the other 63 E1’s are used as
protection of the connections between the other nodes, the connections used as protection pass into others
IDUs as passthrough without any need to be programmed. The troubles in the connections between the
NBUS buses are identified by alarms.

In case of protected modality, if the cable carrying the traffic is broken, an alarm is issued on the relevant
NBUS port, the equipment software switches the traffic on the other operating NBUS cable.

For Ethernet traffic Lan1 and Lan2 must be connected as in Fig.35.

With SCT/LCT program it is possible to configure a Node made up of some Nodals so into the window of
Node Manager it is possible to program only one big Crossconnect matrix for E1 and only one Ethernet
switch for all Lan traffic.

The software hides all NBUS connection for E1 and Lan connection from an IDU to others IDUs, so to op-
erate on one big Crossconnection matrix and one big Ethernet switch.

For any IDU the Node Manager shows for E1s 16E1, STM1 E1s, radio permanent E1, radio extra E1 and for
Ethernet Lan3, Lan4, radio port Port A.

The Nodal equipment with SDH STM1 interface is a Regenerator Section Termination (RST) and a Multiplex
Section Termination (MST) therefore it generates the STM-1 frame and has an internal synchronization cir-
cuit SETS. The synchronization of the Node can be distributed on the NBUS.

The IDUs subracks must be synchronised together via NBUS or other interface.

For each Nodal subrack, the STM-1 interface can be duplicated (1+1 MSP) for the possible protection of
cable. The switching criteria in Rx are:

• Unequipped

• LOS
• LOF

• MSAIS

• TIM

• B2 excessive BER

• B2 degraded BER.

9.8.1 Expansion from 2 to 3 IDUs

Suppose that the nodals 1 and 2 already exist and that you must add the nodal 3.

Disconnect the cable between NBUS1 nodal2 and NBUS2 nodal1, the traffic is automatically switched to
the other cable, if necessary.

Disconnect the cable between LAN1 nodal2 and LAN2 nodal1, the traffic is automatically switched to the
other cable, if necessary.

By WebLCT or SCT/LCT, re-program the nodal1 and nodal2 as node with 3 items.

By WebLCT or SCT/LCT, re-program the nodal3 as nodal3, protected and define the node with 3 items.

Connect the NBUS1 of the nodal2 with NBUS2 of nodal3, connect the NBUS1 of the nodal3 with NBUS2 of
the nodal1 as in Fig.35.

Connect the LAN1 of the nodal2 with LAN2 of nodal3, connect the LAN1 of the nodal3 with LAN2 of the
nodal1 as in Fig.35. By SCT/LCT, with Nodal ALCplus2 Manager, Nodal Configuration add nodal3 IP ad-
dress.

Program the interested cross-connections and Ethernet switch connections with external interfaces of
nodal3, Node Manager will take care of connections on NBUSes and LAN1, 2.

The same procedure can be used even if the added node is different from nodal3.

MN.00224.E - 018 93
 9.8.2 Reduction from 3 to 2 IDUs

Suppose that the nodals 1, 2 and 3 already exist and that the nodal 3 must be removed.

By SCT/LCT, with ALCplus2/ALCplus2e Node Manager, delete all the cross-connections to the external in-
terfaces of nodal3.

Remove the cables of the NBUS and LAN going to nodal3.

Connect nodal2 NBUS1 to nodal1 NBUS2 as in Fig.35.

Connect nodal2 LAN1 to nodal1 LAN2 as in Fig.35.

The same procedure can be used even if the deleted nodal is different from nodal3.

9.9 SWITCH FOR ETHERNET PORTS

Into WebLCT Configurator, Ethernet switch can be set as Enhanced = Absent, in this case the ALCplus2e
Ethernet functionalities are fully compatible to ALCplus2. With Enhanced = Present selection new Ethernet
fiunctionalities are present and are described in the following.

The external interfaces (4 operational on 6 present) are placed on the front panel. Internal port is repre-
sented by the local radio stream where, through native Ethernet transport, is connected with the remote
equipment.

Inside IDU is present an Ethernet switch with 4 external ports (electrical 1000BaseT or optical 1000BaseX)
and up two internal ports. Port 3 and Port 4 have both interfaces, Port 1 and Port 2 are electrical only.
The internal ports are represented by the local radio stream where through native Ethernet transport is
connected with the remote equipment. There is one internal port for 1+0 and 1+1 radio configuration.

In XPIC and in 2x(1+0) link configurations, two settings are available regarding the internal port:
• dual pipe - two internal ports (port A and port B), one for each polarization/direction

• single pipe - one internal port (port A) for both polarizations/directions.

For Ethernet switch functionalities, please refer to chapter 8 ALCplus2 IDU DESCRIPTION.

Other functionalities are:

• monitoring on service type (outer or inner VLAN TAG) counters based on CVLAN or SVLAN (second
FW release)
• QinQ selective VLAN based selective VLAN + priority based, port based

• 8 queues scheduler on Radio Port, with priority managed on all 8 queues, it is possible to select
whenever queue is full:

- Tail Drop: last come packet is lost

- Queue Drop: the queue is deleted, over a defined threshold all packets in the queue are discard-
ed to limit latency time on traffic within this queue

- RED (Random Early Discard) random automatic discard of packets, over a defined threshold
there is a defined high percentage of discarded, only for incoming packets to a port without CIR
(that is all packets have same priority)

- WRED (Waited Random Early Discard) random automatic discard of packets, over a defined
threshold there is a defined high percentage of discarded, only for incoming packets (green or
yellow coloured) to a port with CIR

- Drop profile settable

• with MPLS incoming packets it is possible to remap Exp Bits MPLS to 802.1p Ethernet to manage
MPLS priority on Radio Port.

• frame fragmentation: packets exiting on radio port are fragmented to reduce Latency Time Jitter
• CIR/EIR/Max rate management, at the input of any physical Lan port for the packets exiting from
radio port it is possible to define: CIR Committed Information Rate (minimum guaranteed rate),

94 MN.00224.E - 018
 Excessive Information Rate (maximum bit rate if bandwidth is available) Max Rate (maximum bit
rate, rate control) for any Lan port, for any CVLAN, for any SVLAN

• VLAN re-writing with VLAN re-mapping

• OAM 802.1ag

LINK CONCATENATION

Link Concatenation is a feature available on SIAE ALCplus2e equipment that allows assigning up to two
physical links to one logical link that functions as a single, higher-speed link.

Link Concatenation works aggregating two radio interfaces (single pipe). With XPIC it aggregates radio
traffic from Vertical polarization and radio traffic from horizontal polarization. Traffic speed on the two po-
larization can be different.

Algorithm of packets distribution on the two radios are statistically and proportional to traffic capacity giv-
ing the maximum throughput from the two radios.

Warning: if the two radio interfaces carry a too unbalanced Ethernet traffic, the combined Ethernet traffic
may be blocked.

ETHERNET PACKET FRAGMENTATION

On radio side it is possible to enable the Packet Fragmentation at 256 or 512 bytes. Smaller packets give
the benefit of lower delay variation (jitter) on the other packets maybe at higher priority.

EPP

Enhanced Packet Processing (EPP) is the possibility to compress the fixed field into the packets. Up to 68
byte of headers can be affected by compression algorithm giving a higher benefit to small packets.

VLAN REWRITING

In the direction from Lan ports to Radio ports the Vid of tagged packets can be rewritten according the
maps defined into WebLCT.

Vlan rewriting is provided only if into 802.1q Management it is selected Fallback.

With Fallback, Traffic Treatment=Transparent Port to Port Transport, Provider=Disable we can make a ta-
ble with: Input CVLAN Vid to Output CVLAN Vid

With Fallback, Traffic Treatment=Transparent Port to Port Transport, Provider=Enable C_Vid Based we can
make a table with: Input CVLAN Vid to Output CVLAN Vid and output SVLAN Vid

With Fallback, Traffic Treatment=Transparent Port to Port Transport, Provider=Enable C_Vid Priority we
can make a table with: Input CVLAN Vid and Input priority to Output SVLAN Vid.

ENHANCED ETHERNET PRIORITIZATION BASED ON MPLS EXP BITS

In the direction from Lan ports to Radio ports MPLS packets are analysed in their Exp (Experimental) 3 bits
and sent into one of the 8 queues available to radio.

A programmable map into WebLCT defines for each value of Exp bits which queue (from 0 to 7 Max priority)
the packet will enter.

Another programmable map into WebLCT defines for each value of Exp bits which value of 802.1p priority
bit will be written into the Vlan Tag.

MN.00224.E - 018 95
 CIR/EIR RATE MANAGEMENT / INPUT FILTER POLICY (e.g. LAN1)

In the direction from Lan ports to Radio ports.

Some definitions:

• UNI User Network Interface

• CoS Class of Service

• EVC Ethernet Virtual Connection

• CIR Committed Information Rate

• EIR Excess Information Rate

• CBS Committed Burst Size

• EBS Excess Burst Size

• CF Coupling Flag

• CVID Customer VLAN Identifier

• SVID Service VLAN Identifier

Committed Information Rate (CIR): The bandwidth that the service provider guarantees to the cus-
tomer, regardless of network conditions.

Excess Information Rate (EIR): The bandwidth allowance for “best effort” delivery, for which service
performance is not guaranteed and traffic may be dropped if the network is congested.

The combination of CIR and EIR rates is typically referred to as PIR, or Peak Information Rate, which
represents the total burstable bandwidth sold to the customer.

Committed Burst Size (CBS): The maximum size, expressed in bytes, of a burst of back-to-back Ether-
net frames for guaranteed delivery.

Excess Burst Size (EBS): The maximum size of a burst of back-to-back Ethernet frames permitted into
the network without performance guarantees. EBS frames may be queued or discarded if bandwidth is not
available.

According to MEF 10.2 (Metro Ethernet Forum) specifications, the “bandwidth profile” service attribute (In-
put Filter Policing), which includes some or all of the above categories, can be defined per UNI, per EVC or
per CoS identifier (CoS ID; EVC.CoS). For any given frame, however, only one such model can apply. The
service provider meets the bandwidth guarantees by reserving appropriate network resources and employ-
ing a two-rate/three-colour (trTCM) rate-limitation methodology as part of its traffic engineering policy to
ensure compliance by user traffic.

• Green = Trasmitted: CIR and CBS.

• Yellow = Low Priority (dropped in case of congestion): EIR and EBS.

• Red = Dropped: traffic exceeding EIR and EBS is dropped.

CIR (green) EIR (yellow) dropped (red)

CBS (green) EBS (yellow) dropped (red)

For any port it is possible to add a Input Filter Policy table with this selections:

• Disable

• Uni Port Based

• EVC C_Vid Based

• COS C_Vid + Priority Based

• EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based

• COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Priority Based

According the status of 802.1q Management> 802.1q settings =
• Disable: you can select only Uni Port Based with CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.
• Fallback: two selections 1) EVC C_Vid Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with CIR, EIR, CBS and
EBS; Cf disable is ok. 2) COS C_Vid + Priority Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with priority range,
CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.

96 MN.00224.E - 018
 • Secure: two selections 1) EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based: applied to a SVLAN S_Vid and a CVLAN C_Vid
with CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok. 2) COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Priority Based: applied to a
SVLAN S_Vid and CVLAN C_Vid with priority range, CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.

Into ALCplus2e there is a total of 64 instances of Input Filter Policing for all the four ports into any radio
port.

Any CVID can be used into only one port.

Into same port same CVID can be reused but with different priority.

Priority Management (e.g. LAN1)

In the direction from Lan ports to Radio ports. Priority Management is dependant on the status of 802.1q
Management> 802.1q settings:
• Disable: you can select only Uni Port Based with CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.

• Fallback: two selections 1) EVC C_Vid Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with CIR, EIR, CBS and
EBS; Cf disable is ok. 2) COS C_Vid + Priority Based: applied to a CVLAN C_Vid with priority range,
CIR, EIR, CBS and EBS; Cf disable is ok.

• Secure (C_Vid Filtering): five selections 1) Port Default: priority defined by Default port Priority, all
packets entering this port have the same priority; 2) Native 802.1p (C_Vid): priority defined by
802.1p field in the CVLAN C_Vid; 3) Native TOS/DSCP: priority defined by Level 3 IP TOS/DSCP; 4)
Native MPLS: priority defined by MPLS Exp bits; 5) 802.1p(C_PCP) rewrite with MPLS: priority de-
fined by PriorityLan to Radio > MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite (tab) map translation.
• Secure (S_Vid Filtering, Provider=on): six selections 1) Port Default: priority defined by Default port
Priority, all packets entering this port have the same priority; 2) Native 802.1p (S_Vid): priority
defined by 802.1p field in the SVLAN S_Vid; 3) Native TOS/DSCP: priority defined by Level 3 IP
TOS/DSCP; 4) Native MPLS: priority defined by MPLS Exp bits; 5) 802.1p(C_PCP) rewrite (of CV-
LAN) with MPLS: priority defined by PriorityLan to Radio > MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite (tab) map trans-
lation; 6) 802.1p(S_PCP) rewrite (of SVLAN) with MPLS: priority defined by PriorityLan to Radio >
MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite (tab) map translation.

802.1q MANAGEMENT (e.g. Lan1)

Direction from Lan ports to Radio ports. Here you can select the input 802.1q: Disable, Fallback, Secure
mode.

You can select the Traffic Treatment with two possibilities: 1) Transparent Port to Port Transport; 2) Trans-
parent Bridge Port Based.

1. Transparent Port to Port Transport : this is a setting for a simple application with 4 segragated con-
nections Lan1 to remote Lan1, Lan2 to remote Lan2, Lan3 to remote Lan3, Lan4 to remote Lan4
with tagged and untagged traffic; some settings are needed locally and remote. Via radio (PortA)
the QinQ is used. From this configuration it is possible to add VLAN tags into Vlan Configuration
Table, prioritizing and OAM.

2. Transparent Bridge Port Based: this is a setting to create connections from radio port to Lan1,2,3,4
and from Lan1,2,3,4 to radio port.

With Provider> Enable C_Vid Based: into a tagged packet it is possible to rewrite from a defined Input
C_Vid to a defined Output C_Vid and add an Output S_Vid (a Service Vlan Identifier).

With Provider> Enable C_Vid + Priority: into a tagged packet, with a defined Input C_Vid and a defined
Input Priority it is possible to add an Output S_Vid (a Service Vlan Identifier).

A packet that locally is entering untagged, can be tagged on remote radio, with “Untag to Tag” checked.

MN.00224.E - 018 97
 Queue Management Lan to Radio (e.g. Port A Enh.)

On radio Port A (and PortB if configured as 2x(1+0)) there are 8 Queues. Queue 8 has maximum priority.

For each queue length 128/256/512/1024 Kbit can be defined. Small queues have lower delay. Larger
queues have few drops.

Starting from lower priority queue, it is possible to use WFQ (Wait Fair Queue) exit policy. WFQ counts the
number of transmitted packets. For each Queue set as WFQ the queue priority can be defined changing
Weight value.

Fig.53 - RED curve

Drop type defines the drop policy, it can be:

• Tail: this is the simplest dropping policy, last packet is dropped if queue is full;

• Queue: if queue is full, all packets in the queue are dropped; packets are too old to be useful, so
all packets in the queue are dropped to reduce time delay at minimum;
See Fig.53.

• RED (Random Early Drop): no packet are dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches
Smin(G, Green), packets are dropped randomly until a percentage of Pmax and an Occupation %
of Smax(G) limits are reached, all packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(G);

• RED Gentle (Enable): no packets are dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G,
Green); with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G), packets
are dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and
Smax(G)/Pmax(G); with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(G) the percentage of ran-
domly dropped packets is defined by the straight line between Smax(G)/Pmax(G) and Sgentle(G)/
100% ;

• WRED (Weighted Random Early Drop): Weighted RED is a two line RED; one line for Green packets,
one line for Yellow packets; Green and Yellow are defined by CIR and EIR into Input Filtering Policy
(Lan1,2,3,4);
no green packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G, Green);
no yellow packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin (Y, Yellow);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G) green packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and Smax(G)/
Pmax(G);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(Y) and lower than Smax(Y) yellow packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(Y)/0 and Smax(Y)/
Pmax(Y);
all green packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(G);
all packets are dropped over an Occupation % higher than Smax(Y);

98 MN.00224.E - 018
 • WRED Gentle (Enable): Weighted RED is a two line RED; one line for Green packets, one line for
Yellow packets; Green and Yellow are defined by CIR and EIR into Input Filtering Policy
(Lan1,2,3,4);
for Green packets no packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(G);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(G) and lower than Smax(G) green packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(G)/0 and Smax(G)/
Pmax(G);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(G), the percentage of dropped green packets
is defined by the straight line between Smax(G)/Pmax(G) and Sgentle(G)/100%;
for Yellow packets no packet is dropped until Average Queue Occupation % reaches Smin(Y);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smin(Y) and lower than Smax(Y) green packets are
dropped randomly with a percentage defined by the straight line between Smin(Y)/0 and Smax(Y)/
Pmax(Y);
with Average Queue Occupation % higher than Smax(Y), the percentage of dropped green packets
is defined by the straight line between Smax(Y)/Pmax(Y) and Sgentle(Y)/100%;

WRED and WRED Gentle are very efficient to get the most from the radio link available traffic avoiding the
“stop and go” beavior (SAW trend) typical of congested TCP/IP traffic.

Warning: RED and WRED impact only TCP/IP traffic, not UDP traffic.

9.10 LAG - LINK AGGREGATION

Link Aggregation (LAG) is a feature available on ALCplus2e equipment that allows assigning up to four
physical links to one logical link (trunk) that functions as a single, higher-speed link. In ALCplus2e LAG is
named Trunking and two different implementations are possible:
• Line trunking: it works by aggregating LAN interfaces.

• Radio trunking: it works by aggregating radio interfaces.

Radio Trunking is available only when the Nodal Ethernet functionality is enabled. The nodal Ethernet con-
figuration can be deployed on all the ALCplus2e IDU models.

9.10.1 Line Trunking

Line Trunking is available on the ALCplus2e IDU. ALCplus2e support IEEE 802.3ad LACP (Link Aggregation
Control Protocol). See Fig.54.

Fig.54 - Line trunking

MN.00224.E - 018 99
 LACP allows a network device to negotiate an automatic bundling of links by sending LACP packets to the
peer (directly connected device that also implements LACP). In addition to the increased capacity of the
logical link, LACP provides additional advantages:

• failover detection when a link fails, allowing for a trunk reconfiguration in order to avoid systematic
packet loss (after the reconfiguration the packets will be lost only if the throughput exceed the trunk
capacity).

• it introduces an agreement between the two LACP peers before to start data transmission over the
trunk. This prevent anomalous behaviour in case of cabling or configuration mistakes.

LACP works by sending frames (LACPDUs) over the links belonging to the trunk. Also the equipment de-
ployed on the other end of the trunk will send LACP frames over the same links: this enables the two units
to establish the trunk. LACP can be configured two modes: active or passive. In active mode it will always
send frames along the configured links. ALCplus2e implements an "active" LACP.

Each IDU allows to define up to 4 different trunks on its LAN interfaces. A Line Trunk can aggregate up to
4 LAN interfaces with the following restrictions:

• all the LAN interfaces must be defined with the same speed (either 10, 100 or 1000 Mbit/s).

• all the LAN interfaces must be set in Full Duplex mode

• all the interfaces must belong to the same IDU, even if the IDU is deployed in Nodal Ethernet con-
figuration.

When a Trunk is defined on ALCplus2e, the end-to-end traffic is transmitted over all the aggregated lines.
As a results, the overall capacity of the trunk can be theoretically equal to the number of aggregated lines
multiplied by the capacity of a single line. In the example of Fig.27, four 100Mbs connection are grouped
into the same trunk, carrying all the capacity in transit from a radio link to another. In this configuration,
the theoretical maximum capacity that can transit on this trunk is 400 Mbit/s.
The packets carried by the trunk are assigned to each line depending on their Source MAC (SA) and Des-
tination MAC (DA) Addresses (MAC hashing).

A possible problem that could occur when Link Aggregation protocols are used is a change in the transmis-
sion order of packets belonging to the same logical session. The MAC hashing method prevents such a
problem: the traffic transmitted from one host to another one in the network (fixed SA and DA) is always
sent over the same physical line of the trunk, avoiding any order change.

If a line of the trunk fails (for example due to a cable disconnection), the LACP protocol automatically re-
configure the trunk group into a lower order trunk. So doing, the traffic that before was carried over the
failed line, now will be re-distributed over one of the remaining trunk lines, ensuring continuity to the traffic
transmission. The typical LAG reconfiguration time in case of a LAN cable failure is below 1 second.

9.10.2 Radio Link Trunking

Radio Link Trunking is a feature available on ALCplus2e equipment when deployed in Nodal Ethernet con-
figuration.

This feature allows to bundle up to 4 radio links to increase the capacity of an Ethernet connection between
two radio sites (see Fig.28).

Each Nodal Ethernet stack can belongs to one Radio Trunk. Each IDU of the trunk sends over the air only
a portion of the traffic, according to the same hashing rule used for the line trunking (see paragraph 8.6.1
Line Trunking). The traffic received from the radio trunk is sent towards the IDU where is located the out-
going interface according to standard MAC learning/switching mechanisms.

Resiliency between the radio links aggregated into the trunk is managed by means of a proprietary proto-
col. If a radio link of the trunk fails (due to fading or equipment failure), this protocol automatically recon-
figure the trunk group into a lower order trunk. In this way, the traffic that before was carried over the
failed link, now will be re-distributed over one of the remaining trunk lines, ensuring continuity to the traffic
transmission. The typical Radio Trunk reconfiguration time is about 600msec.

It is important to note that also if it could be possible to aggregate up to four 340Mbit/s radio links (by
using 56 MHz frequency channel with 256 QAM modulation), the maximum capacity that can be carried
over the radio link cannot exceed 1Gbit/s in each direction of transmission (referring to Fig.28, from Site
A to Site B and vice-versa).

100 MN.00224.E - 018

 Regarding multicast/broadcast, the total traffic entering the stack (sum of the packets entering from LAN3/
LAN4 interfaces and from the radio ports) cannot exceed 1Gbit/s. This because also the traffic received
from the radio trunk is flooded towards all the IDUs belonging to the Nodal Ethernet stack (MAC learning
cannot be performed over multicast packets).

9.11 LINE PROTECTION THROUGH DISTRIBUTED ELP

ELP (Ethernet Line Protection) is a feature available on ALCplus2e IDU that allows to protect a GE interface
against cable failure or accidental disconnection. With ELP it is possible to connect an ALCplus2e IDU to
another network element by using two GE interfaces. Both interfaces are active but just one is enabled to
forward and receive traffic (forwarding state), while the other does not allow any traffic to pass (blocking
state). If the forwarding interface goes down, the other one passes to the forwarding state. The typical
switching time is around 1.5 sec. This feature does not imply the use of any protocol, but is simply based
on the status of the physical interfaces. As a consequence, no particular protocol support is required on
the connected equipment: it is simply required to enable the two GE interfaces.

When the Nodal Ethernet configuration is used, ELP can be used to protect the traffic of two GE interfaces
belonging to two different IDUs of the stack. In this way the traffic can be protected against IDU failure,
in addition to the cable protection.
This feature is particularly useful when the Nodal stack is connected to an external equipment like a core
router (see the example of the following Fig.29).

It is recommended to disable any Spanning Tree protocol on the external equipment: this could cause long-
er traffic recovery times.

9.12 ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTE-

NANCE)

As native Ethernet is originally designed for LAN (local Area Network), OAM is not included into the native
Ethernet network equipment. In order to provide a carrier grade service, the OAM protocol can be used in
any point-to-point Ethernet link (made up of a single radio link or many radio links). The aim of this pro-
tocol is to check and monitor the functionality of the service that the provider guarantees on the network.

9.12.1 Service Layer OAM

The Service Layer OAM fully monitors a customer End-to-End Ethernet Service. Two main standards cover
this topic, the IEEE 802.1ag and ITU-T Y.1731.

The IEEE 802.1ag provides CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) useful for detecting, isolating and re-
porting connectivity faults. The ITU-T Y.1731 Standard comprehends the CFM plus some additional fea-
tures, like RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) that allows to report back to the start of the chain the Alarm
message.

ALCplus2e supports CFM according to both standards ITU-T Y.1731 and 802.1ag.

The IEEE 802.1ag and the ITU-T Y.1731 are End-to-End service, i.e. provides the tools to monitor the
Ethernet Service regardless of the layers, Network Path and operators. Since the spectrum of application
can include many applications a more hierarchical structure is needed.

MN.00224.E - 018 101

 The Standards define:

• Maintenance Domains (MD): these specify the Domains of operators, users and service providers.
Levels from 0 to 7 are possible depending on the type of service to be monitored. Customer Domain
is the higher which includes both ends of the Ethernet service (from one End user to the other End
user), Standard Default values for Customer Domain are 7, 6 and 5. Service Provider Domains
should have a MD lower than the Customer Domain since include the whole network except the End
Users. Standard default values for Provider Domains are 3 and 4. Operator Domains are lower than
Service Provider Domains since just a part of the network is included. Standard Default values for
operator domains are 0, 1 and 2. A domain is transparent to all messages with higher priority while
blocking all lower priority messages. Fig.30 shows the hierarchical structure of Maintenance Do-
mains.

ALCplus2e equipment belongs to one Maintenance Domain.

At each end of the Maintenance Domain two MEPs (Maintenance End Point) will be specified. One MEP is
local, the other one is in the remote equipment. The MEPs are "markers" that defines the end of a domain
and are in charge of originating OAM frames.

In a domain also MIPs (Maintenance Intermediate Points) can be specified. The MIPs are passive check-
points. The MEPs and MIPs configuration are discussed in details in the following points. The choice of the
domain that is the Domain Label (name) is left to the user. Particular attention must be paid to use exactly
the same MD label (and level) in each equipment where the MD is specified, i.e. different equipment with
same value of MD domain but different MD labels (or levels) belongs to different Domains.
• A Maintenance Association (MA) is one association which correlates the VLAN to the MD in which
the MEPs and MIPs have to be defined.
When a specified traffic needs to be monitored, then it is necessary to relay the VLAN to a Domain
and to the corresponding MEPs or MIPs through the MA. Before creating the Maintenance Associa-
tion, the VLAN, either SVLAN (Service VLAN Tag o Stacked VLAN Tag) or C-VLAN, has to be specified
in the VLAN Table. In each SIAE equipment it is possible to set up to 32 different MA. Particular
attention must be paid to use the same MA label in each equipment where the MA is specified, i.e.
different MA labels on the same VLAN correspond to different MA associations.

• At the Edge of a MD there are MEPs (Maintenance End Points) and in the middle there could be MIPs
(Maintenance Intermediate Points). MEPs are the units in charge of managing the CFM to correctly
monitor the status of the Ethernet service provided. MIPs are passive check-points that answer to
polling coming from MEPs. MEPs will forward OAM messages coming from higher domains and will
discard OAM messages generated from lower domains.
Each interface can be configured as MEP, Port A interface (radio interface) included. Once chosen
the interface, depending on the network topology, the direction of the MEP has to be specified. Two
Directions are possible, MEP "up" and MEP "Down". With MEP "Down" configured the OAM PDUs are
sent from the interface in the direction outside the equipment, i.e. the OAM PDUs are sent from the
interface on the cable toward next equipment. With MEP "Up" configured the OAM PDUs are sent
from the interface toward the inside of the equipment and will follow the VLAN table previously con-
figured. MEPs are distinguished from each other through a MEP ID, therefore MEPs belonging to
same MA must have different MEP Ids. In order to configure a MIP the MA has to be enabled on the
equipment. Up to 32 MIPs or MEPs can be configured on each equipment.

The protocols belonging to the Connectivity Fault Management implemented in SIAE equipment are follow-
ing listed:

• Continuity Check Protocol: this protocol enables the sending of a periodic message (like a Heartbeat
message) which enables the other MEPs deployed in the network to distinguish the status of a vir-
tual connection. This message can only be originated by a MEP. Time between messages is adjust-
able with 1s, 10s, 1min, 10min. These messages do not trigger any automatic reply from the
destination entity.

• LoopBack Protocol: it resembles an IP PING message; once this message is sent (e.g. MEP1 sends
a Loopback Message to MEP2). MEP2 replies to MEP1 confirming therefore the status of the connec-
tion. This is done to check the status of the connection between the MEP originating the message
and the MEP/MIP to which the message is addressed. This message can only be originated from one
MEP and can be addressed to both MEPs or MIPs. ALCplus2e: The number of Loopback Messages in
ALCplus2e is adjustable from 1 to 5 consecutive Loopbacks. In each equipment, it is possible for
each MEP to check the presence of other MEPs in the same MA. This is done through the "Remote
MEP" application which allows this acknowledgement and distinguishes the other MEP through
means of MEP IDs and MAC address.

• Link Trace Protocol: This protocol sends a message similar to the LoopBack protocol. Every equip-
ment that is reached by this message will answer to the sender providing its own MAC Address. In
this way the sender is able to understand of which equipment the MA is composed. E.g. a MEP sends
the Link Trace Message to another MEP belonging to the same Maintenance Association. The MIPs

102 MN.00224.E - 018

 that are eventually deployed in the middle of the path will forward this message and answer to the
initiating MEP with their own MAC Address. By doing so the initiating MEP knows the OAM-devices
deployed in the path and their order.

• Remote Defect Indicator: This Feature allows a MEP, in presence of a fault or a defect, to send a
RDI to inform the other MEPs, belonging to the same MA, of the presence of this Defect. The ad-
vantages of this procedure are to avoid multiple Alarms created by the same cause and to be able
to check the status of other Remote MEPs. This RDI information is reported in the Continuity Check
Message. ALCplus2e: This feature is present in ALCplus2e equipment and the presence of this alarm
can be checked as well in the Remote MEPs screen on the equipment.

9.12.2 OAM Example with ALCplus2e

As an example, let's consider a network where a sequence of 8 SIAE ALCplus2e Radio links is deployed. In
this case a Maintenance Domain, a VLAN and a Maintenance Association have to be defined. The VLAN car-
rying the traffic must be present in the VLAN table of each equipment.

Two MEPs at the end of the chains and a variable number of MIPs in the middle has to be defined with
Continuity Check Message (CCM) enabled.

In case of defect or Ethernet problem, the Continuity Check Message will result in an "Inactive" status trig-
gering one Alarm.

By logging on one MEP it is sufficient to configure the Loopback message and Link Trace Message correctly
detects the location of the Bottleneck or defect related to this traffic. If More than one VLAN is present then
more than one MA has to be defined.

9.13 ALCPLUS2E FIRMWARE UPDATES

In this chapter are described the new features available with new firmware releases.

Every firmware release is included in a System Version and is supplied with the right WebLCT version.

FW update procedure

The order of file download is the following:

1. FW_Boot E82103

2. FW_appl N90656

3. WEBLCT N96109
All the files are in a compressed container called System Version v.XX.YY.ZZ.

If ODU needs a firmware update, it must be done after there three.

9.13.1 Firmware release 1.3.1

The new features included in this release are the following:

MN.00224.E - 018 103

 IEEE 1588 Pass Through

When SyncE is not available in all transmission chain, the synchronization protocol IEEE 1588v2 can be
used: this synchronization protocol allows distributing the CK through the network by means of protocol
packets.

The IEEE1588v2 is based on time stamps sent from a Master Clock Source to one or more Slave.

In one link both sides can be elected as Master but not at the same time : if one side is Master, the other
is Slave.

Enabling IEEE 1588 Pass Through an extra queue with maximum priority is generated. The transit delay
on radio link at different modulation is fixed. Jitter on 1588 packets is reduced activating packet fragmen-
tation.

The acknowledgement of the 1588 Frames in ALCplus2e can be done depending on different sections of
the header with different filtering options, listed below, that are mutually exclusive. It is possible to con-
figure:

• UDP based PTP Filtering (destination Port) - Default Configuration: the 1588 Frames are filtered
based on the Destination port (319 or 320 depending on the type of 1588 frames)

• Ethernet based PTP Filtering: The 1588 frames are filtered based on the Ethertype (Ox88F7)

• C-TAG based PTP Filtering: The 1588 frames are filtered amongst all the traffic marked with a pre-
cise C-Tag.

• S-TAG based PTP Filtering: The 1588 frames are filtered amongst all the traffic marked with a pre-
cise S-Tag.

• C-TAG+S-TAG based PTP Filtering: The 1588 frames are filtered amongst all the traffic marked with
a precise Combination of C-Tag and S-Tag.

By enabling this "Pass Through" on 1588 Frames, the equipment automatically enables the "Ethernet
Frames Fragmentation" to 256 Bytes.

RMON

RMON (Remote Monitoring) is a standard whose function is providing a set of services of statistics count,
monitoring and alarm report with reference to the activity of a LAN network.

SIAE equipment support RMONv1.

SIAE NMS systems collect periodically RMON data and store it into the network database.

The RMON implementation in SIAE Network Elements is classified into two groups:

1. RMON - Statistics

2. RMON - History

From Firmware release 1.3.1, RMON is available also on VLAN basis and Priority basis and can be shown
into SIAE NMS software.

FADE MARGIN

After installation of radio link and before assign traffic to it, it is possible to test and compare the "calcu-
lated" fade margin from link budget with "real fade margin verified" supplied as result after the fade margin
test.
This result can be printed and used as a benchmark of the quality of the installation.

In case of 1+1 configuration the test is applied on all the four ODU. Each of the four TX are attenuated one
by one reaching the threshold at opposite RX side (both radios) so measuring the link fade margin.

Service Tag user defined

Into LAN1, 2, 3, 4 ports in the 802.1q Management card, when the 802.1q setting is set "Disabled", the
Service Tag can be defined by the user for each port of the switch.

104 MN.00224.E - 018

 New SFP modules

ALCplus2e is now compatible with new SFP modules: 1000BaseLX 40Km and 80 Km. Optical plugin mod-
ules must be supplied by SIAE.

See chapter 6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS.

9.13.2 Firmware release 1.4.0

The new features included in this release are the following:

Lan Port Speed

Only for electrical LAN port.

In each of the four LAN port the autonegotiation can be limited up to 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, 1 Gbps.

Header compression with Ethernet and MPLS

From this firmware release it is available the header compression for packets with Ethernet over MPLS over
Ethernet.

SSM on all LAN ports

From this firmware release it is available the management of SSM, Synchronization Status Messages.
SSM allows:

• the traceability to an identifiable primary clock reference source

• the presence of two synch sources to all the network elements, a primary and a secondary source
in case of a primary failure

• the lack of timing loops

SSM can be enabled on all the LAN ports in order to distribute the Quality of the clock, according Rec.
G.8264/Y.1364.

VLAN on Management port

VLAN on Management port 1 and on Management port 2 can be defined independently. Management ports
can communicate, without VLAN, with/without VLAN, only with VLAN.

Input Storming Prevention

For Lan ports the PIRL (Port Ingress Rate Limiter) can be defined for Broadcast, Unknown Multicast, Un-
known Unicast, Unicast, ARP packets.

SSH security

SSH protocol and SFTP file transfer can be enabled in ALCplus2e.

SFTP can be used to download new system version to the equipment and also to transfer PM, RMON, Alarm
log and Command log.

MN.00224.E - 018 105

 9.13.3 Firmware release 1.5.0

New IDUs with updated hardware allow new features that are available with firmware release 1.5.0

• STM1 bulk transmission

• HW PWE3 ready

STM1 bulk transmission

STM-1 bulk transmission is possible with compatible HW (see detailed IDU part number into IDU compo-
sition chapter at the end of the manual)

STM-1 transmission is possible only with channel bandwidth of 56 MHz, 40 MHz, 28 MHz.

One STM-1 stream can be transmitted by 1+0 and 1+1 configurations.

Up two STM-1 streams can be transmitted with 2+0 configuration.

HW PWE3 ready

PWE3 (Pseudowire Emulation Edge to Edge) is a protocol to transfer a point to point TDM connection via
Ethernet network.

PWE3 will be possible only with compatible HW (see detailed IDU part number into IDU composition chapter
at the end of the manual).

9.13.4 Firmware release 1.5.1

New features are available with firmware release 1.5.1

ACM setting

Into ACM settings lower modulation can be selected up to 4QAM up to 4QAMs.

9.13.5 Firmware release 1.6.0

The new features included in this release are the following:

Management of CWDM SFP module from any supplier

This release increases the range of CWDM SFP modules that can be used in the IDU.

ITU_T G8032 Ethernet ring protection

Ethernet Ring Protection Switching, or ERPS, (ITU-T G.8032 Rec.) provides sub-50ms protection and
recovery switching for Ethernet traffic in a ring topology and at the same time ensuring that there are no
loops formed at the Ethernet layer.

SNMP-V3 management

SNMPv3 defines a secure versione of SNMP and facilitates remote configuration of the SNMP entities.

106 MN.00224.E - 018

 ACM ramp to max power (requires ODU AS03 N00053 01.03.00 and ODU ASN/ASNK
N00054 02.01.00)

This features allows activating an additional ACM power mode named “Ramp to max Power”. If no atten-
uation is applied to the link (i.e. RTPC=0), the “Ramp to Max. Power” mode has the same behaviour of
the “Ramp to Ref. Modulation” mode. Both the power modes automatically set the equipment transmitted
power according to the active modulation, as follows:

• from Upper Modulation to Reference Modulation: the Tx power increases according to the active
modulation
• from Reference Modulation to Lower Modulation: the Tx power keeps constant in order to comply
with the Reference modulation mask.

If the equipment transmitted power is limited by means of a fixed attenuation (i.e. RTPC>0), the “Ramp
to Max. Power” mode allows the equipment to reach for each modulation the maximum “allowed” power
(i.e. the highest value between the maximum Tx power of the modulation and the maximum equipment
power set by the user).

More than 64 VLAN (up to 4096)

The maximum number of VLAN managed by IDU is now 4096.

Extended buffer (128Mb) on Ethernet queues of radio port

This release assigns up to 128 Mbit (16 Mbyte) to a single queue.

The following buffer configurations are available on the 8 output queues of the radio port:
• each queue is configurable from 128 kbit to 128 Mbit (see the below screenshot of the queue con-
figuration)

• every radio port has a total available buffer of 184 Mbit (23 Mbyte), so the sum of the 8 output
queues lengths of a single radio port does not have to exceed this value.

LAN statistics enhanced: extension to 64 bit of priority and service counters

In addition to the Ethernet Counters per Port, it is possible to set on the Radio port the RMON counters per
Service (Vlan) or Priority (Queues). Differently from the previous RMON counters, the Service and Priority
counters can be activated for the following variables.
• Octets Tx: total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) transmitted.

• Pkts Tx: total number of packets (all kind of packets) transmitted.

• Octets Rx: total numbers of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received by the interface.

• Pkts Rx: total number of packets (all kind of packets) received.

• DropEvents: total number of events (frames) in which packets were dropped by the interface due
to lack of resources.

The Service and Priority RMON can be activated and collected from NMS (Network Management System).

The Service and Priority RMON are based on the Advanced Ethernet Counters present on the equipment
and configurable on site. This means that on site it is possible to activate the Advanced Ethernet Counters
but not the Service and Priority RMON.

In any case the NMS has higher priority in respect to the configuration inserted by WebLCT.

This means that the local operator can enable and read the active measure, but when the configuration of
these RMON is done through NMS, the local operator can only read the values of the Advanced Ethernet
Counters.

It is not possible to enable the RMON for Priority and, in the same equipment, the RMON per Vlan.

MN.00224.E - 018 107

 Priority RMON: based on the internal Queue of the equipment, not on the value of the Priority: this implies
that:

• the maximum number of RMON (Priority) that can be enabled are limited to 8, i.e. the number of
the queues available in ALCplus2e equipment.

• if traffic with different priorities are listed in the same queue, the Priority RMON will work with one
Probe on the Queue. I.e. the traffic in the same Queue is seen as “Same Priority Traffic” and the
Priority RMON counts the frames belonging to the Queue.
In other words, with Priority RMON there is a probe for each queue (8 queues in ALCplus2e). Each probe
counts the variables listed above (Octets Tx, Pkts Tx, Octets Rx, Pkts Rx and Drop Events).
These counters will be available only with the Minimum Polling Policy of 15 min.

Service RMON: it allows the equipment to track the variables listed above depending on the Service (Vlan
Tag). This type of RMON can be set only on the Radio interface.

Each equipment can be set to collect RMON up to 32 Services (Vlan Tag) and only on Customer Tag. These
counters will be available only with the Minimum Polling Policy of 15 min.

9.13.6 Firmware release 1.7.0

The new features included in this release are the following:

Ports in secure mode allowing untagged traffic

This feature allows adding/removing a Tag on the Q3 ports (MNGT1 and MNGT2) by configuring the MNGT
ports in Secure Mode while in the past it was only possible to enable the VLAN Tagging in Fallback mode
on MNGT ports.
The Q3 ports could be set in Secure mode (“Enable Secure”) with specifying the VLAN ID the Ethernet traf-
fic has to be tagged by.

Egress shaping functionality

This feature allows limiting the egress throughput of the ALCplus2e LAN interfaces, by properly exploiting
the buffer of this port.

The egress shaping rate can be configured with the following values:

• if Egress Rate < 1Mbit/s: 64kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 512 kbit/s

• if Egress Rate > 1 Mbit/s & Egress Rate <10 Mbit/s: values with granularity of 1 Mbit/s

• if Egress Rate > 10 Mbit/s (up to 1 Gbit/s): values with granularity of 10 Mbit/s.

In this way each Ethernet port has separate limits for input and output throughput.

Asymmetric Link Loss Forwarding functionality

In some cases, the radio link failure can be unidirectional, for example when the local equipment has an
Rx signal failure but the remote Rx signal is OK (i.e. unidirectional radio fail due to failure of a transmitter).
However, also in these cases there can be the need to shutdown the link in both directions even if there is
only a unidirectional link failure.

Using the bidirectional LLF feature, in case of LLF in the local equipment, the local equipment can notify
this LLF status to the remote equipment, shutting down the link on both directions.

WEBLCT management with HTTPs protocol

This feature allows a secure HTTP connection with WebLCT, in addition to the already existing HTTP con-
nection.

108 MN.00224.E - 018

 HTTPS provides a secure client/server connection between the equipment (server) and the user connected
with WebLCT (client). The encryption of communications between client and server allows protecting
against third party intrusions that may read/forge the contents of the communication (Man in the Middle
Attack).
SIAE Implementation:

• HTTP/HTTPS protocols have been implemented in an exclusive way, so that, when a user is con-
nected using HTTPS, HTTP requests will be redirected in HTTPS and vice versa. So, when the user
connects to the IP address of the equipment by means of a Web browser, it is automatically con-
nected through HTTP or HTTPS depending on the WebLCT security configuration

• C.A. Certificate and SSL Certificate provide the encryption keys for the secure connection. These
certificates can be uploaded on the equipment through Certificate Upload Manager on WebLCT.

• The user can switch to HTTPS only if the SSL certificates have been uploaded on the equipment.

HTTPS configuration on SIAE equipment:

In order to switch the WebLCT to HTTPS, the following steps have to be followed:

1. upload the C.A. and SSL Certificates on the equipment

2. enable the HTTPS feature

3. Re-load the equipment web page and make a new HTTPS login.

Management of the following feature keys: Ethernet header compression, G.8032, STM1-bulk, secu-
rity package.

From this fw release the following functionalities can be enabled by means of a specific SIAE feature key.

Input filtering policing extension on the basis of SVID and SVID+Priority

EVC S-Vid Based (Bandwidth Profile per S_VID): a different profile is defined for different Service VLANs.
Up to 64 VLAN can be managed with different profiles.

COS S_Vid + Internal Priority (Bandwidth Profiles per S_VID+CoS): a different profile is defined for dif-
ferent couples S_VID+priority queue (up to 64 different cases can be managed). In this case the priority
queue from 0 to 7 (i.e. internal switch priority) is considered by the rate limiting algorithm and indepen-
dently from the enabled QoS management (e.g. IEEE 802.1p, IPv4 ToS/DSCP, IPv6 TC/DSCOP).

Possibility to define two different rules inside the switch, port to port, to forward the
incoming frames: destination address + VID basis (bridge scenario) or VID basis
(pipe scenario).

This new feature allows the user to set the MAC forwarding rule od each LAN interface (i.e. LAN1, LAN2,
LAN3 and LAN4). Two different forwarding rules are available:

Destination Address + VID Basis: packets are forwarded on the basis of their destination MAC address and
VLAN ID. This is most commonly deployed rule (I.e. default setting).

VID Basis: packets are forwarded on the basis of their VLANID. The destination MAC address is NOT con-
sidered in this case. This rule is used only in some specific cases.

9.13.7 Firmware release 1.7.2

Management packets with priority 7

All the management packets sent towards MNGT1 and MNGT2 ports and towards radio EOC have priority
1 (802.1p)

MN.00224.E - 018 109

 9.14 FIRMWARE UPDATES FOR ALCPLUS2E 1+1 XPIC

In the following are described the new features available in ALCplus2e 1+1 XPIC with new firmware releas-
es. Only the main releases are considered (....the firmware releases with new features).

Every firmware release is included in a System Version and is supplied with the right WebLCT version.

9.14.1 Firmware release 1.0.1

The new features included in this release are the following.

MAC Address Table

The MAC address in the MAC address Table can be managed also in this way

• MAC Learning on Vid Basis: MAC address table can be managed depending on Vid

• MAC on port basis: MAC address table can be managed depending on port.

Management Port Speed

The two management ports can set in different ways separately:

• Full duplex 10M

• Half duplex 10M

• Full duplex 100M

• Half duplex 100M

• Auto-Speed-Dplx (the speed is set automatically during the handshake of the interfaces).

Bandwidth available

40 MHz and 56 MHz bandwidth can be selected.

10E1 expansion

IDU with expansion 16E1 an relevant cross-connection matrix can be managed and used.

9.14.2 Firmware release 1.2.0

The new feature included in this release is the following.

SSM management in synchronization sources

The SSM management (quality status of a synch source) is available on the following sources:

• STM-1
• Nodal Bus

110 MN.00224.E - 018

 • E1

SSM allows:

• the traceability to an identifiable primary clock reference source

• the presence of two synch sources to all the network elements, a primary and a secondary source
in case of a primary failure

• the lack of timing loops

9.14.3 Firmware release 1.2.2

The new feature included in this release is the following.

OAM

The Service Layer OAM fully monitors a customer End-to-End Ethernet Service. Two main standards cover
this topic, the IEEE 802.1ag and ITU-T Y.1731.

The IEEE 802.1ag provides CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) useful for detecting, isolating and re-
porting connectivity faults. The ITU-T Y.1731 Standard comprehends the CFM plus some additional fea-
tures like RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) that allows to report back to the start of the chain the Alarm
message.

SIAE ALCplus2e supports CFM according to both standards ITU-T Y.1731 and 802.1ag.

The IEEE 802.1ag and the ITU-T Y.1731 are End-to-End service, i.e. provides the tools to monitor the
Ethernet Service regardless of the layers, Network Path and operators.

9.14.4 Firmware release 1.2.3

The new feature included in this release is the following.

SSM management is synchronization sources on LAN ports

SSM can be enabled on all the LAN ports in order to distribute the Quality of the clock, according rec.
G.8264/Y.1364.

9.14.5 Firmware release 1.3.0

The new feature included in this release is the following.

LAN port Ingress Rate Limiting

New values are available in each LAN port to limit the input throughput (PIRL - Port based Ingress Rate
Limiting).

MN.00224.E - 018 111

 up to
126E1 up to 80E1 R
STM1-1 A a
D Cross permanent d
STM1-2 M Connect up to 21E1 i
Matrix o

up to 32E1

NBUS1

NBUS2

Trib A/B

Port A

LAN1 Switch

LAN2

LAN3

LAN4

Fig.55 - ALCplus2e block diagram

NMS STM1/3 STM1/4 to ODU 1B (V) to ODU 2B (H)

Slave
YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 STM1 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16
1 2 1 2
2
2 M 3.15A
ON 250V
MNGT NBUS 48V
LAN 3 LAN 4 1 2 NURG URG
1 1
LCT
R SW
+

GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

STM1/1 STM1/2 to ODU 1A (V) to ODU 2A (H)

Master
YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 STM1 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16
1 2 1 2
2
2 M 3.15A
ON 250V
MNGT NBUS 48V
LAN 3 LAN 4 1 2 NURG URG
1 1
LCT
R SW
+

GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.56 - ALCplus2e 1+1 layout

112 MN.00224.E - 018

 EST WEST

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 STM1 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16 Trib. 17-24 Trib. 25-32
1 2 2
2
ON M 3.15A 48V
MNGT LAN 3 LAN 4 1 2 250V
NURG URG
1 1
LCT
R SW

+
GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.57 - ALCplus2e 2+0 layout

MN.00224.E - 018 113

 Rx1 + H data
DEM

XPIC

XPIC

Rx2 DEM + V data

Fig.58 - Frequency reuse system

114 MN.00224.E - 018

 10 ODU DESCRIPTION

10.1 ODU VERSIONS

Three ODU versions are available: AS, ASN and ASNK.

In the following pages eventual differences are pointed out.

The ODU (refer to Fig.59) consists of a two shell aluminium mechanical structure, one shell housing all the
ODU circuits, the other forming the covering plate.

On the ODU are accessible:

• one “N” type connector for IF cable interfacing IDU and ODU

• one “BNC” connector for connection to a multimeter with the purpose to measure the received field
strength

• one ground bolt.

The 1+1 configuration consists of two ODUs mechanically secured to a structure housing the hybrid circu-
lator or branching unit for the connection towards the antenna.

10.1.1 AS ODU

The AS ODU is shown in Fig.59 (single ODU) and in Fig.60 (1+1 ODU with branching unit). Electrical and
mechanical characteristics are listed in a separate addendum relevant to ODU frequency.

10.1.2 ASN ODU

The ASN ODU is shown in Fig.59 (single ODU) and in Fig.60 (1+1 ODU with branching unit). Electrical and
mechanical characteristics are listed in a separate addendum relevant to ODU frequency.

10.1.3 ASNK ODU

The ASNK ODU is shown in Fig.60 (single ODU with F15 GHz) and in Fig.61 (single ODU with F15 GHz).
Electrical and mechanical characteristics are listed in a separate addendum relevant to ODU frequency.

MN.00224.E - 018 115

 10.2 DESCRIPTION

The blocks that arrange the ODU are the following:

• cable interface

• power supply
• Tx section

• Rx section

• 1+1 branching unit

10.3 IF CABLE INTERFACE

The cable interface permits to interface the IF cable interconnecting IDU to ODU and viceversa.
It receives/transmits the following signals:

• 330 MHz (from IDU to ODU)

• 140 MHz (from ODU to IDU)

• 17.5 MHz (from IDU to ODU)

• 5.5 MHz (from ODU to IDU)

• remote power supply.

The 17.5 MHz and 5.5 MHz FSK modulated carriers, carry the telemetry channel. This latter consists of two
388 kbit/s streams one from IDU to ODU with the information to manage the ODU (RF power, RF frequen-
cy, capacity, etc...) while the other, from ODU to IDU, sends back to IDU measurements and alarms of the
ODU. The ODU management is made by a µP.

10.4 POWER SUPPLY

The battery voltage is dropped from the IF cable interface and then sent to a DC/DC converter to generate
three stabilized output voltages to be distributed to the ODU circuitry.

10.5 TX SECTION

Refer to block diagram shown in Fig.62.

The 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier from the cable interface (see chapter 10.3 IF CABLE INTERFACE) is
forwarded to a mixer passing through a cable equalizer for cable loss compensation up to 40 dB at 330
MHz. The mixer and the following bandpass filter give rise to a second IF Tx carrier the frequency of which
depends on the go/return frequency value. The mixer is of SHP type.

All the IF and RF local oscillators are P controlled.

116 MN.00224.E - 018

 The IF carrier is converted to RF and then amplified making use of a MMIC circuit. The conversion mixer is
SSB type with side band selection.

The power at the MMIC output can be manually attenuated by 40 dB, 1 dB step (20dB, 1dB step for ASN
or 30dB, 1dB step for ASNK).

The automatic adjustment is performed making use of an ATPC (see paragraph 10.5.1 ATPC operation for
details). The regulated output power is kept constant against amplifier stage gain variation by a feedback
including the AGC.

Before reaching the antenna side the RF signal at the output of MMIC passes through the following circuits:

• a tea-clipper plus detector diode to measure the output power

• a circulator to protect the amplifier stages against possible circuit mismatch.

• a ON/OFF switch for 1+1 operation

• an RF passband filter for antenna coupling.

A particular setting of Tx and Rx RF oscillators allows to obtain a RF Loop, managed by Controller module.
The particular way used to perform the RF loop avoids the necessity to switch off the remote Transmitter.
RF Loop is available in AS ODU only.

10.5.1 ATPC operation

The ATPC regulates the RF output power of the local transmitter depending on the value of the RF level at
the remote terminal. This value has to be preset from the local terminal as threshold high and low. The
difference between the two thresholds must be equal or higher than 3 dB.

As soon as the received level crosses the preset threshold level low (see Fig.65) due to the increase of the
hop attenuation, a microP at the received side of the remote terminal sends back to the local terminal a
control to increase the transmitted power. The maximum ATPC range is 40 dB (only in ASN and ASNK).

If the hop attenuation decreases and the threshold high is crossed then the control sent by the microP
causes the output power to decrease.
The maximum ATPC range is 40dB for AS ODU (20dB in ASN ODU, 30dB in ASNK ODU).

10.6 RX SECTION

The RF signal from the Rx passband filter is sent to a low noise amplifier that improves the receiver sen-
sitivity. The following down–converter translates the RF frequency to approximately 765 MHz. The conver-
sion mixer is SSB type. The sideband selection is given through a µP control.
A second down converter generates the 140 MHz IF carrier to be sent to the demodulator within the IDU.
The level of the IF carrier is kept constant to –5 dBm thank to the IF amplifier stages, AGC controlled,
distributed in the IF chain.

Between two amplifiers a passband filter assures the required selectivity to the receiver. The filter is SAW
type and the bandwidth depends on the transmitted capacity.

MN.00224.E - 018 117

 10.7 1+1 TX SYSTEM

The two ODUs are coupled to the antenna side via a balanced or unbalanced hybrid in case of 1+1 hot
stand-by.

The two ODUs are coupled to the antenna side via a circulator in case of 1+1 frequency diversity.

1+1 Tx switching occurs in the 1+1 hot stand–by 1 antenna or 2 antennas versions as shown in Fig.63 and
Fig.64.

The transmitter switchover is controlled by Processor and the attenuation of the stand-by transmitter is
at least 50 dB.

118 MN.00224.E - 018

 Reference tooth

O-ring
ODU side flange

ASN version
ASNK version (for frequency ≤ 15 GHz)

"N"

"BNC"

Ground bolt

AS version

Fig.59 - AS, ASN or ASNK ODU

MN.00224.E - 018 119

 ASN version
Suncover (optional) ASNK version (for frequency ≤15 GHz)

AS version

Fig.60 - Final 1+1 assembly with AS, ASN or ASNK ODU

120 MN.00224.E - 018

 ODU 1+0

ODU 1+1 (Standard lock)

Fig.61 - ASNK ODU (for frequency > 15 GHz)

MN.00224.E - 018 121

122
PTx att.
control
Vdc to radio controller
0 to 40 dB (ODU AS)
to IF circuitry
0 to 20 dB (ODU ASN)
Vdc to RF circuitry
AGC
-48 V

x
N type 330
Cable MHz Cable IF Tx
interface equaliz. T

MMIC

MOD Alarm Alm Tx LO

388 manag comm
5.5 kbit/s MUX Tx
5.5 loops
MHz MHz DEMUX &
ctrl ctrl
control IF LO
DEM unit µP
BNC REC
17.5 17.5 388
17.5 MHz kbit/s Rx antenna
MHz
MHz side
PRx
meas.

Fig.62 - ODU block diagram

ctrl
IF Rx

140 LNA
MHz
variable 140
µP bandwidth MHz
(capacity Rx LO
depending)
AGC
µP

MN.00224.E - 018
 Tx side

SW control

Rx side

Antenna
side
Tx side

SW control

Rx side

Fig.63 - 1+1 hot stand–by 1 antenna

Tx side

SW control
First
antenna
Rx side

Tx side

SW control
Second
antenna
Rx side

Fig.64 - 1+1 hot stand–by 2 antennas

MN.00224.E - 018 123

 Remote PRx
dBm

Local Remote

Tx Rx
Thresh High
PTx actuation PRx recording
Thresh Low level
μP μP
PTx control
Transmission
Rx Tx
of PTx control

Hop attenuation (dB)

Local PTx
dBm

PTx max.

40 dB (ODU AS)
20 dB (ODU ASN)
ATPC range

PTx min.

Hop attenuation (dB)

Fig.65 - ATPC operation

124 MN.00224.E - 018

 Section 3.
INSTALLATION

11 INSTALLATION AND PROCEDURES FOR ENSUR-

ING THE ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY

11.1 GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLA-

TION

The equipment is a split mount (indoor-outdoor) radio link system operating in the frequency ranges 4, 6,
7, 8, 13, 15, 18, 23, 25, 28 and 38 GHz, for low, medium and high transport capacity (from 4 up to 622
Mbit/s), designed to establish LAN-LAN connections and PDH/SDH access. For the details related to the
actual used frequency band refer to the label on the equipment.

The system is provided with an integral antenna; however, in case its antenna is not used, it should be
connected to an antenna conforming to the requirements of ETSI EN 302 217-4-2 for the relevant frequen-
cy band.

The equipment is composed by the following separate units:

• radio unit (outdoor) with or without integral antenna

• Baseband (indoor)

Warning: This equipment makes use of non-harmonized frequency bands.

Warning: Class 2 radio equipment subject to Authorisation of use. The equipment can operate only at the
frequencies authorised by the relevant National Authority.

Warning: The deployment and use of this equipment shall be made in agreement with the national regu-
lation for the Protection from Exposure to Electromagnetic Field.

Warning: The symbol indicates that, within the European Union, the product is subject to separate
collection at the product end-of-life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. For
more information, please contact the relevant supplier for verifying the procedure of correct disposal.

MN.00224.E - 018 125

 11.2 GENERAL

The equipment consists of IDU and ODU(s) units and is mechanically made up of a wired 19” subrack (IDU)
and a weather proof metallic container (ODU). The two units are shipped together in an appropriate card-
board box.

After unpacking, mechanical installation takes place followed by electrical connections as described in the
following paragraphs.

The installation phases of the whole system are described in the following paragraphs and it must be done
only by service person suitably trained.

11.3 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

11.3.1 IDU

On their sides the subracks making up the several IDU versions are provided with two holes for the M6
screws fastening the subracks to a rack or to a 19” mechanical structure. The front of the IDU mechanical
structure is provided with the holes at the sides. This permits to fasten the subrack to a 19” rack by means
of 4 M6 screws.

11.3.2 IDU installation

ALPlus2 - To avoid overtemperature problems the free space below and above an IDU must be 22 mm
(1/2RU) minimum.

ALCPlus2 - IDUs can be stacked.

ALCPlus2e - IDUs can be stacked.

11.4 ELECTRICAL WIRING

The electrical wiring must be done using appropriate cables thus assuring the equipment responds to the
electromagnetic compatibility standards.

The cable terminates to flying connectors which have to be connected to the corresponding connectors on
the equipment front.

Position and pin–out of the equipment connectors are available in this section.

Tab.15 shows the characteristics of the cables to be used and the flying connector types.

126 MN.00224.E - 018

 Tab.15 - Characteristics of the cables

Type of connector terminating the

Interconnecting points Type of cable/conductor
cable

Polarized SUB–D 3W3 female con- Section of each wire  1.5

Battery
nector sq.mm a b

8 conductor cable different

Tributary signals SCSI 50 pin male connector for 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm
signals

9 conductor cable with

Female type D connector with 9 double brass sheath type
User input/alarm output
pins and shielded holder interconductor DB28.25 or
equivalent

LCT USB B Standard “printer” cable c

F035998 - 0.3m superflex

F03597 - 0.5m
NBUS RJ45 F03580 - 0.75m
F03581 - 1m
F03592 - 2.95m

STM1 Plug-in Relevant to plug-in module

Optical LAN port Plug-in Relevant to plug-in module

Electrical LAN port RJ45 Standard CAT5 cable

9 conductor cable with

Female type D connector with 9 double brass sheath type
RS232
pins and shielded holder interconductor DB 28.10 or
equivalent

GND Faston male type Section area  6 sq. mm.

a. Select the correct size and type of cable for any installation case according to specific
length.
b. Power cable operative temperature  60°C.
c. Max length 2.5 m.

MN.00224.E - 018 127

 11.5 OPTICAL CONNECTORS

In case of necessity of optical connectors, please use the optical plug-in modules supplied by SIAE. Ask
SIAE Microelettronica for different modules.

11.6 CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS

During the final installation, the IDU must be protected by a magneto-thermal switch (not supplied with
the equipment), whose characteristics must comply with the laws in force in one's country.

The disconnection from the supply mains is made disconnecting the connector SUB-D 3W3 from the IDU.

11.7 IDU-ODU INTERCONNECTION CABLE

11.7.1 Electrical characteristics

- Cable type coaxial

- Cable impedance 50 ohm

- Insertion loss 24 dB at 330 MHz

- Return loss (connectors included) better than 22 dB (from 100 MHz to 400 MHz)

- Max total DC resistance 4 Ohm

- Shielding effectiveness 90 dB

11.7.2 Connectors

N-type male connectors on both sides.

11.7.3 Max length

With the 1/4” cable, the max length is 300m for all modulation profile.

With 1/8” cable, any length that respects max 24dB at 330 MHz and a Max total DC resistance of 4 Ohm.

11.7.4 Suggested cable

RG8 or 1/4” cable on any coaxial cable that respect the previous electrical characteristics.

128 MN.00224.E - 018

 11.8 GROUNDING CONNECTION

Fig.66 and annexed legend show how to perform the grounding connections.

Indoor 3 4
3 4
ODU
unit
1 5

7 IDU 2
unit

(+) (-)
6
Station Local
ground ground
ground
rack

Legend

1. IDU grounding point, copper faston type. The cross section area of the cable used must be ³ 4 sq.
mm. The Faston is available on the IDU both sides.

2. ODU grounding M6 bolt copper faston type. The cross section area of the cable used must be ³ 16
sq. mm (V60052)

3. IDU–ODU interconnection cable type Celflex CUH 1/4” or RG8 cable terminated with N–type male
connectors at both sides.

4. Grounding kit type Cabel Metal or similar to connect the shield of interconnection cable.
5. Matching cable (tail) terminated with SMA male and N female connectors.

6. Battery grounding point of IDU to be connected to earth by means of a cable with a section area
2.5 sq. mm. Length  10 m.
7. Grounding cords connected to a real earth internal of station. The cross section area of the cable
must be  16 sq. mm

Fig.66 - Grounding connection

11.9 IDU-ODU CABLE GROUNDING KIT INSTALLATION

11.9.1 Grounding kit K09283F (for RG8 or 1/8” cable)

The kit is made up by:

• grounding kit

• sealant (in a small sachet)

• a short tape (to define the part of the jacket to remove from the cable)

MN.00224.E - 018 129

 • a transparent plastic bag, with instructions printed over, which contains all the items.

In order to install the grounding kit, follow the instructions supplied with the kit itself and position the kit
in the proper points along the IDU-ODU cable (position and number of the points can vary depending on
local rules and/or customer request).

After grounding kit installation, it is necessary to seal it. Please, use two kinds of tape in the following or-
der:

• self amalgamating waterproof tape against water and moisture

• black PVC tape against sun UV

Procedure for both tapes:

• apply the first (of two) layer of sealing tape overlapping the IDU-ODU cable jacket by 3 cm on each
ends. The layer must cover 3cm of cable before the grounding clamp, the clamp itself and 3 cm
after the clamp.

• every wrapping must overlap the previous.

The grounding bolt (opposite to the grounding clamp of the kit) must remain without sealing.

11.9.2 Grounding kit ICD00072F (for any cable with shield)

Fig.67

The kit is made up by:

• a copper plate connected to a M8x20 grounding bolt

• 50 cm of tin copper tube of 3mm of diameter

• 30 cm of vinyl mastic self amalgamating waterproof tape

• 2 m of black PVC tape against sun UV.

In order to install the grounding kit, follow the instructions supplied with the kit itself and position the kit
in the proper points along the IDU-ODU cable (position and number of the points can vary depending on
local rules and/or customer request).

The installation procedure is the following:

1. remove 52mm of jacket from the cable that has to be grounded

2. insert one end of the tin copper tube of 3 mm of diameter in the relevant hole over the plate copper
bar of the grounding kit

130 MN.00224.E - 018

 3. the grounding kit must be placed as Fig.68 (the plate copper bar must be higher point of the ground-
ing kit)

4. put the plate copper bar over the shield of the cable and tie firmly the plate to the cable using the
tin copper tube. When the tin copper tube is over, wedge its end inside a notch of the plate in order
to fix it

5. apply two layers of vinyl mastic self amalgamating waterproof tape overlapping the IDU-ODU cable
jacket by 3 cm on each ends as in Fig.68. Every wrapping must overlap the previous.

6. Apply two layers of black PVC UV proof tape overlapping the waterproof tape layers as in Fig.68.
Every wrapping must overlap the previous.

7. Insert the grounding bolt in the closest grounding point.

The grounding bolt (opposite to the grounding clamp of the kit) must remain without sealing.

Fig.68 - Grounding kit positioning

11.10 SURGE AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION

Gas dischargers are present both in IDU and ODU.

Characteristics

- DC spark-over voltage 150V ±20%

- Nominal impulse discharge current (wave 8/20 ms) 20kA

- Single impulse discharge current (wave 8/20 ms) 25kA

- Performances in accordance to EN 301 489.

MN.00224.E - 018 131

 12 ALPLUS2 CONNECTORS

12.1 IDU FRONT PANEL

The front panel of the ALplus2 modular IDU is made up by the front panels of the modules LIM, RIM and
Controller. See Fig.69.

12.1.1 LIM connectors

• Ethernet port 1 electrical, 10/100/1000BaseT RJ45 (see Tab.16)

• Ethernet port 1, 100/1000BaseX SFP-LC

• Ethernet port 2 electrical, 10/100/1000BaseT RJ45 (see Tab.16)

• Ethernet port 3, 100/1000BaseX SFP-LC

Electrical port 1 and port 2 can be configured MDI or MDIX via WebLCT.

• STM-1 1 in/out SFP

• STM-1 2 in/out SFP

SFP can be I.1, S1.1, L1.1, L1.2, electrical coaxial 1.0/2.3

• Trib 1-8, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm E1 in/out 50 pin SCSI female
(Tab.17 for 75Ohm and Tab.18
for 120Ohm)

• Trib 9-16, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm E1 in/out 50 pin SCSI female
(Tab.17 for 75Ohm and Tab.18
for 120Ohm)

E1, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm interfaces are present in the same connector (different pins).

12.1.2 RIM connectors

• Connector for 50 Ohm interconnection to ODU SMA (max tightening torque = 0.5 Nm)

• -48 Vdc power supply SUB-D 3W3 (pinout on the panel)

12.1.3 Controller connectors

• LCT, management USB type B (receptable)

• RS232, management SUB-D male 9 pin (see Tab.19)

• USER IN/OUT SUB-D male 9 pin (see Tab.20)

• MNGT/1, management RJ45 (see Tab.21)

132 MN.00224.E - 018

 • MNGT/2, management RJ45 (see Tab.21)

Port MNGT/1 and port MNGT/2 set MDI or MDIX status automatically.

• CH1 service channel not connected

• CH2 service channel RJ45 (see Tab.22)

• 2 Mbit/s wayside, 120 Ohm E1 in/out RJ45 (see Tab.23)

12.2 IDU BODY CONNECTORS

• Ground connection 6.3 mm male (Faston).

Ethernet Power
IDU-ODU
Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 2xSTM-1 16E1 cable supply

1 2 3 ON 48V
SPEED
PoE
ACT FAIL
LINK

+
10-100-1000 BaseT/100-1000 BaseX 1 STM1 2 Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16
-
LINK LINK IDU ODU 48V
ACT ACT WAY
SIDE

+
REM TEST
LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT MNGT/1 MNGT/2 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s -

Management/ Management/ CH1, CH2 2 Mbit/s ON/OFF

Configuration Configuration service wayside
4 user IN
2 alarm OUT channel
(CH1 not connected)

Fig.69 - IDU ALplus2 front panel

Tab.16 - 10/100/1000BaseT, RJ45

Function
Pin RJ45
10/100BaseT 1000BaseT

1 Twisted pair IN_P BI_DB+

2 Twisted pair IN_N BI_DB-

3 Twisted pair OUT_P BI_DA+

4 nc BI_DD+

5 nc BI_DD-

6 Twisted pair OUT_N BI_DA-

7 nc BI_DC+

8 nc BI_DC-

MN.00224.E - 018 133

 Tab.17 - 8xE1, 50 pin SCSI female 75 Ohm

Pin 75 Ohm

48 Ground A

23 Tributary 1/9 input

50 Ground A

25 Tributary 1/9 output

47 Ground A

22 Tributary 2/10 input

45 Ground A

20 Tributary 2/10 output

42 Ground A

17 Tributary 3/11 input

43 Ground A

18 Tributary 3/11 output

40 Ground A

15 Tributary 4/12 input

39 Ground A

14 Tributary 4/12 output

36 Ground B

11 Tributary 5/13 input

37 Ground B

12 Tributary 5/13 output

34 Ground B

9 Tributary 6/14 input

33 Ground B

8 Tributary 6/14 output

29 Ground B

4 Tributary 7/15 input

31 Ground B

6 Tributary 7/15 output

28 Ground B

3 Tributary 8/16 input

26 Ground B

1 Tributary 8/16 output

Note: Join pin 44 with ground A pins, join pin 32 with ground B pins.

25 1
.........................

.........................
50 26

Fig.70 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female

134 MN.00224.E - 018

 Tab.18 - 8xE1, 50 pin SCSI female 120 Ohm)

Pin 120 Ohm

49 Tributary 1/9 input

23 Tributary 1/9 input

44 Ground A

24 Tributary 1/9 output

25 Tributary 1/9 output

44 Ground A

21 Tributary 2/10 input

22 Tributary 2/10 input

44 Ground A

46 Tributary 2/10 output

20 Tributary 2/10 output

44 Ground A

16 Tributary 3/11 input

17 Tributary 3/11 input

44 Ground A

19 Tributary 3/11 output

18 Tributary 3/11 output

44 Ground A

41 Tributary 4/12 input

15 Tributary 4/12 input

44 Ground A

13 Tributary 4/12 output

14 Tributary 4/12 output

44 Ground A

10 Tributary 5/13 input

11 Tributary 5/13 input

32 Ground B

38 Tributary 5/13 output

12 Tributary 5/13 output

32 Ground B

35 Tributary 6/14 input

9 Tributary 6/14 input

32 Ground B

7 Tributary 6/14 output

8 Tributary 6/14 output

32 Ground B

MN.00224.E - 018 135

 Pin 120 Ohm

5 Tributary 7/15 input

4 Tributary 7/15 input

32 Ground B

30 Tributary 7/15 output

6 Tributary 7/15 output

32 Ground B

27 Tributary 8/16 input

3 Tributary 8/16 input

32 Ground B

2 Tributary 8/16output

1 Tributary 8/16 output

32 Ground B

25 1
.........................

.........................
50 26

Fig.71 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female

Tab.19 - RS232 SUB-D 9 pin male

Pin Description

1 DCD (IN)

2 RD (IN)

3 TD (OUT)

4 DTR (OUT)

5 GND

6 Not connected

7 RTS (OUT)

8 CTS (IN)

9 Not connected

136 MN.00224.E - 018

 Tab.20 - SUB-D 9 pin male USER IN/OUT)

Pin Description

1 C relay contact- branch 1

2 NA/NC relay contact - branch 1

3 C relay contact - branch 2

4 NA/NC relay contact - branch 2

5 User input 01

6 User input 02

7 User input 03

8 User input 04

9 Ground

Tab.21 - MNGT/1 and MNGT/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connec-
tion (RJ45)

Pin Description

1 Tx+

2 Tx-

3 Rx+

4 --

5 --

6 Rx-

7 --

8 --

Tab.22 - CH2 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface (RJ45)

Pin Description

1 D-V11-Tx

2 D+V11-Tx

3 C-V11-Tx

4 C+V11-Tx

5 D-V11-Rx

6 D+V11-Rx

7 C-V11-Rx

8 C+V11-Rx

MN.00224.E - 018 137

 Tab.23 - 2 Mbit/s wayside connector pin-out (RJ45)

Pin Description

1 Tx-C (IN) common

2 TX-F (IN) 120 Ohm

3 GND

4 TX-F (IN) 75 Ohm

5 Rx-C (OUT) common

6 Rx-F (OUT) 120 Ohm

7 GND

8 Rx-F (OUT) 75 Ohm

138 MN.00224.E - 018

 13 ALCPLUS2 CONNECTORS

13.1 IDU FRONT PANEL

The front panel of the ALCplus2 IDU is made up by various connectors depending on IDU version: in the
following type of connectors and relevant pin-out are listed. On the body of each IDU there is the ground
connection: 6.3mm male (Faston).

13.2 ALCPLUS2 1+0/1+1 (GAI0157/GAI0152)

In Fig.7 and Fig.8 are shown the 1+0 and 1+1 version. The following connectors are available:

• MNGT1, 2 management
Port MNGT 1, 2 set MDI or MDIX status automatically RJ45 (Tab.21)

• LAN port 1, 2, 3, 4 electrical 10/100/1000BaseT

Electrical port 1, 2, 3, 4 can be configured
MDI or MDIX via WebLCT RJ45 (Tab.16)

• LAN port 3, 4 100/1000BaseX SFP-LC

• Trib A, B RJ45 (Tab.24)

• LCT, management USB type B (receptable)

• USER IN/OUT SUB-D male 9 pin (Tab.25)

• Connector for 50 Ohm interconnection to ODU

1 connector 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1 SMA (max tightening torque = 0.5 Nm)

• -48 Vdc power supply

1 connector in 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+11 SUB-D 3W3 (pinout on the panel)

Tab.24 - Trib A, B connector

PIN RJ45 Function

1 Rx-F (OUT) 120 Ohm

2 Rx-C (OUT) 120/75 Ohm common

3 GND

4 Tx-F (IN) 120 Ohm

5 Tx-C (IN) 120/75 Ohm common

6 Tx-F (IN) 75 Ohm

7 GND

8 Rx-F (OUT) 75 Ohm

1 In 1+1 the two power supply connectors are in parallel

MN.00224.E - 018 139

 Tab.25 - SUB-D 9 pin male USER IN/OUT

PIN RJ45 Function

1 C relay contact

2 NO relay contact

3 User Input 01

4 User Input 02

5 Ground

6 Do not use

7 NC relay contact

8 Not connected

9 Do not use

13.3 ALCPLUS2 16E1 1+0/1+1 (GAI0155/GAI0156)

In Fig.9 and Fig.10 are shown the 1+0 and 1+1 version. The following connectors are presents:

• MNGT1, 2 management
Port MNGT 1, 2 set MDI or MDIX status automatically RJ45 (Tab.21)

• LAN port 1, 2, 3, 4 electrical 10/100/1000BaseT

Electrical port 1, 2, 3, 4 can be configured
DI or MDIX via WebLCT RJ45 (Tab.16)

• LAN port 3, 4 100/1000BaseX SFP-LC

• Trib A, B RJ45 (Tab.24)

• LCT, management USB type B (receptable)

• USER IN/OUT SUB-D male 9 pin (Tab.25)

• Trib 1/8, 9/16

E1, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm interfaces are present
in the same connectors (different pins) 50 pin SCSI female (Tab.17 for 75 Ohm
and Tab.18 for 120 Ohm)

• Connector for 50 Ohm interconnection to ODU

1 connector 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1 SMA

• -48 Vdc power supply

1 connector in 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1 1 SUB-D 3W3 (pinout on the panel)

13.4 ALCPLUS2 NODAL 1+0/1+1 (GAI0163/GAI0162)

In Fig.13 and Fig.14 are shown the 1+0 and 1+1 version. The following connectors are present:

• MNGT1, 2 management
Port MNGT 1, 2 set MDI or MDIX status automatically RJ45 (Tab.21)

140 MN.00224.E - 018

 • LAN port 1, 2, 3, 4 electrical 10/100/1000BaseT
Electrical port 1, 2, 3, 4 can be configured
MDI or MDIX via WebLCT RJ45 (Tab.16)

• STM-1 1, 2 in/out
SFP can be I.1, S1.1, L1.1, L1.2, electrical coaxial 1.0/2.3 SFP

• LAN port 3, 4 100/1000BaseX SFP-LC

• Trib A, B RJ45 (Tab.24)

• N-BUS 1, 2 connection among IDUs only

through SIAE cable see Tab.15 for cable length and
SIAE code

• LCT, management USB type B (receptable)

• USER IN/OUT SUB-D male 9 pin (Tab.25)

• Trib 1/8, 9/16

E1, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm interfaces are present
in the same connectors (different pins) 50 pin SCSI female (Tab.17 for 75 Ohm
and Tab.18 for 120 Ohm)

• Connector for 50 Ohm interconnection to ODU

1 connector 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1 SMA

• -48 Vdc power supply

1
1 connector in 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1 SUB-D 3W3 (pinout on the panel)

13.5 ALCPLUS2 32E1 1+0/1+1 (GAI0169/GAI0168)

In Fig.11 and Fig.12 are shown the 1+0 and 1+1 version. The following connectors are present:
• MNGT1, 2 management
Port MNGT 1, 2 set MDI or MDIX status automatically RJ45 (Tab.21)

• LAN port 1, 2, 3, 4 electrical 10/100/1000BaseT

Electrical port 1, 2, 3, 4 can be configured
MDI or MDIX via WebLCT RJ45 (Tab.16)

• STM-1 1, 2 in/out
SFP can be I.1, S1.1, L1.1, L1.2, electrical coaxial 1.0/2.3 SFP

• LAN port 3, 4 100/1000BaseX SFP-LC

• Trib A, B RJ45 (Tab.24)

• N-BUS 1, 2 connection among IDUs only

through SIAE cable see Tab.15 for cable length and
SIAE code

• LCT, management USB type B (receptable)

• USER IN/OUT SUB-D male 9 pin (Tab.25)

• Trib 1/8, 25/32

E1, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm interfaces are present
in the same connectors (different pins) 50 pin SCSI female (Tab.17 for
75 Ohm and Tab.18 for 120 Ohm)

• Connector for 50 Ohm interconnection to ODU

1 connector 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1 SMA

• -48 Vdc power supply

1
1 connector in 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1 SUB-D 3W3 (pinout on the panel)

MN.00224.E - 018 141

 14 ALCPLUS2E CONNECTORS

14.1 IDU FRONT PANEL

The front panel of the ALCplus2e IDU is made up by various connectors depending on IDU version: in the
following type of connectors and relevant pin-out are listed. On the body of each IDU there is the ground
connection: 6.3mm male (Faston).

14.2 ALCPLUS2E 1+0 (GAI0178), 2+0/1+1 (GAI0175), 2+0/XPIC

(GAI0172)

In Fig.7 and Fig.8 are shown the 1+0 and 1+1 version. The following connectors are available:

• MNGT1, 2 management
Port MNGT 1, 2 set MDI or MDIX status automatically RJ45 (Tab.21)

• LAN port 1, 2, 3, 4 electrical 10/100/1000BaseT

Electrical port 1, 2, 3, 4 can be configured
MDI or MDIX via WebLCT RJ45 (Tab.16)

• LAN port 3, 4 100/1000BaseX SFP-LC

• Trib A, B RJ45 (Tab.24)

• LCT, management USB type B (receptable)

• USER IN/OUT SUB-D male 9 pin (Tab.25)

• Connector for 50 Ohm interconnection to ODU

1 connector 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1/2+0 SMA (max tightening torque = 0.5 Nm)

• -48 Vdc power supply

1 connector in 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+12 SUB-D 3W3 (pinout on the panel)

Tab.26 - Trib A, B connector

PIN RJ45 Function

1 Rx-F (OUT) 120 Ohm

2 Rx-C (OUT) 120/75 Ohm common

3 GND

4 Tx-F (IN) 120 Ohm

5 Tx-C (IN) 120/75 Ohm common

6 Tx-F (IN) 75 Ohm

7 GND

8 Rx-F (OUT) 75 Ohm

2 In 1+1 the two power supply connectors are in parallel

142 MN.00224.E - 018

 Tab.27 - SUB-D 9 pin male USER IN/OUT

PIN RJ45 Function

1 C relay contact

2 NO relay contact

3 User Input 01

4 User Input 02

5 Ground

6 Do not use

7 NC relay contact

8 Not connected

9 Do not use

14.3 ALCPLUS2E 18E1 2XSTM1 NODAL (GAI0176), 2+0/1+1

(GAI0173), 2+0/XPIC (GAI0170)

In Fig.13 and Fig.14 are shown the 1+0 and 1+1 version. The following connectors are present:
• MNGT1, 2 management
Port MNGT 1, 2 set MDI or MDIX status automatically RJ45 (Tab.21)

• LAN port 1, 2, 3, 4 electrical 10/100/1000BaseT

Electrical port 1, 2, 3, 4 can be configured
MDI or MDIX via WebLCT RJ45 (Tab.16)

• STM-1 1, 2 in/out
SFP can be I.1, S1.1, L1.1, L1.2, electrical coaxial 1.0/2.3 SFP

• LAN port 3, 4 100/1000BaseX SFP-LC

• Trib A, B RJ45 (Tab.24)

• N-BUS 1, 2 connection among IDUs only

through SIAE cable see Tab.15 for cable length and
SIAE code

• LCT, management USB type B (receptable)

• USER IN/OUT SUB-D male 9 pin (Tab.25)

• Trib 1/8, 9/16

E1, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm interfaces are present
in the same connectors (different pins) 50 pin SCSI female (Tab.17 for 75 Ohm
and Tab.18 for 120 Ohm)

• Connector for 50 Ohm interconnection to ODU

1 connector 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1 SMA

• -48 Vdc power supply

1
1 connector in 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1 SUB-D 3W3 (pinout on the panel)

MN.00224.E - 018 143

 14.4 ALCPLUS2E 34E1 2XSTM1 1+0 (GAI0177), 2+0/1+1
(GAI0174), 2+0/XPIC (GAI 0171)

In Fig.11 and Fig.12 are shown the 1+0 and 1+1 version. The following connectors are present:

• MNGT1, 2 management
Port MNGT 1, 2 set MDI or MDIX status automatically RJ45 (Tab.21)

• LAN port 1, 2, 3, 4 electrical 10/100/1000BaseT

Electrical port 1, 2, 3, 4 can be configured
MDI or MDIX via WebLCT RJ45 (Tab.16)

• STM-1 1, 2 in/out
SFP can be I.1, S1.1, L1.1, L1.2, electrical coaxial 1.0/2.3 SFP

• LAN port 3, 4 100/1000BaseX SFP-LC

• Trib A, B RJ45 (Tab.24)

• N-BUS 1, 2 connection among IDUs only

through SIAE cable see Tab.15 for cable length and
SIAE code

• LCT, management USB type B (receptable)

• USER IN/OUT SUB-D male 9 pin (Tab.25)

• Trib 1/8, 25/32

E1, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm interfaces are present
in the same connectors (different pins) 50 pin SCSI female (Tab.17 for
75 Ohm and Tab.18 for 120 Ohm)

• Connector for 50 Ohm interconnection to ODU

1 connector 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1 SMA

• -48 Vdc power supply

1
1 connector in 1+0, 2 connectors in 1+1 SUB-D 3W3 (pinout on the panel)

144 MN.00224.E - 018

 15 INSTALLATION NOTE ON FREQUENCY REUSE
SYSTEMS (XPIC)

15.1 FREQUENCY REUSE

The ALS with frequency reuse is double carrier systems with one carrier on vertical path and one carrier
on horizontal path. One carrier can have a radio frame up to 341 Mbit/s for a total of 682 Mbit/s.
For frequency reuse systems to assume the achievement of guaranteed performances of XPIC functional-
ities some cares shall be taken for IDU-ODU cabling. ALS XPIC systems use IDU ALCplus2e; ODU can be
AS or ASN or ASNK version in accordance with necessity.

15.2 CHARACTERISTICS

15.2.1 Antennas

Antennas will be double polarization type.

15.2.2 RF channel

RF channel shall be the same for vertical polarization path and horizontal polarization path.

15.2.3 ATPC

Low ATPC level shall be 15 dB higher than BER 10-6 threshold.

15.2.4 IDU-ODU cable

The IDU-ODU cable length difference shall be:

• cable from RT1A to IDU-ODU SMA connector 1 and cable from RT1B to IDU-ODU SMA connector 2
shall have the same length with the following tolerance:

- 6 m for 14 MHz bandwidth systems

- 3 m for 28 MHz bandwidth systems

- 1.5 m for 56 MHz bandwidth systems

MN.00224.E - 018 145

 16 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU
WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA

The installation of AS, ASN or ASNK ODU is the same.

Installation changes regarding the kind of ODU RF flange that can be fast locking or standard.

16.1 INSTALLATION KIT

Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions:

• 1+0 version

- antisliding strip (see Fig.72)

- supporting plate plus 60–114 mm pole fixing bracket and relevant nuts and bolts (see Fig.73)

- adapting tools and relevant bolts and nuts for 219 mm pole (see Fig.74)

- Band-it fixing system (see Fig.77)

- antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency (see Fig.75)

- support with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.73)

- connection to the antenna with flexible wave guide and possible use of a rigid elbow (optional)
(see Fig.75)

- kit for ground connection making part of ODU

• 1+0 version (6 GHz only)

Besides the previous items a specific flange adaptor (kit V32409) must be used (see Fig.83). The
flange is UDR70.

• 1+1 version
- antisliding strip (see Fig.72)

- supporting plate plus pole fixing bracket and relevant nuts and bolts (see Fig.73)

- adapting tools and relevant bolts and nuts for 219 mm pole (see Fig.74)

- hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.76)

- flexible waveguide trunk for connection to antenna (optional) (see Fig.75)

- kit for ground connection making part of the two ODUs.

• 1+1 version (6 GHz only)

Besides the previous items a specific flange adaptor (kit V32415) must be used (see Fig.84). The
flange is UDR70.

Warning: in order to avoid damages to flexible waveguides, don’t fold or twist them more than values spec-
ified as limit in installation instructions of the waveguide supplier.

In case of flexible wave guide use, Tab.30 shows the maximum bending radius.

146 MN.00224.E - 018

 16.2 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

• N.2 13mm torque wrench

• N.1 15 mm torque wrench

• N.1 17 mm torque wrench

• N.1 3 mm Allen wrench

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

16.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps:

• Version 1+0: installation onto the pole of the supporting plate 3

• Version 1+0: installation onto the pole of the support plate by Band-it
3
• Version 1+1: installation onto the pole of the supporting plate

• Installation of the ODU (common to both 1+0 and 1+1 version)

• ODU grounding

1+0 version – Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate

Fig.72 – Mount antislide strip around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position
of the supporting plate (see next step)

Fig.73 – Adhere the supporting plate to the antisliding strip plastic blocks and then secure it to the pole
through the fixing bracket for 60–114 mm pole (see Fig.73). Bolts and nuts are available on the supporting
plate. Tightening torque must be 32 Nm.

Warning: As shown in Fig.74 an adapting kit must be used for the 219 mm pole. It consists of an additional
plate to enlarge the standard supporting plate dimension and relevant U–bolt for 219 mm pole fixing.

Fig.75 – Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimen-
sions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:

Tab.28 - Torques for tightening screws

Frequencies Screw Tool Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm

up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 2 Nm

Fig.75 – Fix the antenna side flange to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism. The flange can be
mounted horizontally (as shown in Fig.75) or vertically as function of convenience.

Fig.76 – Fix the support with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate making use of available
bolts and nuts. Fig.76 shows the possible positions. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.

3 In case of 219 mm pole, an adapting kit is supplied for the purpose.

MN.00224.E - 018 147

 1+0 version – Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate by Band-it

In case of 1+0 ODU installation, a Band-it pole mounting kit can be used: through slots (see Fig.77) on
the supporting plate two metallic bands secure the plate on the pole. Band characteristics are:

• thickness 0.76 mm

• width 19 mm.

It is also possible to use the anti-sliding system (optional).

1+1 version – Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate

Fig.72 – Mount antislide strip around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position
of the supporting plate (see next step)

Fig.73 – Position the supporting plate to the antisliding strip plastic blocks and then secure it to the pole
through the fixing bracket for 60–114 mm pole (see Fig.73). Bolts and nuts are available on the supporting
plate kit. Tightening torque must be 32 Nm.

Fig.78 – Secure the hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate using bolt and nuts
available on the support plate. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
Remove the plastic cover from the hybrid flange sides.

Warning: Do not remove the foil from the hybrid flange sides.

Fig.78 – Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimen-
sions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:

Tab.29 - Torques for tightening screws

Frequencies Screw Tool Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm

up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 2 Nm

Warning: It is advisable to shape the waveguide flexible trunk, connecting ODU flange with antenna flange
as shown in Fig.81. This avoids possible condensate to be channelled towards the ODU flange.

Installation of the ODU

1. Remove the plastic cover from the ODU flange side. Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4
to the O–ring of Fig.80.
Warning: Do not remove the foil from the flange.

2. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side.

3. Position the ODU body close to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism and align ODU side
flange (see Fig.80) to antenna side flange (see Fig.75 – 1+0 version) or hybrid side flange (see
Fig.78 – 1+1 version).
Note: For 1+0 version the ODU can assume positions of Fig.79 depending on the polarisation.

4. With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° anti–clockwise and then insert
the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth on the support
(see Fig.75 – 1+0 version or Fig.78 – 1+1 version) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail Fig.80)

5. When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until “clack” is heard and the ODU rota-
tion stops.

6. Secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (1) (see Fig.75 – 1+0 version or Fig.78 – 1+1
version). Tightening torque must be 6 Nm.
Final assembly of 1+1 version is shown in Fig.81. A parasol mounting is optionally possible.

148 MN.00224.E - 018

 16.4 GROUNDING

The ODU must be connected to ground making reference to details of Fig.82.

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm.

Tab.30 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency

Bending radius with- Bending radius with- Bending radius with Bending radius with
out rebending out rebending rebending rebending
Frequency
mm (inch) mm (inch) mm (inch) mm (inch)
E-plane a H-plane b E-plane a. H-plane b.

6 GHz or 7 GHz
200 (7,9) 500 (19,8) 300 (11,9) 600 (23,7)
low

7 GHz high 200 (7,9) 500 (19,8) 250 (9,9) 600 (23,7)

11 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

13 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

15 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

18 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

23 GHz 110 (4,3) 230 (9,1) 130 (5,1) 250 (9,9)

38 GHz 80 (3,1) 140 (5,5) 90 (3,6) 150 (5,9)

a. Bending E-plane

Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
(short side of the section)

b. Bending H-plane

Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
(long side of the section)

MN.00224.E - 018 149

 Plastic blocks
Antisliding strip

Fig.72 - Antisliding strip

150 MN.00224.E - 018

 Use 17 mm wrench
(32Nm torque)

Supporting plate

Use 15 mm wrench
(32Nm torque)

Fig.73 - 60–114 mm pole supporting plate fixing

MN.00224.E - 018 151

 Fig.74 - Adapting kit for 219 mm pole

152 MN.00224.E - 018

 In option

Antenna side flange

Support with ODU fast

lockinh mechanism

Reference tooth

Reference tooth

1
1

Position of antenna
side flange

1. 13 mm wrench
6 Nm torque

Fig.75 - Mounting position

MN.00224.E - 018 153

 A

Adapting kit for 219 mm pole

B C

Fig.76 - Possible positions of the support with ODU fast locking mechanism

154 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.77 - Band-it pole mounting kit

MN.00224.E - 018 155

 Use 13 mm wrench
(18 Nm torque)

Hybrid with ODU fast

locking mechanism

Reference tooth Reference tooth

Optional vawe
guide

RT1 RT2

Fig.78 - Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate

156 MN.00224.E - 018

 Vertical Horizontal

Fig.79 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisa-
tion is always vertical: handle at the left side.

MN.00224.E - 018 157

 Reference tooth

O-ring
ODU side flange

ASN version

"N"

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

"BNC"

Ground bolt

AS version

Fig.80 - ODU body reference tooth

158 MN.00224.E - 018

 ASN version
Suncover (optional)

AS version

Fig.81 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version

MN.00224.E - 018 159

 1
2
3

4
5
ASN version

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

AS version

Fig.82 - ODU grounding

160 MN.00224.E - 018

 Spring

Washer

Screw M5x25

UDR70 antenna flange

Screw M4x8

Fig.83 - Kit V32409

MN.00224.E - 018 161

 UDR70 flange

Screw M4x18
Spring

Washer

O-Ring

Hybrid 6 GHz
(balanced or
unbalanced)

Fig.84 - Kit V32415

162 MN.00224.E - 018

 17 INSTALLATION ONTO THE WALL OF THE ODU
WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA

The installation of AS, ASN or ASNK ODU is the same. Installation changes regarding the kind of ODU RF
flange that can be fast locking or standard.

17.1 INSTALLATION KIT

Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions:

• 1+0 version

- wall supporting plate with additional contact surface extension plates (see Fig.85)

- antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency (see Fig.86)

- support with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.86)

- connection to the antenna with flexible wave guide and possible use of a rigid elbow (optional)
(see Fig.86)

- kit for ground connection making part of ODU

• 1+0 version (6 GHz only)

Besides the previous items a specific flange adaptor (kit V32409) must be used (see Fig.93). The
flange is UDR70.

• 1+1 version
- supporting plate with additional contact surface extension tools (see Fig.85)

- hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.88)

- connection to the antenna with flexible wave guide and possible use of a rigid elbow (optional)
(see Fig.86)

- kit for ground connection making part of the two ODUs.

• 1+1 version (6 GHz only)

Besides the previous items a specific flange adaptor (kit V32415) must be used (see Fig.94). The
flange is UDR70.

In case of flexible wave guide use, Tab.33 shows the maximum bending radius.

17.2 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

• N.2 13mm torque wrench

• N.1 15 mm torque wrench

• N.1 17 mm torque wrench

MN.00224.E - 018 163

 • N.1 3 mm allen wrench.

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

17.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps:

• version 1+0: installation onto the wall of the supporting plate

• version 1+1: installation onto the wall of the supporting plate

• installation of the ODU (common to both 1+0 and 1+1 version)

• ODU grounding.

1+0 version – Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate

Fig.85 – Fix on the supporting plate the two supplied extension plates to increase the wall contact surface.

Fig.85 – Secure the supporting plate on the wall using the more suitable screws.

Use the expansion plug suitable to the wall. Test the installed bracket with a load of 50kg. No deformation
should be noted.

Fig.86 – Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimen-
sions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:

Tab.31 - Torques for tightening screws

Frequencies Screw Tool Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm

up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 2 Nm

Fig.86 – Fix the antenna side flange to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism. The flange can be
mounted horizontally (as shown in Fig.86) or vertically as function of convenience.

Fig.87 – Fix the support with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate making use of available
bolts and nuts. Fig.87 shows three possible positions. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.

1+1 version – Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate

Fig.85 – Fix on the supporting plate the two supplied extension plates to increase the wall contact surface.

Fig.85 – Secure the supporting plate on the wall using the more suitable screws.

Warning: Use the expansion plug suitable to the wall. Test the installed bracket with a load of 50kg. No
deformation should be noted.

Fig.88 – Secure the hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate using bolt and nuts
available on the support plate. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
Remove the plastic cover from the hybrid flange sides.

Warning: Do not remove the foil from the hybrid flange sides.

Fig.88 – Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimen-
sions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:

164 MN.00224.E - 018

 Tab.32 - Torques for tightening screws

Frequencies Screw Tool Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm

up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 2 Nm

Warning: It is advisable to shape the waveguide flexible trunk, connecting ODU flange with antenna flange
as shown in Fig.91 This avoids possible condensate to be channelled towards the ODU flange.

Installation of the ODU

1. Remove the plastic cover from the ODU flange side. Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4
to the O–ring of Fig.90.
Warning: Do not remove the foil from the flange.

2. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side.

3. Position the ODU body close to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism and align ODU side
flange (see Fig.90) to antenna side flange (see Fig.86 – 1+0 version) or hybrid side flange (see
Fig.88 – 1+1 version).
Note: For 1+0 version the ODU can assume positions of Fig.89 depending on the polarisation.

4. With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° anti–clockwise and then insert
the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth on the support
(see Fig.86 – 1+0 version or Fig.88 – 1+1 version) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail Fig.90)

5. When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until “clack” is heard and the ODU rota-
tion stops.

6. Secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (1) (see Fig.86 – 1+0 version or Fig.88 – 1+1
version). Tightening torque must be 6 Nm.

Final assembly of 1+1 version is shown in Fig.91. A parasol mounting is optionally possible.

MN.00224.E - 018 165

 17.4 GROUNDING

The ODU must be connected to ground making reference to details of Fig.92.

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm.

Tab.33 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency

Bending radius with- Bending radius with- Bending radius with Bending radius with
out rebending out rebending rebending rebending
Frequency
mm (inch) mm (inch) mm (inch) mm (inch)
E-plane a H-plane b E-plane a. H-plane b.

6 GHz or 7 GHz
200 (7,9) 500 (19,8) 300 (11,9) 600 (23,7)
low

7 GHz high 200 (7,9) 500 (19,8) 250 (9,9) 600 (23,7)

11 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

13 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

15 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

18 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

23 GHz 110 (4,3) 230 (9,1) 130 (5,1) 250 (9,9)

38 GHz 80 (3,1) 140 (5,5) 90 (3,6) 150 (5,9)

a. Bending E-plane

Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
(short side of the section)

b. Bending H-plane

Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
(long side of the section)

166 MN.00224.E - 018

 Extension plate

Supporting plate

M8 bolt and nut

Another possible fixation

Fig.85 - Wall supporting plate

MN.00224.E - 018 167

 In option

Antenna side flange

Support with ODU fast

locking mechanism

Reference tooth

Reference tooth

1
1

13 mm wrench
6 Nm torque

Position of antenna
side flange

Fig.86 - Support with ODU fast locking mechanism

168 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.87 - Mounting possible positions

MN.00224.E - 018 169

 Use 13 mm wrench
(18 Nm torque)

Hybrid with ODU fast

locking mechanism

Reference tooth Reference tooth

Optional wave
guide

RT1 RT2

Fig.88 - Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate

170 MN.00224.E - 018

 Vertical Horizontal

Fig.89 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisa-
tion is always vertical: handle at the left side.

MN.00224.E - 018 171

 Reference tooth

O-ring
ODU side flange

ASN version

"N"

"BNC"

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

Ground bolt

AS version

Fig.90 - ODU body reference tooth

172 MN.00224.E - 018

 Suncover (optional)

ASN version

AS version

Fig.91 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version

MN.00224.E - 018 173

 1
2
3

4
5

ASN version

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

AS version

1. Bolt

2. Spring washer

3. Flat washer

4. Earth cable collar

5. Flat washer

Fig.92 - ODU grounding

174 MN.00224.E - 018

 Spring

Washer

Screw M5x25

UDR70 antenna flange

Screw M4x8

Fig.93 - Kit V32409

MN.00224.E - 018 175

 UDR70 flange

Screw M4x18
Spring

Washer

O-Ring

Hybrid 6 GHz
(balanced or
unbalanced)

Fig.94 - Kit V32415

176 MN.00224.E - 018

 18 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU
WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA

18.1 FOREWORD

The installation onto the pole of the ODU with integrated antenna concerns both 1+0 and 1+1 versions.

The installation of AS, ASN or ASNK ODU is the same.

Installation changes regarding the kind of ODU RF flange that can be fast locking or standard.

18.2 INSTALLATION KIT

Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions:

1+0 version

• 60 to 114 mm pole mounting kit consisting of:

- centring ring and relevant screws (see Fig.95)

- antislide strip (see Fig.96)

- pole support system and pole fixing brackets (see Fig.97)

- ODU with O–ring and devices for ground connection

1+1 version

• pole mounting kit from 60 to 114 mm for 1+1 consisting of:

- centring ring and relevant screws (see Fig.95)

- antislide strip (see Fig.96)

- pole support system and pole fixing brackets (see Fig.97)

• hybrid mechanical body (see Fig.106)

• polarization twist disk (see Fig.108)

• 2 ODUs with O–rings and devices for ground connection.

MN.00224.E - 018 177

 18.3 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

• N.2 13 mm torque wrench

• N.1 15 mm torque wrench

• N.1 17 mm torque wrench

• N.1 3 mm allen wrench.

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

18.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure proceeds according with the following steps:

1+0 version

1. installation onto the pole of the support system

2. installation of the antenna

3. installation of ODU

4. antenna aiming

5. ODU grounding

1+1 version

1. installation onto the pole of the support system

2. installation of the antenna

3. installation of hybrid circuit

4. installation of the two ODUs

5. antenna aiming
6. ODU grounding.

18.4.1 Installation onto the pole of the support system and the antenna

Fig.95 – Set the antenna in such a position as to be able to operate on its rear side. Locate the five threaded
holes around antenna flange. Mount centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with 3 calibrated bolts.
Caution: centring ring should be mounted so that the screws do not stick out.

Define if the antenna will be mounted with vertical or horizontal polarization. Check that free drain holes
stay at bottom side. Mount bolt type M10x30, in position A leaving it loose of 2 cm approx. With horizontal
polarization mount bolt type M10x30 in position D, leaving it loose of 2 cm approx.

Fig.96 – Mount antislide strip onto the pole. Place blocks as in Fig.96 following antenna aiming direction.
Tighten the strip with screwdriver.

Fig.97 – Mount pole supporting system with relevant pole fixing brackets following antenna aiming direc-
tion as indicated by arrow. Antislide strip should result at the centre of supporting plate. Supporting system

178 MN.00224.E - 018

 should lean against antislide clamp with the tooth as in Fig.98. Position the antenna in such a way that bolt
in position A or D of Fig.95 cross through hole E of Fig.99. Secure the support system to the pole by means
of the pole fixing brackets and relevant fixing bolts.

Fig.100 – Rotate the antenna body until the remainder three antenna holes coincide with the three support
holes. Secure the antenna to the support by tightening the relevant passing through bolts.

18.4.2 Installation of ODU

1+0 version

1. Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O–ring (4) of Fig.103 by protecting finger
hands with gloves.

2. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The ODU handle
can assume position of Fig.101 depending on the polarization.

3. Position the ODU body near the support system and align ODU side flange to antenna side flange
(see Fig.102). With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° anti–clockwise
and then insert the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth
on the support (see Fig.102) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail of Fig.103).

4. When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until “clack” is heard and the ODU rota-
tion stops.
Fig.104 and Fig.105 show ODU housing final position for vertical and horizontal polarization respec-
tively.

5. Secure ODU body on the support system by tightening bolts (1) of Fig.102.

1+1 version

Fig.106 – Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to O–rings (1). Insert O–rings (1) and (6) into
twist polarization disk (2).

Vertical polarization

Fix the disk on hybrid flange placing marker (4), on disk, close to V mark.
Horizontal polarization

Fix the disk on hybrid flange placing reference (4), on disk, close to H mark.

In 13 GHz and 15 GHz ODUs the polarization disk is fixed to the hybrid flange by means of 3 screws as
shown in Fig.107.

Caution: Twist disk has two planes. Take care of position marker (4) on twist disk. The position of marker
(4) plane should be in contact to hybrid like in figure. Tighten progressively and alternatively screws (7)
with the same number of spring washers (8) with the following torque:

Tab.34 - Torques for tightening screws

Frequencies Screw Tool Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm

up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 2 Nm

Fig.108 – Fix hybrid to support system with four bolts (1) taking care of RT1/RT2 position shown by labels
of Fig.108. Tighten progressively and alternatively four bolts (1).

MN.00224.E - 018 179

 18.4.3 ODU installation

The installation procedure of the two ODUs is the same.

1. Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O–ring (4) of the Fig.103 by protecting finger
hands with gloves.

2. Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. For 1+0 the
ODU can assume position of Fig.101 depending on the polarisation. For 1+1 the handle ODU posi-
tion is always placed at the right side (horizontal polarization).

3. Position the ODU body near the support system and align ODU side flange to antenna side flange
(see Fig.102). With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° anti–clockwise
and then insert the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth
on the support (see Fig.102) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail of Fig.103).

4. When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until “clack” is heard and the ODU rota-
tion stops.
Fig.104 and Fig.105 show ODU housing final position for vertical and horizontal polarization respec-
tively for 1+0 version.
Fig.109 shows ODU housing final position for 1+1 version.

5. Secure ODU body on the support system by tightening bolts (1) of Fig.102.

18.5 ANTENNA AIMING

Antenna aiming for 1+0 version and 1+1 version is the same. The antenna aiming devices allow to perform
the following adjustments with respect to the starting aiming position:

- Horizontal ± 15° operating on the nut (3) shown in Fig.110, only after having loosen
the nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.111.

- vertical ± 15° operating on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) shown in Fig.110
only after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.111 and (4) and (5) of
Fig.110.
For adjustment from 0° to +30° extract nut (1) Fig.111 and position it in
hole (4), extract nut (2) Fig.111 and position it in hole (6). Operate on
vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of
Fig.111 and (4) of Fig.110.
For adjustment from 0° to –30° extract nut (1) of Fig.111 and position it in
hole (3), extract nut (2) of Fig.111 and position it in hole (5). Operate on
vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of
Fig.111 and (4) of Fig.110.

For vertical adjustment some markers, every 10°, are available on support.
The bigger marker gives 0° starting aiming position. Once the optimum aiming
position is obtained, tighten firmly the four nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.111 and
(4) and (5) of Fig.110 for vertical adjustment and the four nuts (7), (8), (9),
(10) of Fig.111 for horizontal adjustment. Tighten with 15 mm wrench and
32 Nm torque.

18.6 COMPATIBILITY

The pole installation kit of the ODU unit in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration is compatible with integrated antenna
complying with SIAE standard with measures 0.2 m, 0.4 m, 0.6 m, 0.8 m of diameter.

180 MN.00224.E - 018

 18.7 GROUNDING

See Fig.112.

On ODU grounding can be connected with the available bolt spring washer and flat washers as shown. Cou-
pling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm.

A D D C

B C A B

Vertical polarization horizontal polarization

3 mm allen key 2
2,5 Nm torque

A
1
C

1. Antenna

2. Calibrated Allen screw

3. Centring ring

Fig.95 - Centring ring position

MN.00224.E - 018 181

 2

1. Steel belt
2. Plastic blocks

Fig.96 - Antislide strip

182 MN.00224.E - 018

 1

Antenna aiming direction

3

15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque 3

3 3

1. Pole fixing brackets

2. Tooth

3. Bolt

4. Pole support system

Fig.97 - Support mount on pole

MN.00224.E - 018 183

 Antenna aiming direction

1. Tooth

Fig.98 - Supporting system position

Fig.99 - Hole E

184 MN.00224.E - 018

 B C

A D

15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque

A, B, C, D Bolt slots

Fig.100 - Antenna installation on pole support

Vertical Horizontal

Fig.101 -Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polari-
sation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.

MN.00224.E - 018 185

 1 13 mm wrench
6 Nm torque
H
H

H
H
1
1
H
H

H
H
1
H: Reference tooth

Fig.102 - Support system for ODU housing and reference tooth in evidence

186 MN.00224.E - 018

 Reference tooth

O-ring
ODU side flange

ASN version

"N"

"BNC"

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm Ground bolt

AS version

Fig.103 - ODU body reference tooth

MN.00224.E - 018 187

 5
30

Fig.104 - ODU housing final position for vertical polarization

5
30

5
30

Fig.105 - ODU housing final position for horizontal polarization

188 MN.00224.E - 018

 7

2
4
6

1. O–ring
2. Polarization twist disk

3. Hybrid mechanical body

4. Position marker of twist disk

5. Reference label for twist disk

6. O–ring

7. Allen screws

8. Spring washer

Fig.106 - Hybrid and polarization disk

MN.00224.E - 018 189

 Horizontal polarization

Vertical polarization

Fig.107 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13GHz and 15 GHz)

190 MN.00224.E - 018

 1

RT1
2
1
RT2
13 mm wrench
18 Nm torque

1. Bolts

2. Spring washer

Fig.108 - Hybrid mount on pole support

MN.00224.E - 018 191

 ASN version

AS version

Fig.109 - ODU housing final position for 1+1 version

192 MN.00224.E - 018

 3
4
5 1
2

1. Marker
2. Vertical adjustment

3. Horizontal adjustment

4. Bolt
5. Fixing nut

Fig.110 - Vertical and horizontal adjustments

MN.00224.E - 018 193

 15 mm wrench 15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque 32 Nm torque

7
4 11 1 8
3

10

9 15 mm wrench
6 32 Nm torque
5 2
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque

1., 2., 3., 4. Horizontal aiming block bolts

5., 6., 7. Vertical aiming block bolts

8., 11. Threaded hole for vertical aiming up to –30°

9., 10. Threaded hole for vertical aiming up to +30°

Fig.111 - Antenna aiming block

194 MN.00224.E - 018

 1
2
3

4
5
ASN version

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

AS version

1. Bolt

2. Spring washer

3. Flat washer

4. Earth cable collar

5. Flat washer

Fig.112 - ODU grounding

MN.00224.E - 018 195

 19 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU
WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V32307,
V32308, V32309)

19.1 FOREWORD

The description concerns pole mounting of ODU, in 1+0 and 1+1 version, using following installation kits:

- V32307 for ODU with frequency from 10 to 13 GHz

- V32308 for ODU with frequency from 15 to 38 GHz

- V32309 for ODU with frequency from 7 to 8 GHz

Differences regard the dimensions and the presence of the centring ring (see Fig.113):

- V32307 centring ring for antenna flange from 10 to 13 GHz

- V32308 centring ring for antenna flange from 15 to 38 GHz

- V32309 no centring ring (and relevant screws).

The installation of AS, ASN or ASNK ODU is the same.

Installation changes regarding the kind of ODU RF flange that can be fast locking or standard.

19.2 INSTALLATION KIT

Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions.

1+0 version

• 60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:

- centring ring and relevant screws

- pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets

- 1+0 ODU support and relevant screws

- ODU with O–ring and devices for ground connection

1+1 version

• 60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:

- centring ring and relevant screws

- pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets

- 1+0 ODU support

196 MN.00224.E - 018

 - hybrid and relevant screws

- polarization twist disk and relevant screws

- 2 ODUs with O–rings and devices for ground connection.

19.3 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

• N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench

• N.1 3 mm Allen wrench

• N.1 6 mm Allen wrench

• N.1 13 mm spanner

• N.2 17 mm spanner.

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

19.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure is listed below:

1+0 version

1. antenna polarization

2. installation of the centring ring on the antenna

3. installation of 1+0 ODU support

4. installation onto the pole of the assembled structure

5. installation of ODU

6. antenna aiming

7. ODU grounding

1+1 version

1. antenna polarization

2. installation of the centring ring on the antenna

3. installation of 1+0 ODU support

4. installation onto the pole of the assembled structure

5. installation of hybrid

6. installation of ODUs

7. antenna aiming

8. ODU grounding.

MN.00224.E - 018 197

 19.5 1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES

19.5.1 Setting antenna polarization

Fig.113 – Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the four M3 Allen screws
around the antenna flange. Unscrew them (use 2.5 mm Allen wrench) and position the antenna flange ac-
cording on: horizontal wave guide –> vertical polarization, vertical wave guide –> horizontal polariza-
tion. Screw again the four Allen screws (torque = 1 Nm).

19.5.2 Installation of the centring ring on the antenna

Fig.113 – Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the three holes around the
antenna flange. Mount the centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with the 3 Allen screws M4 (use
3mm Allen wrench, torque 2 = Nm).

19.5.3 Installation of 1+0 ODU support

Fig.113 – Mount the support onto assembled structure (pole support system plus antenna) using the four
M8 Allen screws (use 6 mm Allen wrench, torque 18 = Nm). Two of the four screws, diagonally opposed,
must be mounted with the two bushes around.

19.5.4 Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure

Fig.113 – Mount the assembled structure on the pole using the two pole fixing brackets and the four M10
screws (use 17 mm spanner, torque = 13 Nm); the heads of the screws are inserted on the antenna side,
the four nuts and the springs between nut and brackets are inserted on bracket side.

19.5.5 Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)

Fig.114 – Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 on the O–ring by protecting fingers with gloves.

Fig.115 – Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle
can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the Wave guide of the antenna: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° counter–clockwise into the support and search
for matching between reference tooth on the support (see Fig.116) and reference tooth on the ODU body.

Fig.117 – When alignment of the references teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until rotation
is stopped. In figure are shown ODU final position for both polarizations.

Fig.116 – When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 13mm
spanner, torque = 6Nm).

198 MN.00224.E - 018

 19.5.6 Antenna aiming

Antenna aiming procedure for 1+0 version or 1+1 version is the same.

Horizontal aiming: ±5° operating on the 17 mm nut shown in Fig.118 with a 17 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the two 17 mm nut on the pivot.

Vertical aiming: ±20° operating on the 13 mm nut shown in Fig.118 with a 13 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the three 13 mm nut on the pole support.

Once optimum position is obtained, tighten firmly all the nuts previously loosen.

19.5.7 ODU grounding

ODU grounding is achieved with:

• M8 screw without washers

• M6 screw with washer

as shown in Fig.119.

19.6 1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES

In further page are explained all the mounting step not already discussed in paragraph “19.5 1+0
MOUNTING PROCEDURES”.

19.6.1 Installation of Hybrid

Fig.120 – The polarization disk must be always fixed on hybrid flange. Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow
Corning 4 on the O–rings by protecting fingers with gloves. Bring the polarization twist disk with the posi-
tion marker down. Insert the O–ring into polarization twist disk.
Vertical polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards V mark.

Horizontal polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards H mark.

In 13 GHz and 15 GHz ODUs the polarization disk is fixed to the hybrid flange by means of 3 screws as
shown in Fig.121.

Tighten progressively and alternatively the screws and the spring washer with following torque:

Tab.35 - Torques for tightening screws

Frequencies Screw Tool Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm

up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 2 Nm

Fig.122 – Fix hybrid body to 1+0 support with four M8 bolts (use 13 mm spanner, torque = 18 Nm), tighten
progressively and alternatively the bolts.

MN.00224.E - 018 199

 19.6.2 Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version)

For both ODUs.

Fig.114 – Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O–ring by protecting fingers with gloves.

Fig.115 – Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle
can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the wave guide of the hybrid: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° counter–clockwise and then insert the ODU body
into the support. For 1+1 system the handle of the ODU is always positioned on the right. The polarization
twist disk on the hybrid matches the antenna polarization.

Fig.123 – When alignment of the reference teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until the rota-
tion stops. In figure are shown ODUs final position.

Fig.116 – When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 17 mm
spanner, torque = 6 Nm).

Warning: Internal codes (e.g. installation items, antennas, PCB) are here reported only as example. The
Manufacturer reserves the right to change them without any previous advice.

Four 13mm
screws

Centring ring
(not present in V32309)

Three 3mm Allen screws Antenna

(not present in V32309)

1+0 support

Two bushes

Fig.113 - 1+0 pole mounting

200 MN.00224.E - 018

 Reference tooth

O-ring
ODU wave guide

"N"

"BNC"

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm Ground bolt

Fig.114 - ODU body reference tooth

Vertical Horizontal

Fig.115 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polar-
isation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.

MN.00224.E - 018 201

 3
1

1
5

4 4
1

2
3

1. 6 mm Allen screw

2. Bush (diagonally placed)

3. 17 mm Tightening bolts (max torque = 6 Nm)

4. Reference point for horizontal polarization

5. Reference point for vertical polarization

Fig.116 - 1+0 support

202 MN.00224.E - 018

 1+0 ODU HP with handle on the right:
horizontal polarization

1+0 ODU standard with handle on the left:

vertical polarization

Fig.117 - ODU housing final position for both polarization

MN.00224.E - 018 203

 Horizontal aiming:
two 17mm block screws

Vertical aiming:
13mm block screws
Pole support

17mm nut for horizontal

adjustment of antenna

Internal 5mm Allen

screw for vertical
adjustment of antenna

Fig.118 - Antenna aiming

204 MN.00224.E - 018

 1
2
3

4
5
ASN version

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

AS version

1. Bolt

2. Spring washer

3. Flat washer

4. Earth cable collar

5. Flat washer

Fig.119 - ODU grounding

MN.00224.E - 018 205

 7

2
4
6

1. O–ring
2. Polarization twist disk

3. Hybrid mechanical body

4. Position marker of twist disk

5. Reference label for twist disk

6. O–ring

7. Allen screws

8. Spring washer

Fig.120 - Hybrid and twist disk

206 MN.00224.E - 018

 Horizontal polarization

Vertical polarization

Fig.121 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz)

MN.00224.E - 018 207

 Fig.122 - Hybrid installation

208 MN.00224.E - 018

 ASN version

AS version

Fig.123 - 1+1 ODUs installation

MN.00224.E - 018 209

 20 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU
WITH INTEGRATED DUAL POLARIZATION AN-
TENNA

20.1 FOREWORD

The installation onto the pole of the ODU with integrated dual polarization antenna concerns 2+0 ODU
(with/without XPIC) and purpose of this chapter is to describe how to install ODUs over an orthomode
transducer (OMT) to achieve a double polarization microwave link.

The OMT we speak about is a generic one.

Dual polarization antenna, orthomode transducer and pole support assembly are supplied by different sup-
pliers.

Depending on supplier and antenna dimension the final assembled structure can vary.

An example in Fig.124.

The installation of AS, ASN or ASNK ODU is the same.

Installation changes regarding the kind of ODU RF flange that can be fast locking or standard.

20.2 INSTALLATION KIT FOR STANDARD LOCK ODU

A generic installation kit includes the following items:

• Pole support system with antenna and orthomode transducer (from various suppliers)

• 2 centring rings and relevant screws (see Fig.125)

• 2 standard lock ODUs with O-rings and accessories for ground connection and with standard lock
flange.

20.3 INSTALLATION KIT FOR FAST LOCK ODU

• Pole support system with antenna and orthomode transducer (from various suppliers)

• 2 centring rings and relevant screws (see Fig.125)

• 2 fast lock 1+0 ODU support

• 2 Fast lock ODUs with O-rings and accessories for ground connection and with fastlock flange

210 MN.00224.E - 018

 20.4 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

• 1x 2.5 mm Allen wrench

• 1x 3 mm Allen wrench

• 1x 6 mm Allen wrench
• 1x 13 mm spanner

• 2x 17 mm spanner

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

20.5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Two installation procedures are available depending the ODU mounting flange.

Standard lock ODUs

1. Installation of the 2 centring rings on the two lateral flanges of the orthomode transducer

2. Installation over the pole of the assembled structure: antenna with orthomode and pole support
system
3. Installation of standard lock ODUs

4. Antenna aiming

5. ODU grounding

Fast lock ODUs

1. Installation of the 2 centring rings on the two lateral flanges of the orthomode transducer

2. Installation of the 2 fast lock 1+0 ODU support

3. Installation over the pole of the assembled structure: antenna with orthomode and pole support
system

4. Installation of the fast lock ODUs

5. Antenna aiming

6. ODU grounding

MN.00224.E - 018 211

 20.6 STANDARD LOCK ODUS MOUNTING PROCEDURE

20.6.1 Installation of the centring rings over the OMT

Two centring rings must be mounted over the two lateral flanges of the OMT (see Fig.125).

• Set the OMT in such a position to operate on its lateral side flange.

• Locate the three holes around the flange and mount the first centring ring onto this flange and
tight it with the 3 Allen screws M4 (use 3mm Allen wrench, torque 2 = Nm).

• Repeat the procedure on the flange on opposite side of the OMT in order to mount the second cen-
tring ring.

20.6.2 Installation over the pole of the assembled structure: antenna,

OMT and pole support system

See the instructions included in the antenna box (instructions vary depending on antenna vendor).

20.6.3 Installation of the standard lock ODUs over the OMT

Two ODUs must be mounted using four 25mm bolts for each one.

• Add lubricant paste, e.g. MOLYKOTE P-40, on threads of four 25mm M10 bolts (M10). The sliding
surfaces should be cleaned. The paste should then be applied with a suitable brush, rag or grease
gun. It should not be mixed with grease or oils. Chemical protective gloves should be used.

• Screw partially these four 25mm M10 bolts in the relevant four holes around the OMT lateral flange:
each bolt should be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14mm (the thick-
ness of hook), use 15mm spanner

• Apply seal and lubricant grease DOW CORNING 4 to the O-ring, protecting hands with gloves, and
insert in the proper track on the ODU flange

• Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the OMT lateral flange and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the OMT flange itself.

• After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach the
ODU to the OMT flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the four
bolts
• Rotate 30° clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

• When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15mm spanner,
torque=46mm)

• Optional: sun cover kit - Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

• Now the ODU is ready to be connected to the IDU-ODU cable and to the grounding cable.

Repeat this procedure for the second ODU on the opposite side of the OMT.

212 MN.00224.E - 018

 20.6.4 Antenna aiming

For horizontal and vertical aiming see the instructions included in the antenna box (instructions vary de-
pending on antenna vendor). Remember to tighten firmly all the nuts previously loosen.

For polarization adjustment see the instructions included in the antenna box (instructions vary depending
on antenna vendor). Remember to tighten firmly all the nuts previously loosen.

20.6.5 ODU grounding

ODU grounding is achieved with:

• M8 screw without washers

• M6 screw with washer

as shown in Fig.119.

20.7 FAST LOCK ODUS MOUNTING PROCEDURE

20.7.1 Installation of the centring rings over the OMT

Two centring rings must be mounted over the two lateral flanges of the OMT (see Fig.125).
• Set the OMT in such a position to operate on its lateral side flange.

• Locate the three holes around the flange and mount the first centring ring onto this flange and
tight it with the 3 Allen screws M4 (use 3mm Allen wrench, torque 2 = Nm).
• Repeat the procedure on the flange on opposite side of the OMT in order to mount the second cen-
tring ring.

20.7.2 Installation of the fast lock 1+0 ODU support

See Fig.126. The orientation of the ODU support is the one that allows the mounting of the support over
the OMT. The fast lock ODU can be mounted inserted inside the ODU support in two different orientations
just to match the OMT wave guide flange.

• Mount the support onto OMT lateral flange using the four M8 Allen screws (1 in Fig.126). Use 6 mm
Allen wrench, torque 18 = Nm.

• Two of the four screws, diagonally opposed, must be mounted with the two bushes (2 in Fig.126).
around

20.7.3 Installation over the pole of the assembled structure: antenna,

OMT and pole support system

See the instructions included in the antenna box (instructions vary depending on antenna vendor).

MN.00224.E - 018 213

 20.7.4 Installation of the fast lock ODUs over the OMT

• In each fast lock ODUs apply seal and lubricant grease DOW CORNING 4 on the groove of the O-
ring by protecting hands with gloves.

• Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side.

• Position the ODU body near the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the wave guide of
the OMT flange.

• Respect to the position of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° counter-clockwise
into the support and search for matching between reference tooth (4 or 5 in Fig.126, point the one
that allows the two waveguides matching) on the support and reference tooth on the ODU body.

• When alignment of the references teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until rotation is
stopped and secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (3 in Fig.126). Use 13mm spanner,
torque = 6Nm.

Repeat this procedure for the second ODU on the opposite side of the OMT.

20.7.5 Antenna aiming

For horizontal and vertical aiming see the instructions included in the antenna box (instructions vary de-
pending on antenna vendor). Remember to tighten firmly all the nuts previously loosen.

For polarization adjustment see the instructions included in the antenna box (instructions vary depending
on antenna vendor). Remember to tighten firmly all the nuts previously loosen.

20.7.6 ODU grounding

ODU grounding is achieved with:

• M8 screw without washers

• M6 screw with washer

as shown in Fig.119.

Dual pol. antenna

Pole support system

OMT OMT flange where ODU

must be installed

OMT flange where ODU

must be installed

Fig.124 - Assembled structure (DP antenna, OMT, mounting system)

214 MN.00224.E - 018

 1 Screws

Centering ring

Fig.125 - Centring ring

3
1

1
5

4 4
1

2
3

1. 6mm Allen screw

2. Bush (diagonally placed)

3. 17mm tightening bolts (max torque=6Nm)

4. Reference point

5. Reference point

Fig.126 - Fast lock ODU support

MN.00224.E - 018 215

 Screws
Standard coupling flange

O-ring

ODU ASN/ASNK

Eyelet terminal

Grounding bolt

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

Fig.127 - ODU ASN/ASNK Standard lock

216 MN.00224.E - 018

 O-ring

AS version

Fig.128 - ODU AS Fast lock

MN.00224.E - 018 217

 21 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU
WITH RFS INTEGRATED ANTENNA

21.1 FOREWORD

The installation onto the pole of the ODU with integrated antenna concerns both 1+0 and 1+1 version.

The installation of AS, ASN or ASNK ODU is the same.

Installation changes regarding the kind of ODU RF flange that can be fast locking or standard.

21.2 INSTALLATION KIT

Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions.

1+0 version

• 60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:

- centring ring and relevant screws

- pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets

- 1+0 ODU support and relevant screws

- ODU with O–ring and devices for ground connection

1+1 version

• 60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:

- centring ring and relevant screws

- pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets
- 1+0 ODU support

- hybrid and relevant screws

- polarization twist disk and relevant screws

- 2 ODUs with O–rings and devices for ground connection.

218 MN.00224.E - 018

 21.3 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

• N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench

• N.1 3 mm Allen wrench

• N.1 6 mm Allen wrench

• N.1 13 mm spanner

• N.2 17 mm spanner.

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

21.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure is listed below:

1+0 version

1. antenna polarization

2. installation of the centring ring on the antenna

3. installation of 1+0 ODU support

4. installation onto the pole of the assembled structure

5. installation of ODU

6. antenna aiming
7. ODU grounding

1+1 version

1. antenna polarization
2. installation of the centring ring on the antenna

3. installation of 1+0 ODU support

4. installation onto the pole of the assembled structure

5. installation of hybrid

6. installation of ODUs

7. antenna aiming

8. ODU grounding.

MN.00224.E - 018 219

 21.5 1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES

21.5.1 Setting antenna polarization

Fig.113 – Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the four M3 Allen screws
around the antenna flange. Unscrew them (use 2.5 mm Allen wrench) and position the antenna flange ac-
cording on: horizontal wave guide –> vertical polarization, vertical wave guide –> horizontal polariza-
tion. Screw again the four Allen screws (torque = 1 Nm).

21.5.2 Installation of the centring ring on the antenna

Fig.113 – Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the three holes around the
antenna flange. Mount the centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with the 3 Allen screws M4 (use
3mm Allen wrench, torque 2 = Nm).

21.5.3 Installation of 1+0 ODU support

Fig.113 – Mount the support onto assembled structure (pole support system plus antenna) using the four
M8 Allen screws (use 6 mm Allen wrench, torque 18 = Nm). Two of the four screws, diagonally opposed,
must be mounted with the two bushes around.

21.5.4 Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure

Fig.113 – Mount the assembled structure on the pole using the two pole fixing brackets and the four M10
screws (use 17 mm spanner, torque = 13 Nm); the heads of the screws are inserted on the antenna side,
the four nuts and the springs between nut and brackets are inserted on bracket side.

21.5.5 Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)

Fig.114 – Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 on the O–ring by protecting fingers with gloves.

Fig.115 – Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle
can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the Wave guide of the antenna: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° counter–clockwise into the support and search
for matching between reference tooth on the support (see Fig.116) and reference tooth on the ODU body.

Fig.117 – When alignment of the references teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until rotation
is stopped. In figure are shown ODU final position for both polarizations.

Fig.116 – When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 13mm
spanner, torque = 6Nm).

220 MN.00224.E - 018

 21.5.6 Antenna aiming

Antenna aiming procedure for 1+0 version or 1+1 version is the same.

Horizontal aiming: ±5° operating on the 17 mm nut shown in Fig.118 with a 17 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the two 17 mm nut on the pivot.

Vertical aiming: ±20° operating on the 13 mm nut shown in Fig.118 with a 13 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the three 13 mm nut on the pole support.

Once optimum position is obtained, tighten firmly all the nuts previously loosen.

21.5.7 ODU grounding

ODU grounding is achieved with:

• M8 screw without washers

• M6 screw with washer

as shown in Fig.119.

21.6 1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES

In further page are explained all the mounting step not already discussed in paragraph “19.5 1+0
MOUNTING PROCEDURES”.

21.6.1 Installation of Hybrid

Fig.120 – The polarization disk must be always fixed on hybrid flange. Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow
Corning 4 on the O–rings by protecting fingers with gloves. Bring the polarization twist disk with the posi-
tion marker down. Insert the O–ring into polarization twist disk.
Vertical polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards V mark.

Horizontal polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards H mark.

In 13 GHz and 15 GHz ODUs the polarization disk is fixed to the hybrid flange by means of 3 screws as
shown in Fig.121.

Tighten progressively and alternatively the screws and the spring washer with following torque:

Tab.36 - Torques for tightening screws

Frequencies Screw Tool Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm

up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 2 Nm

Fig.122 – Fix hybrid body to 1+0 support with four M8 bolts (use 13 mm spanner, torque = 18 Nm), tighten
progressively and alternatively the bolts.

MN.00224.E - 018 221

 21.6.2 Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version)

For both ODUs.

Fig.114 – Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O–ring by protecting fingers with gloves.

Fig.115 – Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle
can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the wave guide of the hybrid: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° counter–clockwise and then insert the ODU body
into the support. For 1+1 system the handle of the ODU is always positioned on the right. The polarization
twist disk on the hybrid matches the antenna polarization.

Fig.123 – When alignment of the reference teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until the rota-
tion stops. In figure are shown ODUs final position.

Fig.116 – When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 17 mm
spanner, torque = 6 Nm).

WARNING: Internal codes (e.g. installation items, antennas, PCB) are here reported only as example. The
Manufacturer reserves the right to change them without any previous advice.

222 MN.00224.E - 018

 Three 3 mm
Centering ring Allen screws
Antenna Four 13mm screws

1+0 support

Fig.129 - 1+0 pole mounting

MN.00224.E - 018 223

 Reference tooth

O-ring
ODU wave guide

"N"

"BNC"

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

Ground bolt

Fig.130 - ODU body reference tooth

Vertical Horizontal

Fig.131 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polar-
isation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.

224 MN.00224.E - 018

 2
1

1
4

3 3
1

1. 6 mm Allen screw M10

2. 17 mm Tightening bolts (max torque = 6 Nm)

3. Reference point for horizontal polarization

4. Reference point for vertical polarization

Fig.132 - 1+0 support

MN.00224.E - 018 225

 1+0 ODU with handle on the left:
vertical polarization

1+0 ODU with handle on the right:

horizontal polarization

Fig.133 - ODU housing final position for both polarization

226 MN.00224.E - 018

 Pole support

Vertical aiming
2

1
Horizontal aiming

Fig.134 - Antenna aiming

MN.00224.E - 018 227

 1
2
3

4
5
ASN version

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

AS version

1. Bolt

2. Spring washer

3. Flat washer

4. Earth cable collar

5. Flat washer

Fig.135 - ODU grounding

228 MN.00224.E - 018

 7

2
4
6

1. O–ring
2. Polarization twist disk

3. Hybrid mechanical body

4. Position marker of twist disk

5. Reference label for twist disk

6. O–ring

7. Allen screws

8. Spring washer

Fig.136 - Hybrid and twist disk

MN.00224.E - 018 229

 Horizontal polarization

Vertical polarization

Fig.137 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz)

230 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.138 - Hybrid installation

MN.00224.E - 018 231

 AS version

ASN version

Fig.139 - 1+1 ODUs installation

232 MN.00224.E - 018

 22 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF ODU ASN/
ASNK WITH STANDARD LOCK

22.1 ODU COUPLING KIT

Two versions of ODU can be connected to ALplus2/ALCplus2 IDU: ODU AS and ODU ASN/ASNK. Both ver-
sions need to be completed with a coupling kit to be connected to the mechanical structure for the instal-
lation.

22.1.1 ODU AS

ODU AS is factory assembled with a “Fast Lock” coupling kit (see Fig.140); for the installation it needs O-
ring and grounding bolt only.

22.1.2 ODU ASN/ASNK

ODU ASN/ASNK can mount two different coupling kits in order to obtain a Fast Lock ASN/ASNK or a Stand-
ard ASN/ASNK. After having mounted the proper coupling kit the ODU needs O-ring and grounding bolt.

22.1.2.1 Fast lock coupling kit

The Fast Lock coupling kit is the same used in ODU AS and so after kit, O-ring and grounding bolt assembly,
the ASN/ASNK Fast Lock can be installed in the same way of ODU AS.

Coupling kit assembly procedure

See Fig.141 - Put the Fast Lock coupling kit on the ODU.

Align the four holes of the coupling kit with the four nut screws on the ODU. Insert and tighten the four
screws.

22.1.2.2 Standard coupling kit

The standard coupling kit is mounted on ASN/ASNK ODU by means of four screws.

Coupling kit assembly procedure

See Fig.142 - Put the standard coupling kit on the ODU.

MN.00224.E - 018 233

 Align the four holes of the coupling kit with the four nut screws on the ODU. Insert and tighten the four
screws.

22.2 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRAT-

ED ANTENNA

22.2.1 ODU AS and ODU ASN/ASNK (Fast Lock)

The installation of ODUs with Fast Lock coupling kit is described in previous chapters.

22.2.2 ODU ASN/ASNK (Standard Lock)

Mounting kit 1+0 version

• Centring ring and relevant screws

• M10 bolts

• ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection

Mounting kit 1+1 version

• Centring ring and relevant screws

• M10 bolts for hybrid and ODU mounting

• Hybrid mechanical body

• Polarization twist disk (see Fig.145)

• 2 ODUs with O-rings and devices for ground connection.

22.2.2.1 1+0 ODU

Install the antenna using the antenna installation guide (specific for each antenna) inside the antenna box
provided by antenna producer. Keep attention to the polarization of the antenna feeder depending on re-
quested polarization.

After the antenna is installed onto the pole, the ODU must be installed, see Fig.143.

• Position the three holes circular flange (1) on the antenna flange and align the three holes on the
circular flange with the three relevant holes on the antenna flange

• Insert and tighten the three 3mm M4 Allen screws (2) using a 3mm Allen wrench (torque = 2 Nm)
• Add lubricant paste, e.g. MOLYKOTE P-40, on threads of four 25mm bolts (3). The sliding surfaces
should be cleaned. The paste should then be applied with a suitable brush, rag or grease gun. It
should not be mixed with grease or oils. Chemical protective gloves should be worn where repeated
or prolonged contact can occur.

234 MN.00224.E - 018

 • Screw partially the four M10 bolts (3) on the antenna back plate: each bolt should be tightened to
have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14mm (the thickness of hook (4), use 15mm span-
ner)

• Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves, and
insert in the proper track on the ODU flange

• Position the ODU (5) vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna feeder:

- vertical polarization: the handle (6) of the ODU is at the bottom left corner

- horizontal polarization: the handle (6) of the ODU is at the bottom right corner

• After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach the
ODU to the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the
four bolts

• Rotate 30° clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

• When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15mm spanner,
torque=46mm)

• Optional: sun cover kit - Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

• The ODU is ready to be connected to the IDU-ODU cable and to the grounding cable.

22.2.2.2 1+1 ODU

Install The antenna using the antenna installation guide (specific for each antenna) inside the antenna box
by antenna producer. Keep attention to the polarization of the antenna feeder depending on requested po-
larization.
After the antenna is installed onto the pole, follow the procedure below, see Fig.144.

Mounting the hybrid (3) on the back of the antenna:

• Position the three holes circular flange (1) on the antenna flange and align the holes on the circular
flange with the relevant holes on the antenna flange

• Insert and tighten the three 3mm M4 Allen screws (2) using a 3mm Allen wrench (torque = 2mm)

• Prepare the polarization disk (see Fig.145) with the two O-rings: seal and lubricant grease Dow
Corning 4 must be applied to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves; each O-ring must be insert-
ed in the proper track on each surface of the disk

• Mount always (with vertical and with horizontal polarization) the polarization disk on the hybrid
flange (antenna side) as shown in Fig.145 and tighten the four screws (only three screws in 13 GHz
and 15 GHz hybrid). The polarization disk must br oriented depending on requested polarization by
antenna feeder (position V or H as shown in Fig.145. Torque values as in 22.3.2.2.

Tab.37 - Torques for tightening screws

Frequencies Screw Tool Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm

up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 1 Nm

• Mount the hybrid on the back of the antenna by means of four M10 bolts (4) (torque = 46 Nm)

Mounting each ODU on the hybrid:

• Add lubricant paste, e.g. MOLYKOTE P-40, on threads of four 25mm bolts (3). The sliding surfaces
should be cleaned. The paste should then be applied with a suitable brush, rag or grease gun. It
should not be mixed with grease or oils. Chemical protective gloves should be worn where repeated
or prolonged contact can occur.

• Screw partially four M10 bolts (4) on the hybrid flange (ODU side): each bolt should be tightened
to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm, use 15 mm spanner

MN.00224.E - 018 235

 • Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves, and
insert in the proper track on the ODU flange

• Position the ODU (5) vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna feeder: horizontal polarization must be used, the handle (6) of the
ODU is at the bottom right corner

• After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach the
ODU to the antenna flange in order to have the four slots (7) of the Standard Lock cross between
the four bolts on the hybrid

• Rotate 30° clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

• When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15 mm spanner, torque
= 46Nm)

• Optional: sun cover kit - Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

• Now the ODU is ready to be connected to the IDU-ODU cable and to the grounding cable
• Repeat for the other ODU on the other side

• Optional: sun cover kit. Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

• Now the ODU is ready to be connected to the IDU-ODU cable and to the grounding cable.

22.3 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARAT-

ED ANTENNA

• Diameter of the pole 60-114 mm

22.3.1 ODU AS, ASN and ASNK (Fast Lock)

The installation of ODUs with Fast Lock coupling kit is described in previous chapters.

22.3.2 ODU ASN and ASNK (Standard Lock)

Mounting kit 1+0 version

• Supporting plate, fixing bracket with M10 130mm bolts (with washer, spring and nut)

• 1 antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency, with relevant screws

• M10 25mm bolts for ODU mounting

• ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection

Mounting kit 1+1 version

• Supporting plate, fixing bracket with M10 130mm bolts (with washer, spring and nut)

• M10 25mm bolts for hybrid and ODUs mounting

236 MN.00224.E - 018

 • Hybrid mechanical body

• Polarization twist disk (see Fig.145)

• 2 ODUs with O-rings and devices for ground connection.

22.3.2.1 1+0 ODU

See Fig.146.

• Position the supporting plate (1) on the pole and fix the rear bracket (2) to it by means of the four
130 mm M10 bolt (3) with relevant washers, springs and nuts (use 15mm spanner, torque =
46Nm).

• Fix the antenna side flange (4) with the proper screws (in Fig.146 the antenna flange is shown in
two different positions depending on the polarization), the screw holes side is the side where the
waveguide must be installed.

• Add lubricant paste, e.g. MOLYKOTE P-40, on threads of four 25mm bolts (3). The sliding surfaces
should be cleaned. The paste should then be applied with a suitable brush, rag or grease gun. It
should not be mixed with grease or oils. Chemical protective gloves should be worn where repeated
or prolonged contact can occur.

• On the supporting plate, on the opposite side respect to the antenna flange just mounted, insert in
holes (5) on the supporting plate the four 25mm M10 bolts (3): screw them partially, each bolt
should be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm (the thickness of
hook (4), use 15mm spanner).
• Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves, and
insert it in the proper track on the ODU flange.

• Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the supporting plate and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna flange:

- vertical polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom left corner

- horizontal polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom right corner
• After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach the
ODU to the supporting plate in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the
four bolts

• Rotate 30° clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

• When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15 mm spanner, torque
=46 Nm).

22.3.2.2 1+1 ODU

See Fig.147.

• Position the supporting plate (1) on the pole and fix the rear bracket (2) to it by means of the four
130 mm M10 bolt (3) with relevant washers, springs and nuts (use 15 mm spanner, torque = 46
Nm)

• Mount the hybrid (4) on the back of the antenna by means of four 25 mm M10 bolts (5) (use 15
mm spanner with torque = 46 Nm) in the holes (6).
Mounting each ODU on the hybrid:

• Add lubricant paste, e.g. MOLYKOTE P-40, on threads of four 25mm bolts (3). The sliding surfaces
should be cleaned. The paste should then be applied with a suitable brush, rag or grease gun. It
should not be mixed with grease or oils. Chemical protective gloves should be worn where repeated
or prolonged contact can occur.

• Screw partially four 25 mm M10 bolts positioning them in the holes (7) on the hybrid flange (ODU
side): each bolt should be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm,
use 15 mm spanner

• Apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 to the O-ring, protecting fingers with gloves, and
insert in the proper track on the ODU flange

MN.00224.E - 018 237

 • Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna feeder: horizontal polarization must be used, the handle of the ODU
is at the bottom right corner

• After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach it to
the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the four bolts
on the hybrid

• Rotate 30° clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

• When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15 mm spanner, torque
= 46 Nm)

• Optional: sun cover kit - insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

• Now the ODU is ready to be connected to the IDU-ODU cable and to the grounding cable

• Repeat for the other ODU on the other side

238 MN.00224.E - 018

 22.3.2.3 Waveguide towards the antenna

After having installed the ODU in 1+0 configuration or in 1+1 configuration, the waveguide towards the
antenna must be installed.

• 1+0: the waveguide must be fixed to the antenna flange on the supporting plate of the ODU. In
case of flexible waveguides, an excessive folding can damage the waveguide, see Tab.38 for details.

• 1+1: the waveguide must be fixed to the hybrid. In case of flexible waveguides, an excessive folding
can damage the waveguide, see Tab.38 for details.

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm.

Tab.38 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency

Bending radius with- Bending radius with- Bending radius with Bending radius with
out rebending out rebending rebending rebending
Frequency
mm (inch) mm (inch) mm (inch) mm (inch)
E-plane a H-plane b E-plane a. H-plane b.

6 GHz or 7 GHz
200 (7,9) 500 (19,8) 300 (11,9) 600 (23,7)
low

7 GHz high 200 (7,9) 500 (19,8) 250 (9,9) 600 (23,7)

11 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

13 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

15 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

18 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

23 GHz 110 (4,3) 230 (9,1) 130 (5,1) 250 (9,9)

38 GHz 80 (3,1) 140 (5,5) 90 (3,6) 150 (5,9)

a. Bending E-plane

Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
(short side of the section)

b. Bending H-plane

Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
(long side of the section)

MN.00224.E - 018 239

 O-ring

ODU AS

Eyelet terminal

Grounding bolt

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

Fig.140 - AS and ASN/ASNK ODUs

240 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fast lock coupling flange

Screws

O-ring

ODU ASN

Eyelet terminal
Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

Grounding bolt

Fig.141 - ODU ASN/ASNK with fast lock coupling flange

MN.00224.E - 018 241

 Screws
Standard coupling flange

O-ring

ODU ASN

Eyelet terminal

Grounding bolt

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm

Fig.142 - ODU ASN/ASNK with standard coupling flange

242 MN.00224.E - 018

 5
3 (Torque 46Nm)

4
M10

2 (Torque 2Nm)

Fig.143 - 1+0 ODU installation

MN.00224.E - 018 243

 4
5

7
3
4

6
1

Fig.144 - 1+1 ODU installation

244 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.145 - Polarization disk

114-60
3

Fig.146 - 1+0 antenna flange

MN.00224.E - 018 245

 7
4
3
1

5
2

Fig.147 - 1+1 antenna flange

246 MN.00224.E - 018

 23 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF 8+0 ODU
WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA

23.1 GENERALS

To install the ODUs of 8+0 system you need the following components:

• diameter of the pole: 60-114 mm

• V60100-1 ASN support kit (60-114)

• 2x V60361 4+0 7GHz Multichannel support

• 8x ASN 7GHz Single channel ODU

• 8x V60049-10 kit with 4 M10 screws and O-ring

• 2 x same length flexible waveguide

• dual Polarization High XPD Antenna with pole support

The 8 IDU-ODU coax cables plus tail must have the same length with a tolerance of 1.5 m.

23.2 N+0

See Fig.148.

• Position the supporting plate (1) on the pole and fix the rear bracket (2) to it by means of the four
130 mm M10 bolt (3) with relevant washers, springs and nuts (use 15 mm spanner, torque = 46
Nm)

See Fig.149.

• Mount the multichannel support (4) on the back of the supporting plate (1) by means of four 25
mm M10 bolts (5) (use 15 mm spanner with torque = 46 Nm) in the holes (6).

See Fig.149 and Fig.150.

Mounting each ODU on the multichannel support:

• Add lubricant paste, e.g. MOLYKOTE P-40, on threads of four 25mm M10 bolts (8). The sliding sur-
face should be cleaned. The paste should then be applied with a suitable brush, rag or grease gun.
It should not be mixed with grease or oils. Chemical protective gloves should be worn where re-
peated or prolonged contact can occur. Screw partially four 25 mm M10 bolts (8) positioning them
in the holes (7) on the multichannel support (ODU side): each bolt should be tightened to have the
square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm, use 15 mm spanner (9)

See Fig.151.

• Install ODUs frequency according frequency organization into SLOTs

• Apply silicon grease e.g. DOW CORNING 4 to the O-ring (10) and insert in the proper track on the
ODU flange

MN.00224.E - 018 247

 • Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the multichannel feeder: vertical polarization must be used, the handle of the
ODU is at the bottom left corner

• After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach it to
the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the four bolts
on the hybrid

• Rotate 30° clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt

• When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15 mm spanner, torque
= 46 Nm)

• Optional: sun cover kit - insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the ODU handle by
means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit

• Now the ODU is ready to be connected to the IDU-ODU cable and to the grounding cable

• Repeat for the other ODUs

Waveguides towards the antenna

See Fig.153.

After having installed the ODU in 8+0 configuration, the waveguides towards the antenna must be in-
stalled. The waveguides must be fixed to the antenna flange and on the two multichannel support. An ex-
cessive folding can damage the waveguide, see Tab.39 for details.

See Fig.152.

On optional kit V60366 must be installed onto Multichannel support port where ODU are not installed be-
cause of maintenance or because of N+0 less than 8+0 (e.g. 7+0).

See Fig.154 and Fig.155.

On Fig.155 measures are displayed in mm.

248 MN.00224.E - 018

 GROUNDING

The ODUs must be grounded as per Fig.150.

Coupling torque for the grounding bolt is 9.5 Nm.

Tab.39 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency

Bending radius with- Bending radius with- Bending radius with Bending radius with
out rebending out rebending rebending rebending
Frequency
mm (inch) mm (inch) mm (inch) mm (inch)
E-plane a H-plane b E-plane a. H-plane b.

6 GHz or 7 GHz
200 (7,9) 500 (19,8) 300 (11,9) 600 (23,7)
low

7 GHz high 200 (7,9) 500 (19,8) 250 (9,9) 600 (23,7)

11 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

13 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

15 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

18 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

23 GHz 110 (4,3) 230 (9,1) 130 (5,1) 250 (9,9)

38 GHz 80 (3,1) 140 (5,5) 90 (3,6) 150 (5,9)

a. Bending E-plane

Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
(short side of the section)

b. Bending H-plane

Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
(long side of the section)

MN.00224.E - 018 249

 1

3
2

Fig.148 - 1+1 ASN support kit (60-114) code V60100-01

250 MN.00224.E - 018

 5

Fig.149 - 7GHz multichannel support, code V60361

MN.00224.E - 018 251

 9

Fig.150 - ODU with screws and O-ring from code V60049-10

252 MN.00224.E - 018

 Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 4

10

Slot 3

Fig.151 - Mounting ODUs onto multichannel support

MN.00224.E - 018 253

 Fig.152 - Mounting multichannel short V60366 onto multichannel support

254 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.153 - Mounting flexible waveguides from antenna to multichannel support

MN.00224.E - 018 255

 Fig.154 - 8+0 layout

256 MN.00224.E - 018

 1009
1494 751 258
406 433 646

636
350

1264
Ø 1310
300

599
R482
Ø 114 315

433

839
Ø 1262

R1291
100

105

Fig.155 - 8+0 layout and measures in mm

MN.00224.E - 018 257

258 MN.00224.E - 018
 Section 4.
LINE-UP

24 LINE–UP OF THE RADIO HOP

24.1 LINE–UP OF THE RADIO HOP

The line–up consists of the following steps:

• on site radio terminal installation (user connections and ODU installation as described in the rele-
vant chapters)

• equipment switch–on

• equipment configuration (through PC software)

• antenna alignment for maximum received RF signal level

• network element configuration

• check measurements.

Equipment installation is described in Section 3. INSTALLATION.

24.1.1 Equipment configuration

In order to have the link working properly, in the local and remote equipment the same parameters have
to be set:

• system layout (1+0, 1+1 hot stand-by, 1+1 frequency diversity.....) (Equipment - Configuration)

• ACM Engine (Equipment - Modulation&Capacity): during Line-up “ACM Engine” must be disable

• Bandwidth&Modulation (Equipment - Modulation&Capacity): during Line-up set the reference

Mod&Cap

• link ID (Equipment - General)

• RF channel (Equipment-Radio-Radio Branch1A/2A-Tx Frequency Selector)

MN.00224.E - 018 259

 The software to run is Web LCT Console and Web LCT on Internet Explorer with Flash player.

You can download Web Lct Console program and Flash Player from http://www.siaemic.com.

Traffic (Baseband - Tributary)

Used tributaries must be enabled on local and on remote equipment.

24.1.2 Antenna alignment and received field measurement

Purpose of antenna alignment is to maximize the RF received signal level.

Proceed as follows:

• connect a multimeter to BNC connector on the ODU for AGC measurement

• adjust antenna pointing as soon as the maximum AGC voltage value is achieved.

The relationship between AGC voltage and received field is shown by Fig.156.

The received field level has a tolerance of ±4 dB in the full temperature range.

24.1.3 Network element configuration

A factory default address is assigned to each network element that must normally be reconfigurated on
site following the network administrator rules.

For this purpose it is required to connect the PC, where the WEB LCT program has been installed, to the
network interfaces: this has to be done via USB cable or Ethernet cable.

Warning: the checks that follow require the knowledge of the program use.

Run the program and perform the connection to equipment by choosing from menu “Option” the connec-
tion made via USB cable.

Perform the login to the equipment by entering:

4
• Equipment IP address

• User ID (default: SYSTEM)

• Password: (default: siaemicr)

Proceed to program what above mentioned following this path:

• IP Address: select Port Configuration. Enter the required port addresses in the available communi-
cation ports.

• Routing Table and Default Gateway: select Routing table: add the routes and default gateway if nec-
essary.
Warning: the routing policy depends on the routing type: static IP/OSPF/IS–IS. The relevant routing
rules must be normally given by network administrator.

• Remote Element Table: select Remote Element Table. Add station name. Add local equipment IP
address, add remote equipment IP address selecting Remote Link.

• Agent IP Address: select Equipment Properties. Assign the address in accordance to the address of
Ethernet port.

4 If the connection is made via USB cable, the IP address is automatically achieved.

260 MN.00224.E - 018

 24.1.4 Few considerations about addresses

Here are listed few observation to follow during the address/netmask setup:

1. PPP connection (RS232 and LCT ports) - PC address can be selected among:

a. Ethernet port address +1

b. broadcast address -1

c. a given address.
For a correct management, solutions b) and c) must be different than Ethernet port address.

2. PPP connection (RS232 and LCT ports) - if Unnumbered is used, the netmask relevant RS232 and
LCT ports must be equal or wider than the Ethernet port netmask

3. PPP connection (RS232 and LCT ports) - never assign network addresses to RS232 or LCT ports
(check that they are hosts).

24.1.5 Radio checks

It is advisable to perform the following measurements to check the correct operation of the radio hop:
• transmitted power

• received power

• RF frequency
• S/N measurement

All these checks make use of the WLC program.

• Transmitted power, received RF level, RF frequency

- run WLC program and then perform the connection to the equipment you want to check.

- on top of the window Tx/Rx power and frequency values are displayed. In case of Tx power and
frequency setup proceed to Branch 1/2 and Power/Frequencies submenus.
• S/N measurement

- Run WLC program and then perform the connection to the equipment you want to check.

- On the left side select S/N meas. 1 or S/N meas.2

In alternative it is possible to use the PRBS function if one or 2 Mbit/s line is free.

- Perform the S/N measurement and check that values comply with the requirements.

24.1.6 ACM setting

In order to enable the ACM features in the radio links, the following parameters must be set on both ends
just to have the same configuration.

ACM parameters can be set in WEB LCT in Modulation and Capacity card in the window.

• Mod.Cap/LinkID in case of ALplus2 and ALCplus2

• BW&Mod/LinkID in case of ALCplus2e

ACM engine

• Enabled - the link uses different ACM profiles

• Disabled - the link uses the reference modulation only

MN.00224.E - 018 261

 The ACM can vary modulation profiles between two extremes defined by the operator through software
configuration:

• Upper modulation: when propagation, into the given radio channel is in the better condition (high
Rx S/N), the radio link is working at the maximum throughput defined at Upper Modulation: the
highest modulation profile that ACM can employ

• Lower modulation: when propagation into the given radio channel is in the worst condition (low Rx
S/N), the radio link is working at the minimum throughput, defined at Lower Modulation: the lowest
modulation profile that ACM can employ

Reference Modulation defines the spectrum mask of the Tx signal.

When more then one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected reference modu-
lation (i.e.: 4QAM and 4QAM strong), the maximum throughput profile will be automatically selected (i.e.:
4QAM).

About lower modulation

When more than one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected lower modulation
(i.e: 4QAM and 4QAM strong), the minimum throughput profile will be automatically included (i.e.: 4QAM
strong).

About upper modulation

When more than ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected upper modulation (i.e.:
4QAM and 4QAM strong), the maximum throughput profile will be automatically included (i.e.: 4QAM).

Tx Power Constant Peak mode (ALplus2 and ALCplus2)

Tx Power Ramp Up To (ALCplus2e)

• Enabled - The Tx power is the maximum allowed in each modulation profile (only if “reference mod-
ulation” is equal to “lower modulation”)

• Disabled - The link uses the same Tx power in each profile (Tx power is the Tx power at “upper
modulation”)

Bandwidth and Modulation

• Transmitted channel bandwidth

• Reference modulation, with ACM enabled, or used modulation, with ACM disabled

Permanent TDM

Number of TDM (E1 streams) always transmitted.

Extra TDM

Number of TDM (E1 streams) transmitted besides the permanent TDM, in each ACM profile. In case of Extra
TDM usage, in the Extra TDM Priority card is present the list of which extra TDMs are transmitted.

262 MN.00224.E - 018

 V

2,625

2,25

1,875

1,5

1,125

0,75

0 dBm

-100 -80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20

Fig.156 - Detected voltage versus RF received signal

24.2 RADIO LINK MANAGEMENT

The parameters necessary to define the management of the radio link are set via WEBLCT through a web
browser (IE, Firefox, Chrome,…) with a page opened at the unit address

A PC can be connected to ALCplus2e IDU in the following modes:

• via Ethernet cable to port MNGT 1 or 2 (out of band management, factory default mode). Default
addresses are 172.20.255.15 or 172.20.254.14, netmask is 255.255.255.0. PC and connected unit
must be in the same subnet

• via Ethernet cable to port LAN1,2,3 or 4 (in band management). PC and connected unit must be in
the same subnet

• via USB cable and WEB LCT Console to port LCT. This connection needs no address.

The necessary parameters, in local side and remote side, in order to manage the radio link are the follow-
ing:
• Agent IP Address, equal to Ethernet port Address (Equipment Properties window, General Info card)

MN.00224.E - 018 263

 • Ethernet port address and relevant subnet mask (Port Configuration and ACL window, Ethernet
card, see Fig.157). This parameter needs a double step confirm: set the proper address/netmask
push Apply and confirm, push Store and confirm.

• Radio IP Address (Port Configuration and ACL window, Radio card see Fig.158). Push “IP Unnum-
bered” button if the IDU needs only one address: the Ethernet port address. This parameter needs
a double step confirm: set the proper address/netmask push Apply and confirm, push Store and
confirm. This port is available in Out of Band management only
• Remote Element List: the IDU has a list with the local IDU Agent IP (declared Managed By SCT) and
remote IDU Agent IP (declared Remote Link) contained in a folder (Station)

Radio link management can be set in Out of Band or In Band mode.

Fig.157 – Ethernet port setting

24.2.1 Out of Band management

In Out of Band the management channel is separated from traffic and, on radio side, is in a specific OOB
channel (or EOC – Embedded Operating Channel, 128Kb)

Ethernet port MNGT 1 and/or MNGT 2 can be set in the following modes (MNGT VLan Tagging field, see
Fig.157):

• Disable – the port can accept untagged input

• Enable – the port can accept untagged input or tagged (the VLAN tag is set in “VLan ID”, 0 not ac-
cepted)

• Enable Secure- the port accepts tagged input only (the VLAN tag is set in “VLan ID”, 0 not accepted)

The Radio PPP Mode can be set in three different modes (see Fig.158):

• Client - If local and remote units are in different subnet, Client must be set on both sides

• Server - EOC channel is off. If local and remote units are both managed through Ethernet port,
Server must be set on both sides

• Bridge - If local and remote units are in the same subnet, Bridge must be set on both sides

264 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.158 – Radio port setting

24.2.2 In Band management

Management channel is separated by traffic by means of a dedicated VLAN (In Band Management field in
Fig.157).

This mode can be used in a radio link with local and remote units in the same subnet.

In order to enable the In Band mode is necessary:

• mark all the LAN ports involved in the passage of the management VLAN (LAN 1, 2, 3, 4 or the radio
port A)

• set the VLAN ID used for management VLAN. This VLAN is created automatically and cannot be used
by traffic or other

• the ports involved in In Band management must be set in Fallback (via WEBLCT, Base Band, LAN 1
or 2 or 3 or 4 or Port A, 802.1Q card and 802.1q Setting field)

Example: management network is connected to local unit with port LAN1 and through the radio arrives to
remote unit. The ports to be selected for the in band are the following:

• local IDU: LAN 1 and Port A

• remote IDU: Port A and all the ports connected to other units just to transmit the management
VLAN

In Band management and MNGT ports

The selection of the traffic ports (LAN 1, 2, 3, 4, port A) for In Band management disables the OOB (128
Kb EOC channel) through the radio towards the remote unit but leaves enabled the ports MNGT 1 and 2
that can be used for the Out of Band access of local unit only.

24.3 MULTIPLE LINK MANAGEMENT

A group of IDUs, or more radio links, can be managed in Out of Band or In Band mode.

MN.00224.E - 018 265

 24.3.1 Chain of radio links

A chain of radio links can be managed in Out of Band or In Band mode.

Out of Band management of links in cascade

Two situations can occur:

• all the units are in the same subnet: the Radio PPP Mode of each Radio port must be set in Bridge.
Management is transmitted through the 128Kb OOB (or EOC) channel.

• in each radio link the local unit (closer to management PC) and the remote unit are in different sub-
net: the Radio PPP Mode of each Radio port (local and remote) must be set in Client. From the first
unit closer to the PC up to the penultimate, the Routing tables must be configured in order to allow
the management to arrive to the last IDU, while the opposite direction is available using properly
the Default Gateway of each unit. Management is transmitted through the 128Kb OOB (or EOC)
channel.

In band management of links in cascade

All the units must be in the same subnet.

Exactly as in the single radio link, unit by unit, using the WEBLCT in Port Configuration & ACM, Ethernet
card, In Band Management field (see Fig.157):

• select all the ports involved in the passage of management VLAN (LAN 1, 2, 3, 4 and Port A)

• set the VLAN ID used for management VLAN. This VLAN is created automatically and cannot be used
by traffic or other
• set the ports involved in In Band management in Fallback (via WEBLCT, Base Band, LAN 1 or 2 or
3 or 4 or Port A, 802.1Q card and 802.1q Setting field)

24.3.2 Node

A Node is a group of IDUs, up to 8, connected together by means of LAN1 and LAN2 ports, if the Node
involves Ethernet traffic, and/or NB connectors, if the node involves E1 transmission from an IDU to an-
other of the same node.

Node management can be obtained in Out of Band or In Band mode, in any case all the IDUs of the node
must be in the same subnet.

Out of Band management of a node

All the IDUs are connected together by means of a cascade of Ethernet cables between ports MNGT 1 and
2: port MNGT 1 is connected to port MNGT 2 of the adjacent IDU and so on. The port MNGT 1 of the last
IDU of the node remains not used while the port MNGT 2 port of the first IDU is connected to management
PC/network.

In Band management of a node

All the IDUs are connected together by means of ports LAN 1 and LAN 2: ports LAN 2 of an IDU is connected
to port LAN 1 of the adjacent IDU. The port LAN 1 of the last IDU must be connected to port LAN 2 of the
first IDU. The Ethernet loop is avoided by means of an internal protection protocol.

In each IDU (see Fig.157) in Ethernet card, In Band Management field, the following operations must be
performed:

• select ports LAN 1 and LAN 2 and, if the IDU has a remote unit (the eventual remote unit must be
in the same subnet), port A also (and, in remote unit, the remote port A).

266 MN.00224.E - 018

 • set the VLAN ID used for management VLAN. This VLAN is created automatically and cannot be used
by traffic or other

• set the ports involved in In Band management in Fallback (via WEBLCT, Base Band, LAN 1 and 2
and Port A, 802.1Q card and 802.1q Setting field)

The node is connected to management network/PC by means of the remaining ports LAN 3 or LAN 4 (also
this port must be selected) or MNGT 1 or 2.

MN.00224.E - 018 267

 25 BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION
WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF MODIFYING THE PA-
RAMETERS

25.1 SCOPE

This chapter describes the procedure to back up the full equipment configuration. This permits to recover
the original equipment configuration in case of faulty CONTROLLER module replacement with spare.

25.2 CONFIGURATION UPLOAD AND DOWNLOAD USING SCT

25.2.1 Configuration upload

Foreword: it is advisable to backup the configuration after the first installation. Proceed as follows:

1. Select “Equipment Configuration Wizard” from menu “Tools”; “Equipment Configuration Wi-
zard” window will be displayed.

2. Select “Upload” and then “Backup Full Equipment Configuration”; “Template Selection” win-
dow will be displayed.

3. Select the correct equipment template (in case of uncorrected choice the backup will be aborted).
4. Press OK and then select the equipment to be uploaded from “Upload Configuration File” window.

5. Press OK and then edit the file name from “Save backup as” window.

6. Press Save; “Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete Backup” window will appear.
The window shows dynamically the backup procedure. If everything is OK, at the end of the upload
will appear the word “done” showing the procedure success.

7. Press OK to finish.

25.2.2 Configuration download

Once the spare controller has been installed, or every time you need the primitive configuration, proceed
as follows:

1. Select “Equipment Configuration Wizard” from menu “Tools”. “Equipment Configuration Wizard”
window will be displayed.
2. Select “Download” and than “Restore Full Equipment Configuration” from Equipment Configu-
ration Wizard. “Select Backup File” window will be displayed.

3. Select the wanted backup file with extension .bku and then press Open. “Download Configuration
File” window will be displayed.

268 MN.00224.E - 018

 4. Select the equipment to download and then press OK; “Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete
restore” window will be displayed. This window shows dynamically the download operation. The
word “done” indicates that download has been successfully.

5. Press OK to finish.

Warning: In case of EOC alarm proceed to restart the equipment.

25.3 CONFIGURATION UPLOAD AND DOWNLOAD USING WEBLCT

25.3.1 Configuration upload

Foreword: it is advisable to backup the configuration after the first installation. Proceed as follows:

1. select “Backup/Restore Configuration” in the “Main menu”

2. in the field “Backup File name” write the name of the configuration file you are going to upload in
the PC, complete with the full path of its folder
3. push Backup. The status of the backup procedure is shown in the “Operation Status” field.

25.3.2 Configuration download

Once the spare Controller has been installed or every time the saved configuration is necessary, proceed
as follow:

1. select “Backup/Restore Configuration” in the “Main menu”

2. select “Browse local system” in order to locate the configuration file you need and push Open when
it has been found
3. Push Restore. The status of the backup procedure is shown in the “operation Status” field. During
Restore operation the equipment creates a backup configuration, you can come back to this config-
uration at the end of the restore pushing Revert.

25.3.3 SD Memory card

A SD card slot is available on the ALplus2 Controller module (on the board) or on the front panel of
ALCplus2.

Using a SD memory card is possible to perform an auto restore of Configuration and of Equipment Firmware
every time a mismatch between running ones and saved occurs.

1. remove the screws of the SD cover

2. insert the SD into the slot

3. select “SD Memory Management” in the “Main menu”

4. in the “Actions” field select the operation you want to perform (......”Enable automatic restore (all)”
for example)

5. select Execute

6. remove SD

7. close the cover and tighten the screws.

MN.00224.E - 018 269

 26 LINE-UP FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC

26.1 LAN SETUP

This paragraph deals with line-up of ALplus2 LIM Ethernet and ALCplus2/ALCplus2e IDU with details of WEB
LCT program related only to Ethernet application.

Differences among the IDUs are pointed out.

Main difference is the number of LAN ports: three in ALplus2 and four in ALCplus2/ALCplus2e, moreover
in ALplus2 the LAN2 port can manage POE functionality besides in ALCplus2/ALCplus2e Sync Signal can be
taken from LAN ports also (see relevant paragraph).

Assuming that the radio link is already in service, with correct frequency, output power and correct antenna
alignment, the line up procedure for two different kinds of connection set up of a radio link ALplus2,
equipped with LIM module with Ethernet ports, is hereafter described:

• Local Lan-1 port to remote Lan-1 port connection Lan per port, see Fig.159

• from 3 ports to 3 ports connections and segregated traffic for Untagged Traffic, see Fig.167

• from 3 ports to 3 ports connections and segregated traffic for Tagged and Untagged Traffic, see
Fig.177.

Settings here below are intended to be done both into local and remote radio equipment. The software to
be used to configure the equipment is WEB LCT. In the following chapter the figures used as example can
differ in the position of main commands depending on WEB LCT release.

26.2 LOCAL LAN-1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN-1 PORT TRANSPARENT

CONNECTION LAN PER PORT

Settings for Untagged and Tagged Traffic

switch switch

Lan-1 port 1 port 1 Lan-1

Lan-2 AL AL Lan-2
radio radio
Lan-3 Lan-3

Nx2 Nx2
Mbit/s Mbit/s
Local Remote

Fig.159 - Local Lan-1 port to remote Lan-1 port connection

The first example is local Lan1 port to remote Lan1 port transparent connection for tagged and untagged
traffic please refer to Fig.159.

270 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.160 - Modulation and capacity

Select 1+0 or 1+1 configuration according system requirements.

Please refer to Fig.160. First selection is channel bandwidth and modulation, in this example we selected
28MHz and 16QAM.

ACM Engine, Upper Modulation, Lower Modulation, Permanent Traffic and extra TDM Capacity at any mod-
ulation must be the same local and remote.

The throughput at any modulation with 28 MHz bandwidth is shown in Fig.161 with View Current Config
button of Fig.160.

Fig.161 - View Current Configuration

So with 4QAMstrong modulation the Ethernet capacity is 20 Mbit/s and with 256QAM modulation the Ether-
net capacity is 140 Mbit/s.

MN.00224.E - 018 271

 Fig.162 - Switch general settings

See Fig.162 for general settings of the switch. All the used ports must be Enabled, so enable Lan-1 and
Internal Port A, see Fig.163.

Please notice the MAC Address Aging Time reduced, only for this test at 15 sec.

The other ports should be disabled. The correct cable crossover arrangement must be selected too (see
Fig.163). Enable LLF, if needed, only at the end of link line up.

Select Master or Slave Role for 1000BaseT interface.

Switch connections are done with Lan per port selections. Referring to Fig.164, incoming traffic at Lan-1
exits at internal Port A and as in Fig.165 and in Fig.166 incoming traffic at internal Port A exits at Lan-1
port. This connection are done for all Untagged packets and all Tagged packets with Vlan Id not described
into Vlan Configuration Table.

If Vlan Configuration Table is blank all Tagged traffic follows the rules of Lan per port.

Possible selections of Ingress Filtering Check:

• "Disable 802.1q": no check of Virtual Lan tag is done and all packets follow Lan per port settings

• "Fallback": if Tagged packets have their Vlan Id into Vlan Configuration Table they follow the con-
nection described into the table, otherwise they follow the Lan per port settings as Untagged pack-
ets

• "Secure": no Untagged packet transits; only Tagged packets with Vlan Id listed into the table can
transit.

For all previous configuration "Disable 802.1" should be selected. With Egress Mode as Unmodified the out-
going packets at Lan-1 port exit Untagged or Tagged exactly as they were Untagged or Tagged at the in-
coming port.

272 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.163 - Lan-1 interface settings

Fig.164- Vlan settings for LAN-1

MN.00224.E - 018 273

 Fig.165 - Vlan settings for Port A

Fig.166 - Priority setting for Lan-1 and Port A

274 MN.00224.E - 018

 26.3 FROM 3 PORT TO 3 PORT CONNECTIONS

Settings for Untagged traffic.

switch switch

Lan-1 port 1 port 1 Lan-1

Lan-2 AL AL Lan-2
radio radio
Lan-3 Lan-3

Nx2 Nx2
Mbit/s Mbit/s
Local Remote

Fig.167 - 3 ports to 3 ports connections with segregated traffic

In this example 3 local port must communicate with corresponding 3 remote ports. All the ports share the
same radio channel but traffic originated and directed to Lan1 should be kept separated from traffic from
Lan2 and Lan3 and viceversa.

Lan-1 to Lan-1, connection must transfer untagged packets.

Lan-2 and Lan-3 have the same requirements. Please refer to Fig.167.

Select 1+0 or 1+1 configuration according system requirements.

Fig.168 - Modulation and capacity

Please refer to Fig.168. First selection is channel bandwidth and modulation, in this example we selected
28MHz and 16QAM.

ACM Engine, Upper Modulation, Lower Modulation, Permanent Traffic and extra TDM Capacity at any mod-
ulation must be the same local and remote.

MN.00224.E - 018 275

 The throughput at any modulation with 28 MHz bandwidth is shown in Fig.169 with View Current Config
button of Fig.168.

Fig.169 - View Current Configuration

So with 4QAMstrong modulation the Ethernet capacity is 20 Mbit/s and with 256QAM modulation the Ether-
net capacity is 140 Mbit/s.

Fig.170 - Switch general settings

See Fig.170 for Switch general settings of the switch. All the used ports must be Enabled, so enable Lan-
1, Lan-2, Lan-3 and Internal Port, see Fig.171.

Please notice the MAC Address Aging Time reduced, only for this test, at 15 sec. The correct cable crossover
arrangement must be selected too (see Fig.171). Enable LLF if needed only at the end of link line up.

Select Master or Slave Role for 1000BaseT interface.

276 MN.00224.E - 018

 For Untagged traffic, connections are done with Lan per port selections. Referring to Fig.172 incoming traf-
fic at Lan-1 exits at internal Port A and into Fig.175 incoming traffic at internal Port A exits at Lan-1 port.
This connection are done for all Untagged traffic and all Tagged packets with Vlan Id not described into
Vlan Configuration Table.

If Vlan Configuration Table is blank all Tagged traffic follows the rules of Lan per port.

Possible selections of Ingress Filtering Check:

• "Disable 802.1q": no check of Virtual Lan tag is made and all packets follow Lan per port settings

• "Fallback": if Tagged packets have their Vlan Id into Vlan Configuration Table they follow the con-
nection described into the table, otherwise they follow the Lan per port settings as Untagged pack-
ets

• "Secure": no Untagged packet transits; only Tagged packets with Vlan Id listed into the table can
transit.

Fig.171 - Lan-1 interface settings

All the used ports must be Enabled.

The correct Cable Crossover arrangement must be selected too.

Untagged traffic transits only if the selection for Ingress Filtering Check is disabled at each input port and
a separated Vlan for Untagged traffic is set up for each port.

Each port of the switch must be associated with a different Default VLAN ID, Lan-1 with Default VID 4001,
Lan-2 with Default VID 4002, Lan-3 with Default VID 4003, for Lan-1 see Fig.171 and Fig.172.

Untagged packets coming at physical ports are tagged on common radio channel but tagged with different
Vlans. At receiving end packets are distributed at their ports and untagged.

Vlan Configuration Table will be defined in order to group traffic from Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3 to Port A.

The Vlan Configuration Table must be programmed as in Fig.176.

MN.00224.E - 018 277

 Fig.172 - Lan1 Vlan settings

Fig.173 - Lan2 Vlan settings

278 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.174 - Lan3 Vlan settings

Fig.175 - Port A Vlan settings

MN.00224.E - 018 279

 Fig.176 - Vlan Configuration Table

26.4 FROM 3 PORT TO 3 PORT CONNECTIONS

Settings for Tagged Traffic, QinQ

switch switch

Lan-1 port 1 port 1 Lan-1

Lan-2 AL AL Lan-2
radio radio
Lan-3 Lan-3

Nx2 Nx2
Mbit/s Mbit/s
Local Remote

Fig.177 - 3 ports to3 ports connections with segregated Tagged and Untagged traffic

In this example 3 local port must communicate with corresponding 3 remote ports. All the ports share the
same radio channel but traffic originated and directed to Lan1 should be kept separated from traffic from
Lan2 and Lan3 and viceversa.

Lan-1 to Lan-1, connection must transfer tagged and untagged packets. Lan-2 and Lan-3 have the same
requirements. Please refer to Fig.177.

Select 1+0 or 1+1 configuration according system requirements.

280 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.178 -Modulation and Capacity
Please refer to Fig.178. First selection is channel bandwidth and modulation, in this example we selected
28MHz and 16QAM.

ACM Engine, Upper Modulation, Lower Modulation, Permanent Traffic and extra TDM Capacity at any mod-
ulation must be the same local and remote.

The throughput at any modulation with 28 MHz bandwidth is shown in Fig.179 with View Current Config
button of Fig.178.

Fig.179 - View Current Configuration

MN.00224.E - 018 281

 So with 4QAMstrong modulation the Ethernet capacity is 20 Mbit/s and with 256QAM modulation the Ether-
net capacity is 140 Mbit/s.

Fig.180 - Switch general settings

See Fig.180 for Switch general settings of the switch. All the used ports must be Enabled, so enable Lan-
1, Lan-2, Lan-3 and internal Port A, see Fig.163.

For already Tagged traffic we need to add a second Vlan Tag to the packets creating the Vlan of Vlan into
radio channel, so we need a Max packet size of 2048.

Settings are as reported in Fig.181, Fig.182, Fig.183, Fig.184, Fig.185.

Fig.181 - Lan1 Vlan settings

282 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.182 - Lan2 Vlan settings

Fig.183 - Lan3 Vlan settings

MN.00224.E - 018 283

 Fig.184 - Port A Vlan settings

Fig.185 - Vlan Configuration Table

284 MN.00224.E - 018

 27 HOW TO CHANGE ADDRESS ON REMOTE EQUIP-
MENT WITHOUT LOSING THE CONNECTION

27.1 TOOLS

The following procedure can be done with SCT/LCT or with Web LCT and similar windows.

27.2 PROCEDURE

1. Set new addresses on remote equipment

2. Clear the Stored Routing Table on remote equipment and add new lines to it
3. Set the new Agent and restart remote equipment

4. Configure Local equipment

5. Prepare Subnetwork on local equipment, capture the remote equipment and send it the new sub-
network

Select the remote equipment

Select menu Equipment -> Configuration Setup -> Port Configuration

MN.00224.E - 018 285

 Fig.186 - Subnetwork Craft Terminal - Communication setup

Configuration

Configure:

IP Ethernet ->Ip address and netmask (see Fig.187)

Lct PPP -> Ip address and netmask (see Fig.188)

PPP Radio -> Ip address and netmask (see Fig.189)

If you have other port to configure ex. PPP RS232 - 2Mbit/s EOC etc. configure it with IP and netmask

286 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.187 - IP Ethernet

Fig.188 - LCT PPP

MN.00224.E - 018 287

 Fig.189 - PPP Radio
At the end select Set Values -> Confirm and Store -> Confirm.

288 MN.00224.E - 018

 Select the equipment

Select menu Equipment -> Configuration Setup -> Stored Routing Table

Fig.190 - Store Routing Table

In this menu delete all lines and default gateway, push Apply and then Save.

MN.00224.E - 018 289

 Fig.191 - Stored Routing Table

Add new routine lines (relevant the new addresses configuration) pushing the Add button.
When the Stored Routing Table is complete, push Apply and then Save.

Select the remote equipment

Select menu Equipment -> Properties. Set new Agent (equal to Ethernet port address).
Push Restart and then Confirm.

After the restart, the Remote Equipment disappears from SCT display.

Configure the local equipment

Configure the local equipment with the same procedure seen before. Then restart the local equipment.

Subnetwork Configuration Wizard

To see both local and remote equipment the new subnetwork (station and equipment) must be prepared.

Select menu Tools -> Subnetwork Configuration Wizard.

290 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.192 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard

MN.00224.E - 018 291

 Fig.193 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard - Actual Configuration

Push Add Station, write its name and push OK.

292 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.194 - Add new station

Select this new station and push Add Element.

The Ip Address to set is the Agent (equal to Ethernet port address).

MN.00224.E - 018 293

 Fig.195 - Add New Network Element

After having set the Equipment Address, push OK.

The new element is created inside the previously created station

This step must be done for local and remote equipment.

294 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.196 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard

Select the local equipment (the one with System (Local))

MN.00224.E - 018 295

 Fig.197 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard

Send the configuration to local equipment.

When the remote equipment appears in Actual Configuration, prepare again the network configuration you
have set before (or select the local equipment, push Retrieve) and send the configuration to remote equip-
ment.

296 MN.00224.E - 018

 28 LINE-UP OF THE NODE WITH NODAL IDU

28.1 OVERVIEW

The following paragraph deals with the activation of the Node with Nodal IDU unit with details of the SCT/
LCT program relevant to the functionalities offered by the cross-connection matrix and Ethernet switch in
relation to the achievable connections.

Supposing that the radio links are already commissioned, the following items are described:

• tributary - radio cross-connection

• tributary - tributary cross-connection

• ethernet switch.

28.2 NODE CONNECTIONS

The connections among the IDUs in the node are the following:
• connections for E1: Nbus cables are used (connectors NBUS1 and NBUS2 are involved)

• connections for Ethernet: Ethernet cables are used (ports LAN1 and LAN2 are involved).

The number of IDUs in the node is between 2 and 8.

In Fig.198 there is an example of connection between one IDU and the adjacent IDUs in the same node.

Remember that in a node for Ethernet Traffic can be used port 3 and port 4 only because port LAN1 and
LAN2 are used for nodal connections.

MN.00224.E - 018 297

 From LAN1 of IDU8 From NB1 of IDU8

IDU1
LAN1 LAN2 NB1 NB2

IDU2
LAN1 LAN2 NB1 NB2
Max 8

IDU3
LAN1 LAN2 NB1 NB2

Node traffic transport:

........................... - TDM (E1) --> NBUS cable
- LAN --> LAN cable

IDU8
LAN1 LAN2 NB1 NB2 LAN1 and LAN2 are used for cabling

From LAN2 of IDU1 From NB2 of IDU1

Fig.198 - ALCplus2 node connections

28.3 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION

The operations to enable the functionalities offered by the internal cross-connection matrix and Ethernet
switch are the following:

• run the software SCT, select tools and Subnetwork Configuration Wizard

• insert all the Nodal IDU present into the Node, all these Nodals must be reachable and connected

• select Network, Nodal ALCplus2 Manager as in Fig.199

• configure the Node with Station name, Node name, define is Nodal cables are Protected or Not
Protected

• configure the Node indicating the number of IDU setting the Node for E1 TDM traffic, Number of
TDM Elem.

• configure the Node indicating the number of IDU setting the Node for E1 TDM traffic, Number of
ETH Elem.

• insert the IP number of the IDU setting the Node and press Apply Config button

• at this point there are Cross-connections and Ethernet LAN details.

298 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.199 - Nodal ALCplus2 Manager

28.4 TRIBUTARY CONFIGURATION

The operations to create and configure this cross-connection are:

• to run the software WebLCT, open Equipment Menu, TDM Tributaries, E1 and select the type
of used tributary

• to enable the E1 and/or STM-1 tributaries (transport of 63 E1 each) involved by the cross-connec-
tion

MN.00224.E - 018 299

 • to route an E1 stream to remote equipment, a Tributary-Radio cross-connection must be created,
the enabling of the stream itself is not sufficient, the cross-connection can be done directly into No-
dal ALCplus2 Manager

• in case of STM-1 streams, configure the parameters VC4 (Label - TUG Structure) and any VC12 (La-
bel: Asynchronous) and the synchronization parameters (WebLCT, Equipment Menu, Synchro-
nisation).

28.5 CONFIGURATION OF THE CROSS-CONNECTION MATRIX

The operations to configure a cross-connection can be done IDU by IDU into WebLCT or easier into the
Nodal ALCplus2 Manager:

• run the software SCT, open Network, Nodal ALCplus2 Manager and press Cross-connection

• select the type of cross-connection:

- tributary - radio: cross-connection between the tributaries available on the front side of IDUs
(E1, STM-1, IDU1 to IDU8) and the tributaries available on the radio link, IDU1 to 8 Radio Extra
E1 and Permanent E1

- tributary - tributary: cross-connection between the tributaries available on the front side of IDUs
(E1, STM-1, IDU1 to 8).

28.5.1 Tributary - Radio Cross-connection

The operations to create and configure this cross-connection are:

• select the type of tributary to use on the front side of the IDU: the relevant E1 streams will be dis-
played in the window together with the number of E1 streams relevant to the radio link
• select which radio link you want to use in cross-connection (up to eight available)

• move the symbol of the E1 stream (the number corresponds to the physical position in the connec-
tor of the IDU) by dragging and dropping from a type of tributary to the position to use in the radio
frame, see Fig.200.

• the tributaries in the radio frame (link direction A or others) can be involved in a tributary loop to-
wards the corresponding remote radio by means of a double click on the relevant box that points
out the position in the frame, see Fig.201

• the tributaries on radio side can transit directly from a radio link to the other without need to pass
from the tributaries on matrix side: by means of drag’n’drop, a box relevant to an E1 on radio side
is moved from a link to the other link. The two involved links must be selected in the fields 1st Radio
and 2nd Radio. A pass- through (transit) cross-connection is so executed: see Fig.202

• to delete a cross-connection, move it to the trash

• to activate the configuration, press Apply and Confirm.

28.5.2 Tributary - Tributary Cross-connection

The operations to create and configure this cross-connection are:

• select the two types of tributary (1st tributary and 2nd tributary) on the front side of the IDUs mod-
ule to use as ends: the relevant E1 streams will be displayed in the top and bottom part of the win-
dow

300 MN.00224.E - 018

 • move the symbol of the E1 stream (the number corresponds to the physical position in the connec-
tor on the IDU) by means of the drag’n’drop from a tributary type to another, see Fig.203

• to delete a cross-connection, move to the trash

• to activate the configuration, press Apply and Confirm.

This type of cross-connection includes even those relevant to the transport of E1 streams from a nodal IDU
to another one belonging to the same node.

NBUS connections are not displayed.

28.6 ETHERNET SWITCH

For Ethernet connections the Nodals are as one big switch with two Lan ports and a radio Ethernet port for
any IDU.

Connections between the IDU are not shown into SCT but are programmed automatically by SCT in order
to create the big switch.

Setting of the Ethernet switch is performed through Nodal ALCplus2 Manager which then programs any
Nodal part of the switch.

All settings of Ethernet switches part of the Node can be done directly into Nodal ALCplus2 Manager.

See from Fig.204 to Fig.215.

Fig.200 - Drag and drop E1 stream

MN.00224.E - 018 301

 Fig.201 - VC auto loop

302 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.202 - Pass-through cross-connection

MN.00224.E - 018 303

 Fig.203 - Drag and drop E1 stream

304 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.204 - Ethernet switch settings

MN.00224.E - 018 305

 Fig.205 - Ethernet switch settings

306 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.206 - Ethernet switch settings

MN.00224.E - 018 307

 Fig.207 - Ethernet switch settings

308 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.208 - Ethernet switch settings

MN.00224.E - 018 309

 Fig.209 - Ethernet switch settings

310 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.210 - Ethernet switch settings

MN.00224.E - 018 311

 Fig.211 - Ethernet switch settings

312 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.212 - Ethernet switch settings

Fig.213 - Ethernet switch settings

MN.00224.E - 018 313

 Fig.214 - Ethernet switch settings

314 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.215 - Ethernet switch settings

MN.00224.E - 018 315

 29 EXAMPLE OF ALCPLUS2 NODE EXPANSION

29.1 INTRODUCTION

The goal of this chapter is to define a procedure to add one (or more) ALCplus2 IDU to an existing node of
similar IDUs, carrying live traffic. This procedure is applicable to the following IDUs:

• GAI0162

• GAI0163
equipped with system versions 01.01.xx.

In the following paragraphs some screenshots are provided, related to a 3-IDU node expanded to a 4-IDU
node, as an example. The example can be easily applied to a N-IDU node (i.e. a node composed by a num-
ber of IDUs equal to N) expanded to N+K-IDU node: the 3 to 4 IDU case corresponds to the N=3 K=1 case.

This procedure does not provide specific guidance about the GEthernet traffic: with this respect the node
expansion shall be treated as an usual case of interconnection between Ethernet Switches, implementing
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.

Attention: this procedure covers also the case when you want to withdraw one (or more) IDU from the
node.

29.2 PRECONDITIONS

The SCT distribution to be used to perform this task shall be 4.6.8 or greater.

All the IDUs are reachable by the PC running the SCT/Web browser. All the operations performed via SCT/
WebLCT shall be done logged as 'System' into the relevant equipment.

The existing node is composed by IDUs configured as "AlcPlus2 (Protected)". See hereafter the screenshots
relevant to an example.

316 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.216 - Node composition

MN.00224.E - 018 317

 Fig.217 - Node composition

29.3 NBUS AND INTRA-NODE GE CABLING RULES

In a N-IDU node, the NBUS cabling shall be as follows:

• IDU 1 NBUS 1 shall be connected to IDU 2 NBUS 2

• IDU 2 NBUS 1 shall be connected to IDU 3 NBUS 2

• …

• IDU J NBUS 1 shall be connected to IDU J+1 NBUS 2

• …

• IDU N NBUS 1 shall be connected to IDU 1 NBUS 2.

In a N-IDU node, the intra-node GEth. cabling shall be as follows:

• IDU 1 LAN1 port shall be connected to IDU 2 LAN2 port

• IDU 2 LAN1 port shall be connected to IDU 3 LAN2 port

• …

• IDU J LAN1 port shall be connected to IDU J+1 LAN2 port

• …

• IDU N LAN1 port shall be connected to IDU 1 LAN2 port.

318 MN.00224.E - 018

 29.4 NODE EXPANSION FROM N TO N+K ELEMENTS

29.4.1 Step 1

Install the K new IDUs in the same rack where the existing node is installed (or in an adjacent rack, pro-
vided that the NBUS cables length is compatible with the installation). Do not connect the N-BUS cables
to the new IDUs.

Configure the new IDUs as "AlcPlus2 (Protected)", with the following parameters:

• Nodes Id: from N+1 to N+K, depending on the IDU position inside the node

• Number of nodes: N+K

29.4.2 Step 2

Interconnect the new IDUs with the nodal bus, as per rule in 29.2 PRECONDITIONS. Do not connect the
new IDUs to the existing IDUs.

29.4.3 Step 3 (traffic affecting)

Disconnect the N-BUS 2 from IDU 1.

Depending on the number and kind of interconnections among the IDUs, there will be errors and/or AIS
on some of the E1, due to the traffic protection intervention on the N-BUS. The typical duration of the traffic
interruption, measured at E1 level, is around 1s.

Alarms will appear: some possibly related to E1 traffic (depending on the existing interconnections) and at
least two one related to the nodal bus interruption. The E1 related alarms will disappear as soon as the
protection on the N-BUS will take place. The N-BUS related alarms will remain. See screenshots hereafter
as an example.

MN.00224.E - 018 319

 Fig.218 - Current alarms

29.4.4 Step 4

Change configuration of IDU 1 and IDU N, modifying the 'number of nodes' parameter from N to N+K.

Change configuration of IDUs from number 2 to number N-1, modifying the 'number of nodes' parameter
from N to N+K.

29.4.5 Step 5 (traffic affecting)

Connect the N-BUS from IDU N to IDU N+1 as per rule in paragraph 29.2 PRECONDITIONS. Connect the
N-BUS from IDU N+K to IDU 1, as per rule in paragraph 29.2 PRECONDITIONS.

Depending on the number and kind of interconnections among the IDUs, there will be errors and/or AIS
on some of the E1, due to the traffic protection intervention on the N-BUS. The typical duration of the traffic
interruption, measured at E1 level, is around 1s.

The N-BUS related alarms shall disappear.

320 MN.00224.E - 018

 29.5 NODE REDUCTION FROM N+K TO N ELEMENTS

Basically this procedure consists in reverting the steps done to expand the node.

29.5.1 Step 1 (traffic affecting)

Disconnect the N-BUS from IDU N to IDU N+1 and from IDU N+K to IDU 1.

Depending on the number and kind of interconnections among the IDUs, there will be errors and/or AIS
on some of the E1, due to the traffic protection intervention on the N-BUS. The typical duration of the traffic
interruption, measured at E1 level, is around 1s.

The N-BUS related alarms shall appear in IDU 1, IDU N, IDU N+1 and IDU N+K.

29.5.2 Step 2

Change configuration of IDU 1 and IDU N, modifying the 'number of nodes' parameter from N+K to N.

Change configuration of IDUs number 2 to number N-1, modifying the 'number of nodes' parameter from
N+K to N.

29.5.3 Step 3 (traffic affecting)

Connect the N-BUS from IDU N to IDU 1, as per rule in paragraph 29.2 PRECONDITIONS.

Depending on the number and kind of interconnections among the IDUs, there will be errors and/or AIS
on some of the E1, due to the traffic protection intervention on the N-BUS. The typical duration of the traffic
interruption, measured at E1 level, is around 1s.

At the end of a transitional period the N-BUS related alarms shall disappear.

29.5.4 Step 4

Withdraw the IDUs from N+1 to N+K.

MN.00224.E - 018 321

 30 LINE-UP RADIO TRUNKING (LINK AGGREGA-
TION RADIO SIDE)

30.1 RADIO TRUNKING MODE (INTERNAL PORT - PORT A)

This mode is available only for equipment belonging to an ALCplus2 node and interconnected by nodal Bus
Ethernet. The radio Trunking mode allows aggregating some radio streams of a nodal system.

The functionality manages an aggregation group (Trunk): Enable-Trunk1.

To insert a radio port of a switch in the Trunk, it is necessary to enable the radio Trunking mode for this
port (Enable-Trunk1). In this mode, up to 4 radio ports can be aggregated.
The use of the radio Trunking mode is alternative to the use of the Spanning Tree protocol.

30.1.1 To verify the status of the internal port in relation to the trunking
mode

Operations available only if the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and is interconnected to the other
node elements by the nodal Bus Ethernet.

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command. The Port A contextual area opens.

2. Bring in front of page the STP/Trunking tab. The tab points out the status of the port in relation to
the Trunking modality or to the Spanning Tree protocol.

Fig.219 reports an example of the tab when the Trunking modality is active.

Fig.219 - STP/Trunking tab (Trunk active) (Port A contextual area)

322 MN.00224.E - 018

 Trunk Value:

• Disable. Trunking mode disabled

• Enable-Trunk1. Trunking mode enabled at radio port level.

If the STP protocol is enabled the parameter Trunk is automatically forced to the value Disable. To modify
the value, it is first necessary to disable the Spanning Tree protocol. STP Parameters relevant to the Span-
ning Tree protocol.

30.1.2 To enable/disable the Trunking mode for the internal port

Operations available only if the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and is interconnected to other el-
ements of the node through nodal Bus Ethernet. The Trunking modality cannot be enabled when the Span-
ning Tree protocol is enabled.

• Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command. The Port A contextual area opens.

• Bring in front of page the STP/Trunking tab. The Trunk parameter points out the enabling status of
the Trunking mode for the selected port (see Fig.219).

• To change the parameter, select the value:

- Disable. Trunking mode disabled.

- Enable-Trunk1. Trunking mode enabled at radio port level.

• Press Apply and confirm.

MN.00224.E - 018 323

 31 LINE-UP LINE TRUNKING (LINK AGGREGATION
LINE SIDE)

31.1 LINE TRUNKING MODE

This mode is available for a connection between IDU and ODU and from a node to other node connected
via Lan ports.

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command.

The LAN <port number> contextual area opens.

2. Bring in front of page the STP/ELP/Trunking tab.

The tab points out the status of the port in relation to the Ethernet Line Protection, to the Spanning Tree
protocol or to the Trunking modality. Fig.220 reports an example of the tab when the Trunking modality is
active.

Fig.220 - Trunking tab (Trunk active)

Parameter:

• Status. Status of the port as regards the LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol):

• Up. Protocol active.

• Down. Protocol inactive.

• Partner Id. MAC Address of the remote equipment located at the other end of the Ethernet connec-
tion (remote switch).

• Tx Pck Cnt. LACP packets transmitted to the remote switch.

• Rx Pck Cnt. LACP packets received from the remote switch.

Value:

• Disable. Trunking mode disabled.

324 MN.00224.E - 018

 • Enable-Trunk1. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN port is aggregated to the equipment
LAN ports, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk1.

• Enable-Trunk2. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN port is aggregated to the equipment
LAN ports, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk2.

• Enable-Trunk3. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN port is aggregated to the equipment
LAN ports, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk3.

• Enable-Trunk4. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN port is aggregated to the equipment
LAN ports, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk4.

It is possible to aggregate up to 4 LAN ports for each group (Trunk). Another example is to aggregate two
Lans on Trunk1 and other two Lans on Trunk2. Send Trunk1 to one IDU and Trunk2 to a second IDU.

All the Lan port belonging to a group (Trunk) must have the same speed.

If the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and it is interconnected to other elements of the node
through nodal Bus Ethernet, this operation is available for the external ports LAN3 and LAN4.

MN.00224.E - 018 325

 32 LINE-UP OAM

Please, first read paragraph “8.8 ETHERNET OAM (Operation Administration and Maintenance)”.

To use the OAM facilities it is necessary to:

• assign a Domain with its Level

• bind a Maintenance Association to a VLan (that is sufficient to create MIP)

• bind a MEP to a VLan.

Do the same on remote equipment. Now it is possible to verify the status of connection with Remote MEP
(Rmep), or send a Loop back Message (Lbm) or send a Link trace Message (Ltm)

32.1 FM DOMAIN

The OAM-FM Domain command manages the OAM domain of an equipment.

In details it is possible:

• To verify the characteristics of the OAM domain of an equipment

• To define an OAM domain for an equipment

• To remove the OAM domain of an equipment

The name or the level of an OAM domain associated to an equipment cannot be modified. In order to modify
one or both the parameters, it is necessary to remove the current domain and to define a new one.

To verify the characteristics of the OAM domain of an equipment

• Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > OAM-FM Domain command.
The OAM-FM Domain contextual area opens where the name and level of the OAM domain of the equipment
are displayed Fig.221.

Fig.221 - OAM-FM Domain contextual area

326 MN.00224.E - 018

 If the Domain field is empty and available for the setting, this means that no OAM domain is defined for
the equipment. To define an OAM domain for an equipment

• Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > OAM-FM Domain command. The OAM-FM Do-
main contextual area opens (see Fig.221).

• Into the Domain box, type the OAM domain name of the equipment (alphanumeric string with min-
imum 1 and maximum 45 characters).

• Move the cursor Level over a number between 0 and 7 according to the priority level you wish to
assign to the OAM domain (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).

• Press Create.

The equipment is associated to the set OAM domain.

32.2 OAM-FM MA/MEP

This command is available only if an OAM domain has been defined for the equipment (see Fig.221).

The OAM-FM MA/MEP command manages the maintenance points of the OAM domain of the equipment.
To verify the status of the VLANs as regards the OAM Ethernet protocol

• Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > OAM-FM MA/MEP command.

The OAM-FM MA/MEP contextual area opens, pointing out the status of the VLANs in relation to the OAM
Ethernet protocol.

Fig.222 - OAM-FM MA/MEP contextual area

Every VLAN is represented by a rectangle whose characteristics are described here below see Fig.223.

Fig.223 - Vlan status and commands

MN.00224.E - 018 327

 32.3 VLAN IDENTIFIER - VLAN NAME - ETHERNET SWITCH PORT

Status of the port as regards the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the VLAN:

• ----, the port is not enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan, other possible settings are: Untag, Tagged, Unmodif.

Name of the MA (Maintenance Association) associated to the VLAN.

Identifier of the MEP (Maintenance End Point) associated to the VLAN.

Only one VLAN at a time can be selected.

The Vlan must be into the range 2-4094 to be into OAM functionality.

Push-buttons:

• Bind MA. Creates a MA and MIP.

• Bind MEP. Creates a MEP.

• Unbind. Removes the MA and/or the MEP associated to the VLAN.

The availability of the push-buttons depends on the status of the selected VLAN.

If a MA or a MEP is associated to the VLAN, only the Unbind push-button will be available.

In Fig.222 the arrow shows direction of messages, in this case the messages are sent into the equipment
at Lan 3 port. Further details can be found into Help on-line of WebLct for ALCplus2.

328 MN.00224.E - 018

 33 LINE-UP ELP

33.1 ETHERNET LINE PROTECTION (ELP)

The Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) is a function which allows implementing a protection at physical level
(Level 2) between two or more LAN external ports.

When the user enables the Ethernet line protection, even the management of the ELP switch is enabled.
The switch operates in automatic mode: the equipment executes the switch when the LOS alarm is present
on the LAN port in service. When the alarm clears, the controller does not execute the switch again.

The Ethernet line protection is implemented by means of proprietary protocol. As consequence, the ELP
switch is managed without considering alarms or settings executed on the equipment on the other side of
the LAN connection.

In ALCplus2 equipment, the line Ethernet protection can be enabled at equipment level or at node level.

This last chance is available and meaningful only for the equipment belonging to an ALCplus2 node and
which are interconnected to other node elements through the nodal Bus Ethernet.

Fig.224 - ELP Enabling Protection

There are two groups of protection: Protection1 and Protection2. One group may have Lan1…Lan4 up to 4
ports. Normal situation is two ports on Protection1 and two ports on Protection2. Protection1 can go to one
IDU Protection2 to a second IDU. Selection between ports is based on priority and cost.

The port with highest priority (that is lowest number) is selected. The port with lowest cost is selected
(ports with same speed, as the protected two, have same cost).

MN.00224.E - 018 329

 34 LINE-UP ACL

34.1 ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL)

Access Control List (ACL) permits to define a list of IP address allowed to control the equipment.

It is possible to define some address or a range of address.

It is possible to create a white list or a black list.

Before activating Enable please create the list of allowed IP address, see Fig.225.

After creating a correct list of allowed IP address it is possible to Enable the ACL, see Fig.226.

Warning: with no address into the list and Enable active no computer can access the equipment via Lan.
With USB cable it is always possible to access the equipment.

ACL is effective only on local equipment, remote equipment reached by routing are not affected by local
ACL.

Fig.225 - Inserting allowed IP address

330 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.226 - List of allowed IP address

MN.00224.E - 018 331

 35 LINE-UP SYNCHRONISATION

35.1 LINE-UP SYNCHRONISATION

With reference to Fig.227 let’s do the examples:

(Sync transmitted via Radio frame timing)

Local Remote

SETS SETS
NBUS

STM -1
NBUS
LAN3 , 4
STM-1
TRIBA =
2MHz/2Mbit LAN3 , 4

TRIBB = 2Mbit TRIBA = 2MHz/2Mbit

TRIB 1 -16 = 2Mbit TRIBB = 2Mbit

TRIB 1 -16 = 2Mbit

Fig.227 - Sync transmitted from local to remote radio

Examples:

1. Synchronisation is coming from Lan3 local (working at 14 Gbit) and it is exiting from Lan3 on remote
radio

2. Synchronisation is coming from E1 tributary 1 and it is exiting from E1 tributary 1 on remote radio.

332 MN.00224.E - 018

 35.2 SYNCHRONISATION FROM LAN3 AT 1GBIT/S

The starting point is that local SETS circuit is synchronised by an external source which may be one of the
sources shown in the picture so also Lan3 or Tributary 1. Sources can be one or many with different pri-
ority.

Synchronization signal is transmitted from local radio to remote radio via radio frame timing.

Remote SETS is synchronised by incoming radio frame generated by local SETS that is with SDH quality.

All local signals are generated by SETS and will have the same frequency precision and stability.

Settings at local radio:

See Fig.228.

With WebLct go to Configurator -> Sync Enable -> Enable, press Apply and Confirm. Now into Equipment
Menu a new item Synchronization is available.

See Fig.229 into Synchronization the system is synchronised from Internal Source.

See Fig.230, now select TE-Lan3 and select Enabled with priority 1 which is the maximum.

See Fig.231, now if Lan3 is connected to a Lan port working at 1Gbit, the SETS is synchronised by Lan 3.
But Lan 3 Interface must be programmed as Slave and external Lan port must be programmed as Master
(for Gbit clock).

Now if local radio is receiving a correct signal, the SETS is synchronized by Lan 3 as in Fig.232

Settings at remote radio:

On remote radio enable synchronization as Fig.228.

On remote radio into Synchronization SETS folder select Radio and Enable with Priority 1. See Fig.233.

Now if remote radio is receiving a correct signal the SETS is synchronized by radio as in Fig.234.

35.3 SYNCHRONIZATION FROM E1

See Fig.235.

E1 tributary N is used as a signal transfer and a synchronization source for external equipment into remote
site.

Local SETS is synchronised by E1 Trib. 1. Remote radio SETS is synchronised by receiving radio frame.

We must Enable E1 Retiming so the E1 Trib. 1 at remote site can be used by external equipment as an
SDH synchronism source as in Fig.236.

MN.00224.E - 018 333

 Fig.228

Fig.229

334 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.230

Fig.231

MN.00224.E - 018 335

 Fig.232

Fig.233

336 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.234

(Sync transmitted via Radio frame timing)

Local Remote

SETS SETS

Modem
TRIB1 Modem
Memory TRIB1

E1Trib1 used as 2Mbit timing source on remote for external equipment, needs
E1 retiming = Enabled on remote

Local = SETS synchronised by TRIB1

Remote = SETS synchronised by Radio, TRIB1 distributing synchronisation
(and data) to external equipment

Fig.235 - E1 retiming

MN.00224.E - 018 337

 Fig.236

338 MN.00224.E - 018

 Section 5.
COMMISSIONING REPORT

36 COMMISSIONING REPORT FOR ALCPLUS2E IDU

36.1 GENERAL INFORMATIONS

This chapter describes how to prepare a commissioning report regarding the installation of a link.
This report helps an installation team in the check of all the steps performed during the job.

36.1.1 Documentation

The site is installed and commissioned according to the following documentation set:

DOCUMENT NUMBER DOCUMENT NAME

1 MN.00224 User Manual

The site must be installed and commissioned according to the Link document.

Checked 
Item DESCRIPTION OK NOT OK

1 Enclosed copy of the Link project

2 Enclosed report of the factory test

3 Enclosed antenna data

MN.00224.E - 018 339

 36.1.2 Site Identifiers

Identifier of LOCAL Site

Identifier of REMOTE Site

Link identifier (from/to)

36.1.3 Configurations

Terminal (Site A or Site B)

IDU Part number

IDU Serial number

Equipment Firmware System Version N50010 Ver.___.___.___

Web LCT N96109 Ver.___.___.___

Equipment Modulation/Bandwidth

Equipment Configuration 1+0 1+1 HSB 1+1 FD

2X(1+0) eth S.P. 2X(1+0) eth D.P.

XPIC East-West

Antenna orientation: azimuth

Elevation

Polarization (H / V)

Cross Polarization Discrimination

(>30dB)(only for double polarization an-
tennas)

Link ID

User Input 1

User Input 2

User Output 1

340 MN.00224.E - 018

 36.1.4 Network addresses (DCN)

Equipment provided with IP/OSPF SW stack

Addresses OSPF Area

Agent IP address . . . .

Ethernet IP Address . . . .

IP Net Mask . . . .

In Band Management LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 LAN4 Port A

LCT PPP IP Address . . . .

IP Net Mask . . . .

Radio 1 IP Address . . . .

IP Net Mask . . . .

PPP Mode Client Server Bridge

Radio 2 IP Address . . . .

(East-West) IP Net Mask . . . .

PPP Mode Client Server Bridge

Line EOC IP Address . . . .

IP Net Mask . . . .

PPP Mode Client Server

EOC Settings E1 Time Slot n. ________

Default Gateway . . . .

Interface

MN.00224.E - 018 341

 Equipment provided with OSI SW stack

ADDRESSES

Agent IP address . . . .

IP Address . . . .
Ethernet
IP Net Mask . . . .

IP Address . . . .
LCT PPP
IP Net Mask . . . .

IP Address . . . .

IP Net Mask . . . .
IP over OSI
EOC radio User Network Bridge

East-West Radio 1 Radio 2

NSap Gosip address

AFI Domain Area System ID Sel.

Default Gataway . . . .

Interface

Test Check Passed-----> Failed----->

Comments:

Executed by:

Date: for Siae:

342 MN.00224.E - 018

 36.2 SITE INSPECTION

Note: The purpose of this inspection is to be sure that the site is ready for the commissioning of the Radio
Link.

Checked 
Item DESCRIPTION OK NOT OK

1 Grounding connections present and properly installed

1.1 Grounding connection of the rack

1.2 Grounding connection of the IDU unit

1.3 Grounding connection of the ODU unit

Grounding connection of metallic structures for the equipment support

1.4
(if foreseen)

Check of the proper installation and tensile stress of the windbracings,

2
if required

Structure for the support of the ODU unit correctly installed and ori-
3
ented to the required direction

4 Grounding Kit cables properly installed

5 Feeder and tails properly installed and fixed to the supports

Panel for antenna cable ingress drilled and provided with gaskets for
6
tin passage

7 Rack properly installed and fixed to wall and/or to floor

8 Cables in internal site properly fixed and labelled

8.1. IDU/ODU cables (labelled on both sides)

8.2. Tributary cables

8.3. Power cables (cables labelled on both sides, labels on switches)

Notes:

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

Test Check Passed-----> Failed----->

Comments:

Executed by:

Date: for Siae:

MN.00224.E - 018 343

 36.3 COMMISSIONING CHECKS

Checked 
Item DESCRIPTION OK NOT OK

1 Equipment setup

1.1 Check of the received material, recording of the possible defects

1.2 Recording of the damages caused by the transport

1.3 Factory Reports enclosed to SSD

2 Power supply voltage and polarity corresponding to the specifications

3 Cables connected and waveguide

3.1 IDU/ODU cables

3.2 Tributary cables

3.3 Alarm cables

3.4 Power supply cables

3.5 DCN cables and/or inserted terminations (if used, otherwise present)

4 Configurations in compliance with the Link documentation

Enabled Disabled

Trib A Priority:_____

Trib B Trib n___ Priority:_____

STM-1 n.1 Priority:________

STM-1 n.2 Priority:________

SETS
Radio 1A Priority:_____
4.1 Synchronization
Radio 2A Priority:_____

LAN A n.__________ Priority:_____

LAN B n. __________ Priority:_____

Trib.A normal Trib.A T2 Trib.A T3

E1 Source type
Trib.B normal Trib.B T2 Trib.B T3

E1 retiming enabled Tributary n._______

4.2 STM-1 MST mode None 1+0 1+1 MSP 1+1 MSP no ALS

4.3 Radio Branch label Branch 1 Name:_____________ Branch 2 Name:______________

4.4 TX SW on rem alarm Enable Disable Check Period_____ Alarm Thr_____

4.5 RX alarm Threshold -_______dBm

5 Radio parameters

TX1 (MHz):
5.1 Set TX and RX frequencies Branch 1
RX1 (MHz):

TX2 (MHz):
5.2 Set TX and RX frequencies Branch 2 (1)
RX2 (MHz):

344 MN.00224.E - 018

 5.3 RF channel number Branch 1

5.4 RF channel number Branch 2 (1)

5.5 TX Power set by webLCT - Branch 1 dBm

5.6 TX Power set by webLCT - Branch 2 (1) dBm

6 ATPC

6.1 TX Power control Branch 1 Manual Automatic (ATPC) Range(dB)__

6.2 TX Power control Branch 2 (1) Manual Automatic (ATPC) Range(dB)__

6.3 ATPC PRX threshold Branch 1 High:_________ Low________

6.4 ATPC PRX threshold Branch 2 (1) High:_________ Low________

7 Modulation / Bandwidth and ACM

Branch 1 MHz/QAM
7.1 Reference Bandwidth and Modulation
Branch 2a MHz/QAM

Enabled
7.2 ACM engine
Disabled

7.3 TX power ramp up to QAM

7.4 Upper Modulation QAM

7.5 Lower Modulation QAM

Radio 1A TDM number

7.6 Permanent TDM Traffic
Radio 2A TDM numbera.

Modulation Radio 1A Extra TDM n. Radio 2A Extra TDM n.a.

4QAM-st

4QAM

8PSK

7.7 ACM table profiles 16QAM

32QAM

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

8 Received signal level

8.1 RSL in reference mod. - Branch 1 b dBm

8.2 RSL in reference mod. - Branch 2 a. b. dBm

8.3 RSL in max. mod. - Branch 1 b. dBm

8.4 RSL in max. mod. - Branch 2 a. b. dBm

9 RX quality Link

9.1 Maximum Modulation with ACM Branch 1 c QAM

9.2 Maximum Modulation with ACM Branch 2 a. c. QAM

9.3 S/N max. Mod. in ACM - RX Branch 1 b. d dB

9.4 S/N max. Mod. in ACM - RX Branch 2 a. b. d. dB

MN.00224.E - 018 345

 10 1+1 Coupler (if present)

10.1 Hybrid type Balanced Unbalanced

10.2 Attenuation Branch 1 by factory report (dB) dB

10.3 Attenuation Branch 2 by factory report (dB) dB

11 General settings

11.1 Web LCT Measurements Resolution ___________dB

Auto Branch 1 (if unbalanced hybrid)

11.2 Radio Switch TX Preferential
WAIT TIME = 30s

11.3 Set Active manual operation timeout = 2 s.

12 Cross Connection list

a. Only in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) configurations.

b. Checked by WebLCT indication, in compliance with User Manual Addendum.
c. Checked by WebLCT indication, in compliance with the project report.
d. In case of ACM enabled, indicate S/N measure related to the upper modulation scheme in compliance
with the project report.

Test Check Passed-----> Failed----->

Comments:

Executed by:

Date: for Siae:

346 MN.00224.E - 018

 36.4 COMMISSIONING MEASURES

Configure the Link as defined in the following figure.

36.4.1 Tributary connections stability

Fig.237
Connect an E1 Transmission analyser to the DDF and check NO ERRORS or ALARMS for each E1 tributaries.

Connect all Ethernet tributaries to the router/switch and check NO ALARMS (i.e LAN LOS) for each ETH
tributaries.

Checked 
Item DESCRIPTION OK NOT OK

Check NO ERRORS or ALARMS for each E1, STM-1 and ETH tributaries.
1
Check mechanical stability of the connections.

E1 TRIBUTARY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

ERRORS / ALARMS

E1 TRIBUTARY 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

ERRORS / ALARMS

E1 TRIBUTARY A B

ERRORS / ALARMS

STM-1 1 2

ERRORS / ALARMS

ETH TRIBUTARY 1 2 3 4

ALARMS

Test Check Passed-----> Failed----->

Comments:

Executed by:

Date: for Siae:

MN.00224.E - 018 347

 36.4.2 Link Fade Margin

Configure the Link as defined in the following figure:

Fig.238
Disable the ACM Engine and set the modulation scheme in compliance with the reference modulation by
project.

SIAE Microelettronica radio systems have an embedded PTX manual attenuation (up to 20dB for the ODU
Universal ASN/ASNK, using the automatic Fade Margin procedure by webLCT, and up to 40 for the ODU
Advanced AS-03) in order to attenuate via SW the transmit power and therefore the received field in the
opposite station. If the TX internal attenuation is not enough to verify the Link Fade Margin, there are two
solutions:

• insert a fixed or variable attenuator between the ODU and the antenna (recommended solution).

• verify the Link Fade Margin in the maximum modulation available, only if the Link project report
include all parameters about this modulation (Calculated Fade Margin, RX threshold, etc.).

Fill the following table

.

DESCRIPTION

Fade Margin results

(based on automatic FM procedure by webLct)

Calculated Fade Margin [Real FM] dB

Value returned from LOCAL TX1 to REMOTE RX1 [Real FM verified] dB

Value returned from LOCAL TX1 to REMOTE RX2 [Real FM verified] a

dB

Value returned from LOCAL TX2 to REMOTE RX1 [Real FM verified] a.

dB

Value returned from LOCAL TX2 to REMOTE RX2 [Real FM verified] a. b

dB

a. in 1+1 HSB configuration.

b. in 1+1 FD or 2x(1+0) configuration.

Test Check Passed-----> Failed----->

Comments:

Executed by:

Date: for Siae:

348 MN.00224.E - 018

 36.4.3 Loops and maintenance

Fig.239

All available line loops are explained in the following Figure.

Fig.240

Line Local Loop

Enable tributary PPI 1 and connect a PDH analyser (Tx, Rx) on the local NE tributary E1#1. Set E1#1 to
"Line Loop On".

Fig.241

After the loop no errors are reported on PDH analyser.

Remote Local Loop

Enable tributary E1#1 (on local and remote NE) and connect a PDH analyser (Tx, Rx) on the local NE trib-
utary E1#1. Set on Remote NE E1#1 to "Remote LoopOn".

Fig.242

After the loop no errors are reported on PDH analyser.

MN.00224.E - 018 349

 IF Loop

Enable tributary PPI 1 (on local and remote NE) and connect a PDH analyser (Tx, Rx) on the local NE trib-
utary E1#1 (PPI 1).

Set on IF Loop to "On"

Fig.243

After the loop no errors are reported on PDH analyser.

RF Loop

Enable tributary PPI 1 (on local and remote NE) and connect a PDH analyser (Tx, Rx) on the local NE trib-
utary E1#1 (PPI 1).

Set on RF Loop to "On". (RF loop is available only on AS-03 ODU)

After the loop no errors are reported on PDH analyser.

Test Check Passed-----> Failed----->

Comments:

Executed by:

Date: for Siae:

350 MN.00224.E - 018

 36.5 ETHERNET TEST

IDU Settings

To verify the Ethernet performances set both equipment following this table:

Max Packet size 2048 byte

MAC Learning Vid Basis Enable

GENERAL Switch Parameters Aging Time 300

QinQ Eth Type 0x9100

Radio Packet Fragment Disabled

PORT PARAMETERS

Interface

Port Rate Control M/S Autoneg Master/Slave Flow Control Cable crossover Mac Learning Speed/Duplex

Lan 1 Full Rate Enable Master Disable Auto Enable Auto

Port A Enable Enable

PORT BASED VLAN

Lan 1 Lan 2 Lan 3 Lan 4 Port A Port B

Lan 1 Disable Disable Disable Enable Disable

Lan 2 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable

Lan 3 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable

Lan 4 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable

Port A Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable

Port B --- --- --- --- ---

MN.00224.E - 018 351

 Ethernet Tributary test

Connect the PC as shown in the following figure and set IP Ethernet Address in the same subnetwork of
the MNGT/1 IP Ethernet of the remote terminal.

Connect, by means of a CAT5 cable, LAN1 port to MNGT/1 IP Ethernet port of the remote terminal.

A ping test between the PC and the MNG/1 port of the remote terminal, connecting them directly through
a CAT-5E cable, is required.

Fig.244

RESULT

OK NOT OK

PING test

Test Check Passed-----> Failed----->

Comments:

Executed by:

Date: for Siae:

352 MN.00224.E - 018

 36.5.1 Link Residual BER test

Configure the Link as defined in the following figure:

Fig.245

Checked 
Item DESCRIPTION OK NOT OK

3 Link Residual BER via internal PRBS test set (by Web LCT)

3.1 Unprotected system 1+0: measure >12 hours

3.2 Protected system 1+1: measure >12 hours on Branch 1 (manual switch)

3.3 measure >12 hour on Branch 2 (manual switch)

4 Measure Report (if available)

Values accepted for 12h measure

NO ERRORS

(Guaranteed RBER limit < 1e-12)

Test Check Passed-----> Failed----->

Comments:

Executed by:

Date: for Siae:

MN.00224.E - 018 353

 36.6 FINAL CHECK LIST

Checked 
Item ALARM CABLING (IF REQUIRED) OK NOT OK

5 Alarm cable terminated on terminal block

a
6 Alarms cabled in compliance with the specifications in rule

Check of the functionality of the alarm cabling forcing the error condition on
7
the equipment

a. Alarm list to cable on Customer's demand

Checked 
Item DESCRIPTION OK Not OK

1 Completed equipment

1.1 All the connectors properly tightened

1.2 Antenna fixing properly tightened

1.3 Radio Link System on

1.4 Installation, Commissioning and Integration completely executed

Test Check Passed-----> Failed----->

Comments:

Executed by:

Date: for Siae:

354 MN.00224.E - 018

 36.7 FINAL REPORT

36.7.1 Link activation date

DATE
Item DESCRIPTION
dd/mm/yyyy

1 Radio link activated in service

Notes:

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

MN.00224.E - 018 355

 36.7.2 Certificate

FINAL TEST CERTIFICATE

This certificates that the equipment listed below with the respective order/s has passed the Final Test.

Order number

Equipment Type:

Site / Terminal ID:

Company Date Name Signature

For SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A

SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A.

Via Michelangelo Buonarroti, 21 - 20093 Cologno Monzese, Milano - Italy - Tel +39 0227325.1 - FAX +39 0225391585

www.siaemic.com

356 MN.00224.E - 018

 Section 6.
MAINTENANCE

37 ALARMS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

37.1 GENERAL

In these pages a description of alarms is given in order to help operators to perform equipment trouble-
shooting.

37.2 TROUBLESHOOTING

Troubleshooting must be performed when one of the following situations occurs:

• alarms are present (revealed by front LEDs, WebLCT or NMS5UX/NMS5LX)

• traffic is interrupted

• Rx signal quality and/or Rx signal level are lower than the expected

• performances (SE, SES,BBE, .....) are not the expected ones.

By means of alarms, historical alarms and “Performance monitoring” the operator can imagine the cause
of the problem. By means of loops, causes can be confirmed and a solution can be applied.

37.2.1 Front LEDs

• Green: Power on

• red URG Critical and Major alarms (traffic down, IDU reachability, hardware faulty)

• red NURG minor and earning alarms (traffic, quality and configuration problems)

• yellow TEST manual operation active (loops and commands that can cut the link).

MN.00224.E - 018 357

 37.3 SYMPTOMS AND HYPOTHESIS

For troubleshooting it is important to collect following information:

• just one link is alarmed or also others in the same area

• link is down or with Rx quality problems only

• it is a continuous or a fleeting problem

• both link ends are affected or only one of them

• one or all the tributaries/LAN ports are affected by problems

• the problem can be caused or not by weather conditions

• in alarm histories of local and remote side, the same situation is present or not

• any recent operations or commands have been performed over the link, or not

• the link has been without problems for a long time or the link is a “problematic” one

• the link has been just installed or not.

If local investigation is necessary be sure to have:

• spare parts (same code ODUs and IDUs)

• laptop with connection cables and batteries

• this troubleshooting procedure

• BER tester (advisable but not mandatory because ALCplus2e has a software one built-in)

Warning: If power supply alarms are present, these must be faced at first. If test LED is ON, check if any
manual operations that can cut the traffic are present or not.

37.4 TOOLS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING

WEBLCT

Use following WebLCT facilities to investigate on the link:

• status of alarms

• performance monitoring in the last 48h (Rx quality, modulation profile, Rx power)

• configuration

• PRBS/OAM (tools to check continuity of E1 stream or VLAN)

• loops and manual operation

NMS5LX/NMS5UX

Use following NMS5LX/NMS5UX facilities to investigate on the link and/or network:

• status of alarms

• performance monitoring (Rx quality, modulation profile, Rx power)

• configuration

• PRBS/OAM (tools to check continuity of E1 stream or VLAN)

• loops and manual operation.

Warning: refer to proper software manuals for information relevant to these items.

358 MN.00224.E - 018

 Observation

Observation is one more way to investigate. Operator can use:

• front panel LEDs

• Voltmeter reading (Rx power at ODU BNC connector)

• Errors counter or traffic analyser (or any external instrument).

37.5 MULTIPLE ALARMS

Alarms have two “directions”:

• Tx - This line starts in IDU and arrives at ODU output flange: when a situation of more alarms is
occurring, the most significative alarm of them is the lower in Tx direction, all the others are prob-
ably caused by this

• Rx - This line starts in ODU RF flange and arrive at IDU: when a situation of more alarms is occur-
ring, the most significative alarm is the higher in Rx direction, all the others after are probably
caused by this.

Examples

1. “Radio 1A RT VCO Fail” alarm in the ODU gives alarm also in IDU (Rx dir.) ->Demodulator Fail alarm

2. An antenna input < -80dBm -> Rx Power Low -> Demodulator Fail alarm -> Rx Quality warning and
Rx Quality alarm.

ODU ODU
Rx
Cable Most significant alarm Cable
Tx
IDU IDU

Fig.246 - Direction of alarms

37.6 ALCPLUS2E ALARMS

Alarms are divided in groups depending on functionality or hardware module that has the failure or the
problem described by the alarm itself.

In the following paragraphs are describes:

• most common scenarios with the problem that has generated them

• all the alarm groups with:

- name (number of radio branch can vary depending on configuration

- severity

MN.00224.E - 018 359

 - explanation of the alarm

- most common solution of the problem described by the alarm

Eventual concatenations of alarms of that group:

- alarms that cause an alarm in the selected group (parent)

- alarms generated by alarms of that selected group (son)

• quality problems: cause that generates the problem (rain or interferences). An easy example of
troubleshooting using Performance monitoring.

37.6.1 Most common scenarios

IDU-ODU cable cut

Check cable and both connectors

E1 no.1 not working

Check E1 line if E1 is enabled, check E1 trib. if line is connected (E1 disabled).

VLAN 24 not working

Check Ethernet ports settings (also Radio ports).

Rx quality low

Propagation problems or remote Tx low/damaged (check remote).

If ACM is on, the Reduced Capacity alarm is also present.

360 MN.00224.E - 018

 Link down

Propagation problems or remote Tx low/damaged (check remote).

If ACM is on, the Reduced Capacity alarm is also present.

37.6.2 Common alarm group

Tab.40 - Common alarm group

Common Problem Solution

At least one manual operation is

Equip Manual Operation Open Active Manual Op. list
active

LOS in MNGT 1 port (usually disa-

MNGT/1 cable Fail Check cable and port config.
bled)

LOS in MNGT 2 port (usually disa-

MNGT/2 cable Fail Check cable and port config.
bled)

RMON RMON alarm (in NMS5UX only) Check RMON

Communication EOC (E1/Stm1) Check E1/STM1 status/line gener-

EOC missing in selected E1/STM-1
Data Link ator side

IDI E1-G.704 Line side AIS AIS in the E1 (line side) for EOC Check E1 status/E1 generator side

E1 frame for EOC is FAIL (line

IDU E1 - G.704 Line side Fail Check Address config, E1 status
side)

IDU E1 - G.704 Internal side AIS AIS in the E1 (radio side) for EOC Check E1 status/E1 generator side

E1 frame for EOC is FAIL (radio

IDU E1 - G.704 Internal side Fail Check Address config, E1 status
side)

Radio - Communic Radio EOC Data

EOC missing on radio link Chcek Address config/Link down
Link

Fan Fan problem on the back panel Substitute IDU

MN.00224.E - 018 361

 Common Problem Solution

RADIO - Local-Remote Term Set- Local and Remote units have dif- Check Mod-Capc.-E1perm-
up Mismatch ferent config E1extra setting

RADIO - Rescue Setup Active If LOC/REM have same config:

Equip in Rescue status
Alarm Link down

Power Supply 1 No proper power in power conn. 1 Check connectors/batteries

Power Supply 2 No proper power in power conn. 2 Check connectors/batteries

One Plus One IDU Active Status IDU status in 1+1 XPIC config only

One Plus One Configuration Mis- Wrong IDU status in 1+1 XPIC
Check configuration
match config only

Alarms in Other IDU in 1+1 XPIC

One Plus One Twin Alarmed Check twin IDU alarms
config.

Xpic Procedure: RADIO<...>Xpic Check V or H streams status: Rx

XPIC not working: FMP is active
disable problems

Remote Xpic Procedure: Tx- In remote unit there’s a TxOff Check the rem Rx with TxOff: Rx
<...>Off caused by FMP active problems

Packets loss on Radio port or ex-

Ethernet Traffic Concatenation fail Check streams status/ODUs sta-
cessive propag delay in one
on radio link tus
stream

Ethernet Compr./Fragm. Config Local and Remote have different Check compression and fragmen-
Mismatch compr/fragm setting tation setting

One Plus One Preferential IDU is Working IDU is not the preferen-
Check twin IDU alarms
not active tial

Propagation on branch problem.

Check the stand-by ODU:
In twin IDU TxFail alarm is active:
One Plus One Transmitter switch problems in the branch or ODU in-
the alarm remain active until a re-
on Remote Terminal BER termod.
set is performed by operator
If decreasing Tx power ODI is
OK...chaneg ODU

IEEE 1588 PTP Configuration Mis- Local 1588 setting is different

Check 1588 configuration
match from the remote

PPS signal in slave IDU has drift Chcek 1588 configuration or port
IEEE 1588 PTP PPS Unlock
problems status

Chcek VLAN, Domain and G8032

G8032 Ring: <...> Port:<...> CCM message from Ring <...> not
setting.
Alarm Status received from remote
Check Ethernet connection

PWE3: Local TDM Down channel The Ethernet port relevant local E1 Check and solve Ethernet port
<...> in uplink is alarmed problems

PWE3: Remote TDM Down channel The Ethernet port relevant remote Check and solve Ethernet port
<...> E1 in uplink is alarmed problems

PWE3: Local PSN Down channel The Ethernet port relevant local E1 Check and solve Ethernet port
<...> in downlink is alarmed problems

PWE3: Remote PSN Down channel The Ethernet port relevant remote Check and solve Ethernet port
<...> E1 in downlink is alarmed problems

OAM-FM MA <...> MEP Id:<...> Check VLAN config and/or VLAN

CCM not received by local MEP
Fail pathdown

362 MN.00224.E - 018

 Common group alarms - Concatenations

Alarms that generate them and alarms caused by them.

Tab.41 - Common group alarms - Concatenations

This alarm causes a This alarm is caused by a

Common Group Alarms
Common Group Alarm Common Group Alarm

E1 LOS IDU E1 - G.704 Line side Fail a

a.
E1 LOS IDU E1 - G.704 Internal side Fail
a.
E1 LOS Comminc EOC (E1/Stm1) Data Link

Wrong Link ID RADIO-Communic Radio EC Data Link

Telemetry fail Rescue setup

Fan Temperature

a. If the IDU is managed by means of an E1 TimeSlot used as a management channel.

37.6.3 ETH LAN group alarms

Tab.42 - ETH LAN group alarms

ETH LAN Problem Solution

Check configuration and LAN

IDU <...> Loss of Signal Loss of Signal in indicated LAN port
status

IDU <...> Physical Coding Check configuration and LAN

Sync error (GE frame not aligned)
Sublayer Sync status

IDU <...> Unresolved Check configuration and LAN

LAN interface autonegot. failed
Autonegotiation status

IDU <...> Link Loss For- Check LAN status (in local and re-
Link Loss Forwarding in indicated port
warding mote unit)

IDU <...> Master-Slave Check configuration and LAN sta-

Gigabit Master/Slave config error
Config fault tus, SETS config error

IDU <...> LACP protocol Check config and status in LANs

Line trunk not working
down involved in the trunk

ETH LAN group alarms - Concatenations

Alarms that generate them and alarms caused by them.

Tab.43 - ETH LAN group alarms - Concatenations

This alarm causes a This alarm is caused by a

ETH LAN Group Alarms
ETH LAN Group Alarm ETH LAN Group Alarm

LTI (if the LAN port is selected as

IDU <LAN...> Loss of Signal
synch. source)

MN.00224.E - 018 363

 37.6.4 IDU group alarms

Tab.44 - IDU group alarms

IDU Problem Solution

IDU Board Trib. <...> Loss of Signal in E1 (Inversion a. of the E1 enabled without sign./E1 disa-
Signal Loss a LOS) bled with sign.

Check equipment connected to

IDU Trib <...> Ais AIS in E1 input from line side
IDU line, check E1 status

Check equipment connected to

IDU Trib. <...> Ber5 BER 10-5 in E1
IDU line

IDU Trib. <...> Check equipment connected to

Loss of frame in E1
Out of Frame IDU line

IDU Trib. <...> Check equipment connected to

Loss of multiframe in E1
Out of Multiframe IDU line

Check equipment connected to

IDU Trib. <...> Rx AIS AIS in E1 line output when LOS occurs
rem IDU line

Sleep problems in E1 used in re-timing

IDU Trib. <...> Re-Timing Check E1, use another E1 line
mode

IDU BRANCH-<...> Modulator not working/low quality or no IDU loop: if alarm is still active
Modulator Fail input substitute IDU

Check IF cable, ODU and remote

IDU BRANCH-<...> Demodulator not working or low quality/
station. IDU loop: if alarm is still
Demodulator Fail no Rx
active substitute IDU

BRANCH-<...> ODU-IDU Check IF cable, if OK -> IDU is

ODU-IDU communications
Communication Fail faulty

Local IDU Alarm Synthesis Alarms in local IDU Check local IDU status

REMOTE IDU Alarm

Alarms in remote IDU Check remote IDU status
Synthesis

IDU Board IDU Check obstructions in the box/fan

IDU T>75°C
Temperature status

IDU Trib. <...> Protection Check previous radio branches

E1 switched towards other radio branch
Alarm status

a. LOS: LOS inversion OFF - LOS is ON when E1 is enabled with no signal entering
LOS inversion ON - LOS is ON when E1 is enabled with no signal entering and when E1
is disabled with signal entering.

IDU group alarms - Concatenations

Alarms that generate them and alarms caused by them.

Tab.45 - IDU group alarms - Concatenations

This alarm causes a This alarm is caused by a

IDU Group Alarms
IDU Group Alarm IDU Group Alarm

Fan Temperature

E1 LOS G.704 E1 EOC Data link

E1 LOS E1 G.704 line side fail

E1 LOS E1 G.704 radio side fail

364 MN.00224.E - 018

 This alarm causes a This alarm is caused by a
IDU Group Alarms
IDU Group Alarm IDU Group Alarm

E1 Rx AIS G.704 E1 line EOC

LTI (if the E1 is selected as synch.

E1 LOS
source)

37.6.5 Node group alarms

Tab.46 - Node group alarms

Node Problem Solution

NBUS signal is missing, check con-

Node NB <...> Signal loss NBUS cable missing
nectors and cables

Node NB <...> Loss of

FAW not recognized Substitute the IDU
frame

Node NB <...> MS AIS MSAIS in NBUS frame payload Substitute the IDU

Node NB <...> Fix NBUS connection order

Wrong NBUS connection order
Check identifier (NB1IDUx->NB2IDUx+1)

Ethernet Nodal Configura- Check node configuration and

Wrong LAN node configuration
tion Mismatch <...> cables

Examples:

1. Node composed by a minimum of 2 and maximum of 8 elements interconnected only by TDM nodal
BUS

2. Node composed by a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 8 elements interconnected only by Ethernet

nodal Bus

MN.00224.E - 018 365

 3. Node composed by a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 8 elements interconnected by Ethernet nodal
Bus and TDM nodal bus

4. Node composed by 8 elements interconnected by Ethernet nodal Bus and 2 elements interconnected
by TDM nodal bus

5. Node composed by 8 elements interconnected by TDM nodal bus and 2 elements interconnected by
Ethernet nodal bus.

Only these five configurations are correct. Any mistake causes following alarms:

• Node NB <...> Check identifier

and/or

• Ethernet Nodal config mismatch.

37.6.6 Plug-in module group alarms

Tab.47 - Plug-in module group alarms

Plug-in module Problem Solution

IDU Board <...> Plug-in

Plug-in module has been switched on/off
module Status

IDU Board <...> Plug-in

Plug-in module not managed Substitute SFP module
module Mismatch

366 MN.00224.E - 018

 Plug-in module Problem Solution

IDU Board <...> Plug-in

Plug-in module not detected/not working Substitute SFP module
module Fail

IDU Board <...> Plug-in Check cable connected to SFP

No signal received by SFP module
module Loss of Signal module

37.6.7 Radio group alarms

Tab.48 - Radio group alarms

Radio Problem Solution

Check remote station/LinkID

Radio <...> Link Id Wrong LinkID
config (local and remote)

Radio <...> Link Telemetry Check local station/propagation/

Radio Link down (traffic is interrupted)
Fail remote station

Radio <...>Reserve Radio Check local station and (in Freq.

Branch Selected in Rever- Radio Link is using reserve branch Div.) remote pref. Branch.
tive Mode Substitute ODU just in case.

Propagation or branch problem.

IDU TxFail alarm is active: the alarm re- Check the ODU in stand-by: prob-
Tx Switch on Remote term
main active until a reset is performed by lems in the branch or ODU inter-
BER
operator mod. If decreasing Tx power ODU
is OK ... change ODU

PRBS is not receiving the expected pat- Check radio link/no loop active/re-
IDU PRBS Fail
tern mote PRBS off

Radio <...> Plug-in module Check Link parameters/propaga-

Actual modul. profile is not the Upper
Loss of Signal tion status

Warning: Radio group alarms are relevant to the WHOLE RADIO LINK, not relevant to a specific module
only.

Radio group alarms - Concatenations

Alarms that generate them and alarms caused by them.

Tab.49 - Radio group alarms - Concatenations

This alarm causes a This alarm is caused by a

Radio Group Alarms
Radio Group Alarm Radio Group Alarm

Link Telemetry fail Radio EOC data link

Link Telemetry fail Rescue setup a

LinkID Link Telemetry fail

a. If Synchronisation Setup Protocol is enabled on local and remote IDUs.

MN.00224.E - 018 367

 37.6.8 RIM group alarms

Tab.50 - RIM group alarms

RIM Problem Solution

BRANCH <...> RIM Power Check batteries and cables,

IDU power supply in failure
Supply if OK -> IDU in failure

BRANCH <...> IDU-ODU Check IF cable/connectors,

IF cable cut or connectors damaged
Cable Open if OK -> ODU in failure

BRANCH <...> IDU-ODU Check IF cable/connectors,

IF cable short or connectors shorted
Cable Short if OK -> ODU in failure

BRANCH <...> Local RIM

At least one alarm in local RIM Check local station
Alarm Synthesis

BRANCH <...> REMOTE

At least one alarm in remote RIM Check remote station
RIM Alarm Synthesis

In this group are present alarms coming from PSU failure or from:

• Tx direction - none

• Rx direction - alarms in previous module (IDU-ODU cable, ODU) or external failure (bad propagation
or remote alarmed or no remote).
Observation

If Cable Open and Cable Short alarms are active at the same time, it means that the IDU is connected to
a weak battery that is not able to give enough voltage and enough current (also Power Supply alarm is
active).

37.6.9 RT group alarms

Tab.51 - RT group alarms

RT Problem Solution

BRANCH <...> RT Rx Check Loc General Preset, Rem

Rx power under Rx Signal Level threshold
Power Low Tx, propagation

RT failure if Tx is ON -> replace

BRANCH <...> RT Tx Power Tx level low a, Tx off (man. Op.)
ODU

BRANCH <...> RT IDU-

No communication between IDU and ODU Check IF cable, if OK ODU is faulty
ODU Communication fail

VCO not working, RF channel cannot be

BRANCH <...> RT Vco Fail ODU in failure -> replace ODU
set

Check IDU status (modulator?) ->

BRANCH <...> RT IF Fail No Tx IF towards the ODU
replace IDU

BRANCH <...> Rx IF Out No Rx IF from the ODU ODU in failure -> replace ODU

BRANCH <...> RT LOCAL

At least an ODU alarm in loc station
ODU Alarm Synthesis

BRANCH <...> RT REMOTE Open WebLCT and check rem

At least an ODU alarm in rem station
ODU Alarm Synthesis alarms

1 Rx always Active, Rx 1A is set as

BRANCH <...> Rx Active Local Rx status
preferential

BRANCH <...> Tx Active Local Tx status 2 Tx Active -> 1+1/2+0 config

368 MN.00224.E - 018

 RT Problem Solution

BRANCH <...> Rx Quality Propagation/Interference, check

Very low Rx quality (BER=10-6)
Low Alarm Loc Rx/Rem Tx

BRANCH <...> Rx Quality Propagation/Interference, check

Low Rx quality (BER=10-10)
Low Warning Loc Rx/Rem Tx

BRANCH <...> XPIC Fail A polarization in a XPIC link is down Check radio branches alarms

a. Attenuation in Tx, performed by operator and/or by ATPC, doesn’t affect Tx Power alarm.

In this group are present alarms coming from ODU failure or from:

• Rx direction - external failure (bad propagation/interference or remote alarmed or no remote).

RT group alarms - Concatenations

Alarms that generate them and alarms caused by them.

Tab.52 - RT group alarms - Concatenations

This alarm causes a This alarm is caused by a

RT Group Alarms
RT Group Alarm RT Group Alarm

ManOp: Tx transmitter Off Tx Power Telemetry Fail in remote site

37.6.10 STM-1 group alarms

Tab.53 - STM-1 group alarms

STM-1 Problem Solution

IDU Stm1 <...> Loss of Check line, input and equipment

STM-1 input missing
Signal line side

IDU Stm1 <...> Loss of Check line, input and equipment

FAW not detected
Frame line side

IDU Stm1 <...> B2 Exces- Check line, input and equipment

Very low quality of the STM-1 input
sive Ber line side

IDU Stm1 <...> B2 Signal Check line, input and equipment

Low quality of the STM-1 input
Degrade line side

IDU Stm1 <...> J0 Trace Check settings on local and re-

Wrong J0: J0 is not the expected one
Identifier Mismatch mote IDU

IDU Stm1 <...> Ms Ais AIS in input MSOH Check equipment line side

IDU Stm1 <...> Ms Rdi RDI in input MSOH Check equipment line side

MN.00224.E - 018 369

 STM-1 group alarms - Concatenations

Alarms that generate them and alarms caused by them.

Tab.54 - STM-1 group alarms - Concatenations

This alarm causes a This alarm is caused by a

STM-1 Group Alarms
STM-1 Group Alarm STM-1 Group Alarm

STM-1 LOS LTI (if the STM-1 is a sync source)

37.6.11 SETS group alarms

Tab.55 - SETS group alarms

SETS Problem Solution

T0 missing, IDU is not synchronized by Synch source is missing, check it

BASE BAND Sets T0 Fail
input or change it

T4 missing, output traffic is not synchro- Synch source is missing, check it

BASE BAND Sets T4 Fail
nized or change it

IDU Sets Free Running Equipment in Free running status Check the selected source input

IDU Sets Holdover Equipment in Holdover status Check the selected source input

IDU Sets <...> LTI Alarm LTI: LOS of timing input (no sync source) Check the selected source

Check timing input generator,

IDU Sets <...> Drift Drift on selected timing input
choose another source

IDU Sets <...> Active Sync Status, IDU is synchronized

SETS group alarms - Concatenations

Alarms that generate them and alarms caused by them.

Tab.56 - SETS group alarms - Concatenations

This alarm causes a This alarm is caused by a

SETS Group Alarms
SETS Group Alarm SETS Group Alarm

A trib. LOS (E1/STM-1/NB

LTI
selected as synch source)

Telemetry Fail (Radio se-

LTI
lected as synch source)

LAN port LOS (LAN port se-

LTI
lected as synch source)

370 MN.00224.E - 018

 37.7 TROUBLESHOOTING TEST

Depending the kind of traffic, two different tests can be performed:

• TDM traffic: an internal PRBS generator van be used to transmit a signal that, by means of IF/RF
loops, can be measured (presence and quality)

• Ethernet traffic: two points in the same VLAN can generate packets (CCM messages) one towards
the other. If the MEPs (Maintenance End Point) are situated one in local unit and the other in remote
unit, the Ethernet transmission (ports, setting and radio link) can be tested.

37.7.1 PRBS

The result of a PRBS test where the PRBS generator receives back the same signal is transmitting (by
means of a loop), is to have the PRBS alarm off (named Sync Loss Alarm in PRBS window).

Pay attention that the alarm off (test ok) during the test
and the test off situation (test not active) have the same
colour (grey) in Synch Loss Alarm box.

Fig.247

37.7.2 VLAN test: OAM MEP and CCM

In the same domain (NAME and level), in the same VLAN, MEPs can send each other CCM. In order to test
a VLAN between local and remote, two MEPs (one in local unit and the other in the remote one) are nec-
essary to:

• define the same domain for local and remote unit

• create MEP in local and in the remote unit in the same VLAN (MEPs names must be different)

• enable pulsing (same period for both MEPs)

• crosscheck (assign to a MEP the correct remote one).

CCM direction

• Port 1, 2, 3, 4

- Down - towards the external via LAN port

MN.00224.E - 018 371

 - Up - towards the remote via radio

• Radio port

- Down - towards the remote via radio

- Up - towards the external via LAN port

Fig.248

37.8 LOOPS

Three levels of loops are available:

1. Tributary level (STM1 or E1)

- line side (towards the external line)

- internal side (towards the radio and the remote side)

2. IDU loop - IF signal is looped towards demodulator just before ODU cable connector

- IF loop -> E1 streams are looped

- IF loop (ETH not squelched) -> E1 streams + Ethernet signal are looped

3. RF loop - Tx RF signal is looped back towards IDU just before antenna flange

- IF loop -> E1 streams are looped

- IF loop (ETH not squelched) -> E1 streams + Ethernet signal are looped

Warning: all loops are manual operations, check Timeout before

37.8.1 Results of loops

• In case of 1+1 link, the branch under investigation must be forced active (Tx and Rx) by means of
the Radio Switch commands

• After these forcings, loops can be performed

372 MN.00224.E - 018

 • Loops can be used:

- with PRBS E1 test signal - if PRBS alarm disappears, circuits are OK

- without test signal - if alarms of the branch disappear, circuits are OK.

If IF loop gives positive results on both branches, IDU is OK.

If RF loop gives positive results on both branches, IDU, cables and ODUs are OK (the local station is OK)
and eventual problems are given by propagation or in other side.

37.9 QUALITY ALARMS

Present alarms:

• Rx Quality Warning BER<10-10

• Rx Quality Alarm BER<10-6

In order to understand why quality alarms are present, RxPwr performance window must be used (in NMS,
WebLCT, SCT).

Local status

Rx levels are low.... and before? From RxPWR table it is possible to see that in the
last 15min record Rx level is <-80dBm but in previous records Rx levelwas higher.
From the situation the reason of quality problem is rain (...f>10Ghz).
If the two alarms are present during a high Rx level period (Rx level >-50dBm) the
quality fall should be caused by interference.Investigate about.

If the problem suggests rain or other weather related fading condition and
it matches the prevailing weather conditions, do not perform any further
action until the situation gets better.

Usage of Px/Pwr window is important because troubleshooting can be performed

also after the problem disappearing....comparing the starting time of the alarms
with older Rx power measurements relevant the alarm period.

Fig.249

MN.00224.E - 018 373

 37.10 RADIO LINK QUALITY PROBLEMS

37.10.1 Radio link affected by fading

This problem is revealed by low Rx level (how much lower depends on the severity of tropospheric phe-
nomena) and consequent low quality in Rx signal, in both directions of the link.

Rain, multipath fading, rain drop depolarization and diffraction cause Reduced capacity notification alarm,
Rx Power low, Rx Quality warning, Rx quality alarm, Telemetry fail.

These alarms are fleeting because of the fluctuating attenuation:

• F>10 GHz the fading is given by rain (for F>30 GHz rain is a serious problem)

• F<10 GHz the fading is given by ducting and multipath.

When propagation problems occur, the link performance will be restored as the weather gets back to nor-
mal and if problems persist (Rx level remain different from normal) the reason must be searched in wrong
antenna disalignment (probably caused by strong wind or snow/ice).

37.10.2 Radio link affected by interference

Radio link affected by interference has quality problems in one direction only (possible alarms are Rx Qual-
ity warning, Rx Quality alarm, Telemetry fail increasing the interference severity). Rx level in the interfered
site is not reduced by interference.

When these symptoms occur check if new radio links have been installed in close areas (higher the fre-
quency, smaller the search radius).
In any case interference can be confirmed by a spectrum analyser through a multi-angle investigation per-
formed at antenna side.

374 MN.00224.E - 018

 Section 7.
PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVI-
SION

38 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION

38.1 GENERAL

The radio equipment was designed to be easily programmed and supervised.

The following tools are implemented to the purpose:

• SCT Subnetwork Craft Terminal + WEB LCT Local Craft Terminal. They are used for remote and local
control of a subnetwork consisted of a maximum of 100 radio equipment.

• NMS5–UX Network Management. It is used for the remote control of an entire network consisted of
different SIAE equipment including radio equipment.

For details refer to relevant documentation. SCT/LCT documentation is available as help on–line.

38.2 WEBLCT

Equipment can be locally controlled by an embedded Web Server, the WEB LCT, and an http browser run-
ning on PC.

It is also available a software named SCT that can manage sub networks of SIAE Network Elements.

The hardware platform used by SCT is based on Personal Computer with at least the following character-
istics:

• HD with 100 Mbyte of free space

• Windows XP/Windows Vista

• Flash Player version 8.1 or higher

MN.00224.E - 018 375

 Fault Management

The operator can check the status the equipment through an "Alarm Display Panel" that is automatically
updated by the system.

Alarm records are stored by the equipment in an history log together with all information which could be
of interest for the user, among which:

• event occurrence date and time

• equipment type and address

• unit identification information

• alarm description

• event severity level

The operator can access the history log using different filters.

Equipment Configuration

The configuration parameters the operator can update from the WebLCT are:

• System type (protected or not protected)

• Channel bandwidth

• ACM profiles

• RF channel

• ATPC enable/disable

• ATPC Rx thresholds

• RTPC

• Rx power alarm threshold

• Tributary port enable/disable

• STM-1, VC4 and VC12 parameters

• E1 cross connection matrix

• Ethernet switch parameters

• Synchronisation parameters

• Alarm enable

• Alarm severity

• User inputs and relay configuration

• TMN port configuration

Equipment Maintenance

The main maintenance parameters that the operator can update from the WebLCT are:
• transmitter enable/disable

• carrier only

• loops5 (see Fig.250)

• active state forcing in 1+1 configuration

• PRBS

The following figure shows the loops that can be set from the WEBLCT, for any IDU configuration.

5 Line loops can be done for E1, STM-1 and Ethernet interfaces. Internal loops can be done for E1 and
STM-1 interfaces.

376 MN.00224.E - 018

 Internal
loop (2)

IDU ODU

Line IDU ODU

loop (1) loop (3) loop (4)

1. Line tributary loop

2. Internal tributary loop
3. IDU loop
4. RF loop

Fig.250 - Loop

Software management

A new firmware or a new WEBLCT release can be downloaded from the WEBLCT itself. Actual software re-
lease is reported to the operator.

Performance management

G828, Rx Power, Tx Power and ACM counters are calculated both on radio side and line side

All counters are available on 15 minutes basis and daily, the WEBLCT collects 16 blocks of 15 minutes coun-
ters showing in this way the history of 4 hours.

The user can Start and Stop the Performance Monitoring function.

The user can define a threshold for each counter, when the threshold is crossed an alarm is set by the
equipment, the performance alarm severity can be set by the operator.

Fig.251 reports all the Termination points for the performance monitoring supported by ALplus2.

G828 Radio 1
G828 - 2 Mbit/s Rx&Tx
radio side Power Radio 1
ODU1

G828 - B1 STM-1
G.829 B2 & M1 STM-1 IDU
Line side
Rx&Tx
G828 - 2 Mbit/s ODU2 Power Radio 2
line side
G828 Radio 2

Fig.251 - Termination points for the Performance Monitoring

In addition to what shown in the figure above, the following performance monitoring features are available:

• RMON for Ethernet port statistics, both on tributary and radio side
• ACM performance monitoring counters

MN.00224.E - 018 377

 Security Management

The WEBLCT Administrator creates and manages a set of user accounts, the security information (Pass-
word and User profile) is used for identification, authentication purpose.

Two operator levels are enabled depending on the profile assigned to the operator:

• System: read and write user

• RLOM: read only user.

378 MN.00224.E - 018

 Section 8.
COMPOSITION

39 COMPOSITION OF ALPLUS2 IDU

39.1 GENERAL

The ALplus2 IDU is available in following versions:

• 1RU 1+0

• 1RU 1+1

• 1RU 2+0
All the units consist of plug-in modules as LIM/RIM/Controller that can individually be replaced.

Module part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without notice.

39.2 IDU PART NUMBER

Every version is identified by a specific part number shown on a label (see Fig.254) attached on IDU, top
left side. Important power supply informations are also written.

The P/N consists of seven digits with the following meaning:

MN.00224.E - 018 379

 Tab.57- IDU part number

Digit Letter/number Meaning

Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical

1 G
structure

2 A AL equipment

3 I Indoor installation

0165 Modular 1+0 - 1 unit - 16E1 + 2xSTM1 + 3GE

4 to 7
0166 Modular 1+1 - 1 unit - 16E1 + 2xSTM1 + 3GE

39.3 COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT

1+0/1+1/2+0 Ethernet version

The IDU consists of LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER modules. Each module is identified through internal label indi-
cating the relevant P/N.

The P/Ns are the following:

- LIM
- RIM

- CONTROLLER.

1 2 3 ON 48V
SPEED
PoE
ACT FAIL
LINK
+

10-100-1000 BaseT/100-1000 BaseX 1 STM1 2 Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16

-
LINK LINK IDU ODU
ACT ACT WAY
SIDE
REM TEST
LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT MNGT/1 MNGT/2 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s

Fig.252 - IDU GAI0165

1 2 3 ON 48V
SPEED
PoE
ACT FAIL
LINK
+

10-100-1000 BaseT/100-1000 BaseX 1 STM1 2 Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16

-
LINK LINK IDU ODU 48V
ACT ACT WAY
SIDE
+

REM TEST
LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT MNGT/1 MNGT/2 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
-

Fig.253 - IDU GAI0166

380 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.254 - IDU P/N

MN.00224.E - 018 381

 40 COMPOSITION OF ALCPLUS2 IDU

40.1 GENERAL

The ALCplus2 IDU is available in many versions depending on he kind and the number of user connections
and facilities. The versions are listed in the following chapter and are offered in two different configuration:

• 1RU 1+0

• 1RU 1+1.
• All of them consist of a single unit.

• Unit part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without no-
tice.

40.2 IDU PART NUMBER

Every version is identified by a specific part number shown on a label (seeFig.254) attached on IDU, top
left side. Important power supply informations are also written.

• ALCplus2 1+0 4GE 2xE1 GAI0157 (see Fig.255)

• ALCplus2 1+1 4GE 2xE1 GAI0152 (see Fig.256)

• ALCplus2 1+0 4GE 18xE1 GAI0155 (see Fig.257)

• ALCplus2 1+1 4GE 18xE1 GAI0156 (see Fig.258)

• ALCplus2 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 GAI0169 (see Fig.259)

• ALCplus2 1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 GAI0168 (see Fig.260)

• ALCplus2 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 Nodal GAI0163 (see Fig.261)

• ALCplus2 1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 Nodal GAI0162 (see Fig.262)

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 Trib. B

2
M 3.15A
250VAC 48VDC
MNGT LAN 3 LAN 4 NURG URG
1 LCT
SW
+

GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A SD USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.255 - ALCplus2 1+0

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 Trib. B

2 2
M 3.15A
250VAC
MNGT 48VDC
LAN 3 LAN 4 NURG URG
1 LCT 1 2 1
SW
+

GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A SD USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.256 - ALCplus2 1+1

382 MN.00224.E - 018

 YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16

2
M 3.15A
250VAC 48VDC
MNGT LAN 3 LAN 4 NURG URG
1 LCT
SW

+
GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A SD USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.257 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp 16E1

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16

2 2
M 3.15A
250VAC
MNGT 48VDC
LAN 3 LAN 4 NURG URG
1 LCT 1 2 1
SW

+
GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A SD USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.258 - ALCplus2 1+1 exp 16E1

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 STM1 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16 Trib. 17-24 Trib. 25-32
1 2
2
ON M 3.15A 48V
MNGT LAN 3 LAN 4 250V
NURG URG
1 LCT
SW
-

+
GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A SD USER IN/OUT TEST ON

Fig.259 - ALCplus2 1+0 32E1

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 STM1 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16 Trib. 17-24 Trib. 25-32
1 2 2
2
ON M 3.15A
MNGT 48V
LAN 3 LAN 4 NURG URG 250V
1 LCT 1 2 1
SW
-
+
GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A SD USER IN/OUT TEST ON

Fig.260 - ALCplus2 1+1 32E1

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 STM1 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16
1 2 1 2
2
M 3.15A
ON 250VAC 48VDC
MNGT NBUS
LAN 3 LAN 4 NURG URG
1 LCT
SW
+

GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A SD USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.261 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp nodal

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 STM1 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16
1 2 1 2
2 2
M 3.15A
ON 250VAC
MNGT NBUS 48VDC
LAN 3 LAN 4 NURG URG
1 LCT 1 2 1
SW
+

GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A SD USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.262 - ALCplus2 1+1 exp nodal

MN.00224.E - 018 383

 41 COMPOSITION OF ALCPLUS2E IDU

41.1 GENERAL

The ALCplus2e IDU is available in many versions depending on he kind and the number of user connections
and facilities.

The versions are listed in the following chapter and are offered in two different configuration:

• 1RU 1+0
• 1RU 1+1.

• Unit part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without no-
tice.

41.2 IDU PART NUMBER

Every version is identified by a specific part number shown on a label (seeFig.254) attached on IDU, top
left side. Important power supply informations are also written.

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1 GAI0178 See Fig.263

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 GAI0177 See Fig.264

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL GAI0176 See Fig.265

1+0
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1 EPP GAI0189 See Fig.263

EPP ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 EPP GAI0188 See Fig.264

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL EPP GAI0187 See Fig.265

ALCplus2 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1 GAI0175 See Fig.266.

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 GAI0174 See Fig.267

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL GAI0173 See Fig.268

2+0/1+1
ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1 EPP GAI0186 See Fig.266

ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 EPP GAI0185 See Fig.267

EPP
ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1 NODAL
GAI0184 See Fig.268
EPP

384 MN.00224.E - 018

 ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 2xE1 GAI0172 See Fig.266

ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 GAI0171 See Fig.267

ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1

GAI0170 See Fig.268
2+0 or NODAL
XPIC 1+0 XPIC
ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 2xE1 EPP GAI0183 See Fig.266
1+1 XPIC
ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1
GAI0182 See Fig.267
EPP EPP

ALCplus2e 2+0 or 1+0 XPIC 4GE 18xE1 2xSTM1

GAI0181 See Fig.268.
NODAL EPP

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 GAI0196 See Fig.269

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 GAI0209 See Fig.264

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL GAI0208 See Fig.265

1+0
ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 EPP GAI0195 See Fig.269.

EPP ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP GAI0211 See Fig.264

ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL GAI0210 See Fig.265

ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 18E1 GAI0194 See Fig.269

ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 GAI0205 See Fig.267

ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL GAI0204 See Fig.268

1+1
ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 18E1 EPP GAI0197 See Fig.269

EPP ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP GAI0207 See Fig.267

ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL GAI0206 See Fig.269

Hw
PWE3 1+0 EPP ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 PWE3 GAI0198 See Fig.269
ready

Hw
PWE3 2+0/1+1 EPP ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18E1 EPP PWE3 GAI0199 See Fig.269
ready

Hw
PWE3 2+0 EPP ALFCplus2e 2+0 XPIC 4GE 18E1 EPP PWE3 GAI0200 See Fig.269
ready

Hw
STM1 bulk
PWE3 1+0 EPP ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP PWE3 GAI0201 See Fig.264
transmission
ready

Hw
STM1 bulk ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP
PWE3 2+0/1+1 EPP GAI0202 See Fig.264
transmission PWE3
ready

Hw
STM1 bulk ALCplus2E 2+0 XPIC 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 EPP
PWE3 2+0 EPP GAI0203 See Fig.264
transmission PWE3
ready

MN.00224.E - 018 385

 YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 Trib. B

2 M 3.15A
250V 48V
MNGT LAN 3 LAN 4 NURG URG
1
LCT
R SW

+
GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.263 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 STM1 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16 Trib. 17-24 Trib. 25-32
1 2
2
ON M 3.15A 48V
MNGT LAN 3 LAN 4 250V
NURG URG
1
LCT
R SW

+
GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.264 - ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 STM1 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16
1 2 1 2
2 M 3.15A
ON 250V 48V
MNGT NBUS
LAN 3 LAN 4 NURG URG
1
LCT
R SW

+
GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.265 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 Trib. B

2
2 M 3.15A
250V
MNGT 1 2 48V
LAN 3 LAN 4 NURG URG
1 1
LCT
R SW

+
GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.266 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 STM1 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16 Trib. 17-24 Trib. 25-32
1 2 2
2
ON M 3.15A 48V
MNGT LAN 3 LAN 4 1 2 250V
NURG URG
1 1
LCT
R SW
+

GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.267 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 STM1 Trib. B Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16
1 2 1 2
2
2 M 3.15A
ON 250V
MNGT NBUS 48V
LAN 3 LAN 4 1 2 NURG URG
1 1
LCT
R SW
+

GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A USER IN/OUT TEST ON -

Fig.268 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL

YELLOW SPEED LAN 2 LAN 4 Trib. 1-8 Trib. B Trib. 9-16

2
2
M 3.15A 48V
MNGT LAN 3 LAN 4 1 2 250V
NURG URG
1 1
LCT
R SW
-
+

GREEN LINK LAN 1 LAN 3 Trib. A SD USER IN/OUT TEST ON

Fig.269 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1

386 MN.00224.E - 018

 42 COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT

42.1 GENERAL

The ODU consists of a mechanical structure that houses all the transceiver circuitry. In 1+1 HSB version
the connection to the antenna is performed through a passive hybrid.

Both transceiver and hybrid are offered in different versions depending on the operating bands, the anten-
na configuration etc...

A label (see Fig.270) attached on the ODU structure shows the most significant parameters as go/return
frequency value, subband, operating band and part number.

Part number identifies the ODU type. ODU description in the following tables shows frequency, go-return,
channel and capacity if specified.

For example:

• ODU AS 11/530 ITU CH9L 2xSTM1 means:

ODU 11 GHz band frequency, 530 MHz go-return, CH9 Low fixed preset, 2xSTM1 capacity

• ODU AS 23/1008 SB 2H means:

ODU 23 GHz band frequency, 1008 MHz go-return, 2 high subband.
In Tab.58, Tab.59 and Tab.60 various ODU versions and hybrid part number are listed.

Part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without notice.

Tab.58 - Part number and description

RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU AS6L CH=1H GE9185

ODU AS6L CH=1H GE9185-03

ODU AS6L CH=1L GE9184

ODU AS6L CH=1L GE9184-03

ODU AS6L CH=2H GE9187

ODU AS6L CH=2H GE9187-03

ODU AS6L CH=2L GE9186

ODU AS6L CH=2L GE9186-03

ODU AS6L CH=3H GE9189

ODU AS6L CH=3H GE9189-03

ODU AS6L CH=3L GE9188

ODU AS6L CH=3L GE9188-03

MN.00224.E - 018 387

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU AS6L CH=4H GE9191

ODU AS6L CH=4H GE9191-03

ODU AS6L CH=4L GE9190

ODU AS6L CH=4L GE9190-03

ODU AS6L CH=5H GE9193

ODU AS6L CH=5H GE9193-03

ODU AS6L CH=5L GE9192

ODU AS6L CH=5L GE9192-03

ODU AS6L CH=6H GE9195

ODU AS6L CH=6H GE9195-03

ODU AS6L CH=6L GE9194

ODU AS6L CH=6L GE9194-03

ODU AS6L CH=7H GE9197

ODU AS6L CH=7H GE9197-03

ODU AS6L CH=7L GE9196

ODU AS6L CH=7L GE9196-03

ODU AS6L CH=8H GE9199

ODU AS6L CH=8H GE9199-03

6 ODU AS6L CH=8L GE9198

ODU AS6L CH=8L GE9198-03

ODU AS6L SB=1H GE9269

ODU AS6L SB=1H GE9269-03

ODU AS6L SB=1L GE9268

ODU AS6L SB=1L GE9268-03

ODU AS6L SB=2H GE9271

ODU AS6L SB=2H GE9271-03

ODU AS6L SB=2L GE9270

ODU AS6L SB=2L GE9270-03

ODU AS6L SB=3H GE9273

ODU AS6L SB=3H GE9273-03

ODU AS6L SB=3L GE9272

ODU AS6L SB=3L GE9272-03

ODU AS6L SB=4H GE9275

ODU AS6L SB=4H GE9275-03

ODU AS6L SB=4L GE9274

ODU AS6L SB=4L GE9274-03

ODU AS6U CH=1H GE9291

388 MN.00224.E - 018

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU AS6U CH=1H GE9291-03

ODU AS6U CH=1L GE9290

ODU AS6U CH=1L GE9290-03

ODU AS6U CH=2H GE9293

ODU AS6U CH=2H GE9293-03

ODU AS6U CH=2L GE9292

ODU AS6U CH=2L GE9292-03

ODU AS6U CH=3H GE9295

ODU AS6U CH=3H GE9295-03

ODU AS6U CH=3L GE9294

ODU AS6U CH=3L GE9294-03

ODU AS6U CH=4H GE9297

ODU AS6U CH=4H GE9297-03

ODU AS6U CH=4L GE9296

ODU AS6U CH=4L GE9296-03

ODU AS6U CH=5H GE9299

ODU AS6U CH=5H GE9299-03

ODU AS6U CH=5L GE9298

6 ODU AS6U CH=5L GE9298-03

ODU AS6U CH=6H GE9301

ODU AS6U CH=6H GE9301-03

ODU AS6U CH=6L GE9300

ODU AS6U CH=6L GE9300-03

ODU AS6U CH=7H GE9303

ODU AS6U CH=7H GE9303-03

ODU AS6U CH=7L GE9302

ODU AS6U CH=7L GE9302-03

ODU AS6U CH=8H GE9305

ODU AS6U CH=8H GE9305-03

ODU AS6U CH=8L GE9304

ODU AS6U CH=8L GE9304-03

ODU AS6U SB=1H GE9285

ODU AS6U SB=1H GE9285-03

ODU AS6U SB=1L GE9284

ODU AS6U SB=1L GE9284-03

ODU AS6U SB=2H GE9287

ODU AS6U SB=2H GE9287-03

MN.00224.E - 018 389

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU AS6U SB=2L GE9286

ODU AS6U SB=2L GE9286-03

ODU AS6U SB=3H GE9289

ODU AS6U SB=3H GE9289-03

6
ODU AS6U SB=3L GE9288

ODU AS6U SB=3L GE9288-03

ODU AS6U SB=4H GE9331

ODU AS6U SB=4L GE9330

ODU AS7H/245 SB=1H GE9137

ODU AS7H/245 SB=1H GE9137-03

ODU AS7H/245 SB=1L GE9136

ODU AS7H/245 SB=1L GE9136-03

ODU AS7H/245 SB=2H GE9139

ODU AS7H/245 SB=2H GE9139-03

ODU AS7H/245 SB=2L GE9138

ODU AS7H/245 SB=2L GE9138-03

ODU AS7H/245 SB=3H GE9141

ODU AS7H/245 SB=3H GE9141-03

ODU AS7H/245 SB=3L GE9140

ODU AS7H/245 SB=3L GE9140-03

ODU AS7L/161 SB=1H GE9253

ODU AS7L/161 SB=1H GE9253-03

7 ODU AS7L/161 SB=1L GE9252

ODU AS7L/161 SB=1L GE9252-03

ODU AS7L/161 SB=2H GE9255

ODU AS7L/161 SB=2H GE9255-03

ODU AS7L/161 SB=2L GE9254

ODU AS7L/161 SB=2L GE9254-03

ODU AS7L/161 SB=3H GE9257

ODU AS7L/161 SB=3H GE9257-03

ODU AS7L/161 SB=3L GE9256

ODU AS7L/161 SB=3L GE9256-03

ODU AS7L/196 SB=1H GE9009

ODU AS7L/196 SB=1H GE9009-03

ODU AS7L/196 SB=1L GE9008

ODU AS7L/196 SB=1L GE9008-03

ODU AS7L/196 SB=2H GE9011

390 MN.00224.E - 018

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU AS7L/196 SB=2H GE9011-03

ODU AS7L/196 SB=2L GE9010

ODU AS7L/196 SB=2L GE9010-03

ODU AS7L/196 SB=3H GE9013

ODU AS7L/196 SB=3H GE9013-03

ODU AS7L/196 SB=3L GE9012

ODU AS7L/196 SB=3L GE9012-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=10H GE9329

ODU AS7M/154 SB=10L GE9328

ODU AS7M/154 SB=10L GE9328-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=1H GE9173

ODU AS7M/154 SB=1H GE9173-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=1L GE9172

ODU AS7M/154 SB=1L GE9172-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=2H GE9175

ODU AS7M/154 SB=2H GE9175-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=2L GE9174

ODU AS7M/154 SB=2L GE9174-03

7 ODU AS7M/154 SB=3H GE9177

ODU AS7M/154 SB=3H GE9177-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=3L GE9176

ODU AS7M/154 SB=3L GE9176-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=4H GE9179

ODU AS7M/154 SB=4H GE9179-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=4L GE9178

ODU AS7M/154 SB=4L GE9178-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=5H GE9181

ODU AS7M/154 SB=5H GE9181-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=5L GE9180

ODU AS7M/154 SB=5L GE9180-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=7H GE9323

ODU AS7M/154 SB=7H GE9323-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=7L GE9322

ODU AS7M/154 SB=7L GE9322-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=8H GE9325

ODU AS7M/154 SB=8H GE9325-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=8L GE9324

MN.00224.E - 018 391

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU AS7M/154 SB=8L GE9324-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=9H GE9327

ODU AS7M/154 SB=9H GE9327-03

ODU AS7M/154 SB=9L GE9326

ODU AS7M/154 SB=9L GE9326-03

ODU AS7M/161 SB=1H GE9259

ODU AS7M/161 SB=1H GE9259-03

ODU AS7M/161 SB=1L GE9258

ODU AS7M/161 SB=1L GE9258-03

ODU AS7M/161 SB=2H GE9261

ODU AS7M/161 SB=2H GE9261-03

ODU AS7M/161 SB=2L GE9260

ODU AS7M/161 SB=2L GE9260-03

ODU AS7M/161 SB=3H GE9263

7 ODU AS7M/161 SB=3H GE9263-03

ODU AS7M/161 SB=3L GE9262

ODU AS7M/161 SB=3L GE9262-03

ODU AS7M/168 SB=1H GE9015

ODU AS7M/168 SB=1H GE9015-03

ODU AS7M/168 SB=1L GE9014

ODU AS7M/168 SB=1L GE9014-03

ODU AS7M/168 SB=2H GE9017

ODU AS7M/168 SB=2H GE9017-03

ODU AS7M/168 SB=2L GE9016

ODU AS7M/168 SB=2L GE9016-03

ODU AS7M/168 SB=3H GE9019

ODU AS7M/168 SB=3H GE9019-03

ODU AS7M/168 SB=3L GE9018

ODU AS7M/168 SB=3L GE9018-03

ODU AS8/266 SB=1H GE9279

ODU AS8/266 SB=1H GE9279-03

ODU AS8/266 SB=1L GE9278

ODU AS8/266 SB=1L GE9278-03

8
ODU AS8/266 SB=2H GE9281

ODU AS8/266 SB=2H GE9281-03

ODU AS8/266 SB=2L GE9280

ODU AS8/266 SB=2L GE9280-03

392 MN.00224.E - 018

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU AS8/266 SB=3H GE9283

ODU AS8/266 SB=3H GE9283-03

ODU AS8/266 SB=3L GE9282

ODU AS8/266 SB=3L GE9282-03

ODU AS8/310 SB=1H GE9145

ODU AS8/310 SB=1H GE9145-03

ODU AS8/310 SB=1L GE9144

ODU AS8/310 SB=1L GE9144-03

ODU AS8/310 SB=2H GE9147

ODU AS8/310 SB=2H GE9147-03

ODU AS8/310 SB=2L GE9146

ODU AS8/310 SB=2L GE9146-03

ODU AS8/310 SB=3H GE9149

ODU AS8/310 SB=3H GE9149-03

ODU AS8/310 SB=3L GE9148

ODU AS8/310 SB=3L GE9148-03

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=1H GE9051

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=1H GE9051-01

8
ODU AS8/311,32 SB=1H GE9051-03

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=1L GE9050

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=1L GE9050-01

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=1L GE9050-03

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=2H GE9053

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=2H GE9053-01

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=2H GE9053-03

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=2L GE9052

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=2L GE9052-01

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=2L GE9052-03

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=3H GE9265

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=3H GE9265-03

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=3L GE9264

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=3L GE9264-03

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=4H GE9267

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=4H GE9267-03

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=4L GE9266

ODU AS8/311,32 SB=4L GE9266-03

11 ODU AS11 - G/R490 CH=9H GE9129-03

MN.00224.E - 018 393

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU AS11 SB=1H GE9235

ODU AS11 SB=1H GE9235-03

ODU AS11 SB=1L GE9234

ODU AS11 SB=1L GE9234-03

ODU AS11 SB=2H GE9237

ODU AS11 SB=2H GE9237-03

ODU AS11 SB=2L GE9236

ODU AS11 SB=2L GE9236-03

ODU AS11 SB=3H GE9239

ODU AS11 SB=3H GE9239-03

ODU AS11 SB=3L GE9238

ODU AS11 SB=3L GE9238-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=10H GE9131

ODU AS11/490 CH=10L GE9130

ODU AS11/490 CH=11H GE9133

ODU AS11/490 CH=11H GE9133-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=11L GE9132

ODU AS11/490 CH=11L GE9132-03

11 ODU AS11/490 CH=12H GE9135

ODU AS11/490 CH=12L GE9134

ODU AS11/490 CH=1H GE9113

ODU AS11/490 CH=1L GE9112

ODU AS11/490 CH=2H GE9115

ODU AS11/490 CH=2L GE9114

ODU AS11/490 CH=3H GE9117

ODU AS11/490 CH=3L GE9116

ODU AS11/490 CH=4H GE9119

ODU AS11/490 CH=4H GE9119-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=4L GE9118

ODU AS11/490 CH=4L GE9118-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=5H GE9121

ODU AS11/490 CH=5H GE9121-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=5L GE9120

ODU AS11/490 CH=5L GE9120-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=6H GE9123

ODU AS11/490 CH=6L GE9122

ODU AS11/490 CH=7H GE9125

394 MN.00224.E - 018

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU AS11/490 CH=7H GE9125-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=7L GE9124

ODU AS11/490 CH=7L GE9124-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=8H GE9127

ODU AS11/490 CH=8H GE9127-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=8L GE9126

ODU AS11/490 CH=8L GE9126-03

ODU AS11/490 CH=9H GE9129

ODU AS11/490 CH=9L GE9128

ODU AS11/490 CH=9L GE9128-03

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=10H GE9229

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=10L GE9228

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=11H GE9231

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=11L GE9230

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=12H GE9233

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=12L GE9232

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=1H GE9211

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=1L GE9210

11 ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=2H GE9213

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=2L GE9212

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=3H GE9215

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=3H 2XSTM1 GE9333

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=3L GE9214

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=3L 2XSTM1 GE9332

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=4H GE9217

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=4L GE9216

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=5H GE9219

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=5H 2XSTM1 GE9335

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=5L GE9218

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=5L 2XSTM1 GE9334

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=6H GE9221

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=6L GE9220

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=7H GE9223

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=7H 2XSTM1 GE9337

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=7L GE9222

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=7L 2XSTM1 GE9336

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=8H GE9225

MN.00224.E - 018 395

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=8L GE9224

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=9H GE9227

11 ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=9H 2XSTM1 GE9339

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=9L GE9226

ODU AS11/530 ITU CH=9L 2XSTM1 GE9338

ODU AS13 CH=1H GE9151

ODU AS13 CH=1H GE9151-03

ODU AS13 CH=1L GE9150

ODU AS13 CH=1L GE9150-03

ODU AS13 CH=2H GE9153

ODU AS13 CH=2H GE9153-03

ODU AS13 CH=2L GE9152

ODU AS13 CH=2L GE9152-03

ODU AS13 CH=3H GE9155

ODU AS13 CH=3H GE9155-03

ODU AS13 CH=3L GE9154

ODU AS13 CH=3L GE9154-03

ODU AS13 CH=4H GE9157

ODU AS13 CH=4H GE9157-03

ODU AS13 CH=4L GE9156

ODU AS13 CH=4L GE9156-03

13
ODU AS13 CH=5H GE9159

ODU AS13 CH=5H GE9159-03

ODU AS13 CH=5L GE9158

ODU AS13 CH=5L GE9158-03

ODU AS13 CH=6H GE9161

ODU AS13 CH=6H GE9161-03

ODU AS13 CH=6L GE9160

ODU AS13 CH=6L GE9160-03

ODU AS13 CH=7H GE9163

ODU AS13 CH=7H GE9163-03

ODU AS13 CH=7L GE9162

ODU AS13 CH=7L GE9162-03

ODU AS13 CH=8H GE9165

ODU AS13 CH=8H GE9165-03

ODU AS13 CH=8L GE9164

ODU AS13 CH=8L GE9164-03

396 MN.00224.E - 018

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU AS13 SB=1H GE9021

ODU AS13 SB=1H GE9021-03

ODU AS13 SB=1L GE9020

ODU AS13 SB=1L GE9020-03

ODU AS13 SB=2H GE9023

ODU AS13 SB=2H GE9023-03

ODU AS13 SB=2L GE9022

ODU AS13 SB=2L GE9022-03

13
ODU AS13 SB=3H GE9025

ODU AS13 SB=3H GE9025-03

ODU AS13 SB=3L GE9024

ODU AS13 SB=3L GE9024-03

ODU AS13 SB=4H GE9277

ODU AS13 SB=4H GE9277-03

ODU AS13 SB=4L GE9276

ODU AS13 SB=4L GE9276-03

ODU AS15 CH=1H GE9105

ODU AS15 CH=1L GE9104

ODU AS15 CH=2H GE9107

ODU AS15 CH=2L GE9106

ODU AS15 CH=3H GE9109

ODU AS15 CH=3L GE9108

ODU AS15 CH=4H GE9111

ODU AS15 CH=4L GE9110

ODU AS15/315 /322 SB=3H GE9205

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=1H GE9201

15 ODU AS15/315/322 SB=1H GE9201-03

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=1L GE9200

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=1L GE9200-03

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=1L GE9207-03

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=2H GE9203

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=2H GE9203-03

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=2L GE9202

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=2L GE9202-03

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=3H GE9205-03

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=3L GE9204

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=3L GE9204-03

MN.00224.E - 018 397

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=4H GE9207

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=4L GE9206

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=4L GE9206-03

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=5H GE9209

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=5H GE9209-03

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=5L GE9208

ODU AS15/315/322 SB=5L GE9208-03

ODU AS15/420 SB=1H GE9027

ODU AS15/420 SB=1H GE9027-03

ODU AS15/420 SB=1L GE9026

ODU AS15/420 SB=1L GE9026-03

ODU AS15/420 SB=2H GE9029

ODU AS15/420 SB=2H GE9029-03

ODU AS15/420 SB=2L GE9028

ODU AS15/420 SB=2L GE9028-03

ODU AS15/420 SB=3H GE9031

ODU AS15/420 SB=3H GE9031-03

ODU AS15/420 SB=3L GE9030

15 ODU AS15/420 SB=3L GE9030-03

ODU AS15/420 SB=4H GE9033

ODU AS15/420 SB=4H GE9033-03

ODU AS15/420 SB=4L GE9032

ODU AS15/420 SB=4L GE9032-03

ODU AS15/490 SB=1H GE9035

ODU AS15/490 SB=1H GE9035-03

ODU AS15/490 SB=1L GE9034

ODU AS15/490 SB=1L GE9034-03

ODU AS15/490 SB=2H GE9037

ODU AS15/490 SB=2H GE9037-03

ODU AS15/490 SB=2L GE9036

ODU AS15/490 SB=2L GE9036-03

ODU AS15/490 SB=3H GE9039

ODU AS15/490 SB=3H GE9039-03

ODU AS15/490 SB=3L GE9038

ODU AS15/490 SB=3L GE9038-03

ODU AS15/490 SB=4H GE9041

ODU AS15/490 SB=4H GE9041-03

398 MN.00224.E - 018

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU AS15/490 SB=4L GE9040

ODU AS15/490 SB=4L GE9040-03

ODU AS15/644 SB=1H GE9313

ODU AS15/644 SB=1H GE9313-03

ODU AS15/644 SB=1L GE9312

ODU AS15/644 SB=1L GE9312-03

ODU AS15/644 SB=2H GE9315

ODU AS15/644 SB=2H GE9315-03

ODU AS15/644 SB=2L GE9314

ODU AS15/644 SB=2L GE9314-03

ODU AS15/728 CH=1H GE9105-03

15
ODU AS15/728 CH=1L GE9104-03

ODU AS15/728 CH=2H GE9107-03

ODU AS15/728 CH=2L GE9106-03

ODU AS15/728 CH=3H GE9109-03

ODU AS15/728 CH=3L GE9108-03

ODU AS15/728 CH=4H GE9111-03

ODU AS15/728 CH=4L GE9110-03

ODU AS15/728 SB=1H GE9047

ODU AS15/728 SB=1H GE9047-03

ODU AS15/728 SB=1L GE9046

ODU AS15/728 SB=1L GE9046-03

ODU AS18 CH=10H GE9073

ODU AS18 CH=10L GE9072

ODU AS18 CH=11H GE9075

ODU AS18 CH=11L GE9074

ODU AS18 CH=12H GE9077

ODU AS18 CH=12L GE9076

ODU AS18 CH=13H GE9079

18 ODU AS18 CH=13L GE9078

ODU AS18 CH=14H GE9081

ODU AS18 CH=14L GE9080

ODU AS18 CH=15H GE9083

ODU AS18 CH=15L GE9082

ODU AS18 CH=16H GE9085

ODU AS18 CH=16L GE9084

ODU AS18 CH=17H GE9087

MN.00224.E - 018 399

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU AS18 CH=17L GE9086

ODU AS18 CH=1H GE9055

ODU AS18 CH=1L GE9054

ODU AS18 CH=2H GE9057

ODU AS18 CH=2L GE9056

ODU AS18 CH=3H GE9059

ODU AS18 CH=3L GE9058

ODU AS18 CH=4H GE9061

ODU AS18 CH=4L GE9060

ODU AS18 CH=5H GE9063

ODU AS18 CH=5L GE9062

ODU AS18 CH=6H GE9065

ODU AS18 CH=6L GE9064

ODU AS18 CH=7H GE9067

ODU AS18 CH=7L GE9066

ODU AS18 CH=8H GE9069

ODU AS18 CH=8L GE9068

ODU AS18 CH=9H GE9071

18 ODU AS18 CH=9L GE9070

ODU AS18 SB=1H GE9001

ODU AS18 SB=1L GE9000

ODU AS18 SB=2H GE9003

ODU AS18 SB=2L GE9002

ODU AS18 SB=3H GE9005

ODU AS18 SB=3L GE9004

ODU AS18 SB=4H GE9007

ODU AS18 SB=4L GE9006

ODU AS18/1010 CH=10H GE9073-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=10L GE9072-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=11H GE9075-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=11L GE9074-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=12H GE9077-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=12L GE9076-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=13H GE9079-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=13L GE9078-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=14H GE9081-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=14L GE9080-03

400 MN.00224.E - 018

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU AS18/1010 CH=15H GE9083-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=15L GE9082-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=16H GE9085-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=16L GE9084-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=17H GE9087-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=17L GE9086-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=1H GE9055-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=1L GE9054-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=2H GE9057-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=2L GE9056-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=3H GE9059-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=3L GE9058-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=4H GE9061-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=4L GE9060-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=5H GE9063-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=5L GE9062-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=6H GE9065-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=6L GE9064-03

18
ODU AS18/1010 CH=7H GE9067-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=7L GE9066-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=8H GE9069-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=8L GE9068-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=9H GE9071-03

ODU AS18/1010 CH=9L GE9070-03

ODU AS18/1010 SB=1H GE9001-03

ODU AS18/1010 SB=1L GE9000-03

ODU AS18/1010 SB=2H GE9003-03

ODU AS18/1010 SB=2L GE9002-03

ODU AS18/1010 SB=3H GE9005-03

ODU AS18/1010 SB=3L GE9004-03

ODU AS18/1010 SB=4H GE9007-03

ODU AS18/1010 SB=4L GE9006-03

ODU AS18/1560 SB=1H GE9183

ODU AS18/1560 SB=1H GE9183-03

ODU AS18/1560 SB=1L GE9182

ODU AS18/1560 SB=1L GE9182-03

23 ODU AS23/1008 SB=1H GE9171

MN.00224.E - 018 401

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU AS23/1008 SB=1H GE9171-03

ODU AS23/1008 SB=1L GE9170

ODU AS23/1008 SB=1L GE9170-03

ODU AS23/1008 SB=2H GE9049

ODU AS23/1008 SB=2H GE9049-03

ODU AS23/1008 SB=2L GE9048

ODU AS23/1008 SB=2L GE9048-03

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=1H GE9241

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=1H GE9241-03

23 ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=1L GE9240

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=1L GE9240-03

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=2H GE9243

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=2H GE9243-03

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=2L GE9242

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=2L GE9242-03

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=3H GE9245

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=3H GE9245-03

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=3L GE9244

ODU AS23/1200-1232 SB=3L GE9244-03

ODU AS25 SB=1H GE9167

ODU AS25 SB=1H GE9167-03

ODU AS25 SB=1L GE9166

ODU AS25 SB=1L GE9166-03

25
ODU AS25 SB=2H GE9169

ODU AS25 SB=2H GE9169-03

ODU AS25 SB=2L GE9168

ODU AS25 SB=2L GE9168-03

ODU AS32 SB=1H GE9317

ODU AS32 SB=1H GE9317-03

ODU AS32 SB=1L GE9316

ODU AS32 SB=1L GE9316-03

ODU AS32 SB=2H GE9319

32
ODU AS32 SB=2H GE9319-03

ODU AS32 SB=2L GE9318

ODU AS32 SB=2L GE9318-03

ODU AS32 SB=3H GE9321

ODU AS32 SB=3H GE9321-03

402 MN.00224.E - 018

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU AS32 SB=3L GE9320

32
ODU AS32 SB=3L GE9320-03

ODU AS38 SB=1H GE9307

ODU AS38 SB=1H GE9307-03

ODU AS38 SB=1L GE9306

ODU AS38 SB=1L GE9306-03

38
ODU AS38 SB=2H GE9309

ODU AS38 SB=2H GE9309-03

ODU AS38 SB=2L GE9308

ODU AS38 SB=2L GE9308-03

Tab.59 - ODU ASN part number and description

RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU ASN6L SB=1H GE9501

ODU ASN6L SB=1L GE9500

ODU ASN6L SB=2H GE9503

ODU ASN6L SB=2L GE9502

ODU ASN6L SB=3H GE9505

ODU ASN6L SB=3L GE9504

ODU ASN6L SB=4H GE9507

6
ODU ASN6L SB=4L GE9506

ODU ASN6U SB=1H GE9509

ODU ASN6U SB=1L GE9508

ODU ASN6U SB=2H GE9511

ODU ASN6U SB=2L GE9510

ODU ASN6U SB=3H GE9513

ODU ASN6U SB=3L GE9512

ODU ASN7L/161 SB=1H GE9519

ODU ASN7L/161 SB=1L GE9518

ODU ASN7L/161 SB=2H GE9521

ODU ASN7L/161 SB=2L GE9520

7 ODU ASN7L/161 SB=3H GE9523

ODU ASN7L/161 SB=3L GE9522

ODU ASN7L/196 SB=1H GE9525

ODU ASN7L/196 SB=1L GE9524

ODU ASN7L/196 SB=2H GE9527

MN.00224.E - 018 403

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU ASN7L/196 SB=2L GE9526

ODU ASN7L/196 SB=3H GE9529

ODU ASN7L/196 SB=3L GE9528

ODU ASN7M/154 SB=1H GE9535

ODU ASN7M/154 SB=1L GE9534

ODU ASN7M/154 SB=2H GE9537

ODU ASN7M/154 SB=2L GE9536

ODU ASN7M/154 SB=3H GE9539

ODU ASN7M/154 SB=3L GE9538

7 ODU ASN7M/154 SB=4H GE9541

ODU ASN7M/154 SB=4L GE9540

ODU ASN7M/154 SB=5H GE9543

ODU ASN7M/154 SB=5L GE9542

ODU ASN7M/161 SB=1H GE9545

ODU ASN7M/161 SB=1L GE9544

ODU ASN7M/161 SB=2H GE9547

ODU ASN7M/161 SB=2L GE9546

ODU ASN7M/161 SB=3H GE9549

ODU ASN7M/161 SB=3L GE9548

ODU ASN8/311,32 SB=1H GE9583

ODU ASN8/311,32 SB=1L GE9582

ODU ASN8/311,32 SB=2H GE9585

ODU ASN8/311,32 SB=2L GE9584

8
ODU ASN8/311,32 SB=3H GE9587

ODU ASN8/311,32 SB=3L GE9586

ODU ASN8/311,32 SB=4H GE9589

ODU ASN8/311,32 SB=4L GE9588

ODU ASN10/350 SB=1H GE9601

10
ODU ASN10/350 SB=1L GE9600

ODU ASN13 SB=1H GE9613

ODU ASN13 SB=1L GE9612

ODU ASN13 SB=2H GE9615

ODU ASN13 SB=2L GE9614

13
ODU ASN13 SB=3H GE9617

ODU ASN13 SB=3L GE9616

ODU ASN13 SB=4H GE9619

ODU ASN13 SB=4L GE9618

404 MN.00224.E - 018

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU ASN15 315/322 SB=1H GE9629

ODU ASN15 315/322 SB=1L GE9628

ODU ASN15/420 SB=1H GE9647

ODU ASN15/420 SB=1L GE9646

ODU ASN15/420 SB=2H GE9649

ODU ASN15/420 SB=2L GE9648

ODU ASN15/420 SB=3H GE9651

ODU ASN15/420 SB=3L GE9650

15
ODU ASN15/420 SB=4H GE9653

ODU ASN15/420 SB=4L GE9652

ODU ASN15/644 SB=1H GE8679

ODU ASN15/644 SB=1L GE8678

ODU ASN15/644 SB=2H GE8681

ODU ASN15/644 SB=2L GE8680

ODU ASN15/728 SB=1H GE9691

ODU ASN15/728 SB=1L GE9690

ODU ASN18/1010 SB=1H GE9701

ODU ASN18/1010 SB=1L GE9700

ODU ASN18/1010 SB=2H GE9703

ODU ASN18/1010 SB=2L GE9702

ODU ASN18/1010 SB=3H GE9705

18
ODU ASN18/1010 SB=3L GE9704

ODU ASN18/1010 SB=4H GE9707

ODU ASN18/1010 SB=4L GE9706

ODU ASN18/1560 SB=1H GE9717

ODU ASN18/1560 SB=1L GE9716

ODU ASN23/1008 SB=1H GE9719

ODU ASN23/1008 SB=1L GE9718

ODU ASN23/1008 SB=2H GE9721

ODU ASN23/1008 SB=2L GE9720

ODU ASN23/1200/1232 SB=1H GE9727

23
ODU ASN23/1200/1232 SB=1L GE9726

ODU ASN23/1200/1232 SB=2H GE9729

ODU ASN23/1200/1232 SB=2L GE9728

ODU ASN23/1200/1232 SB=3H GE9731

ODU ASN23/1200/1232 SB=3L GE9730

MN.00224.E - 018 405

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU ASN25 SB=1H GE9737

ODU ASN25 SB=1L GE9736

25
ODU ASN25 SB=2H GE9739

ODU ASN25 SB=2L GE9738

Tab.60 - ODU ASN HP part number and description

RF band in GHz ODU description Part Number

ODU ASN7M/168 CH=5L GE2209

ODU ASN7M/168 CH=5H GE2210

ODU ASN7M/168 CH=4L GE2207

ODU ASN7M/168 CH=4H GE2208

ODU ASN7M/168 CH=3L GE2205

ODU ASN7M/168 CH=3H GE2206

ODU ASN7M/168 CH=2L GE2203

ODU ASN7M/168 CH=2H GE2204

ODU ASN7M/168 CH=1L GE2201

ODU ASN7M/168 CH=1H GE2202

7
ODU ASN7L/196 CH=5L GE2179

ODU ASN7L/196 CH=5H GE2180

ODU ASN7L/196 CH=4L GE2177

ODU ASN7L/196 CH=4H GE2178

ODU ASN7L/196 CH=3L GE2175

ODU ASN7L/196 CH=3H GE2176

ODU ASN7L/196 CH=2L GE2173

ODU ASN7L/196 CH=2H GE2174

ODU ASN7L/196 CH=1L GE2171

ODU ASN7L/196 CH=1H GE2172

406 MN.00224.E - 018

 Tab.61 - ODU ASNK part number and description

RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU ASNK6L/256,04 HP SB=1H GE3501-42

ODU ASNK6L/256,04 HP SB=1L GE3500-42

ODU ASNK6L/256,04 HP SB=2H GE3503-42

ODU ASNK6L/256,04 HP SB=2L GE3502-42

ODU ASNK6L/256,04 HP SB=3H GE3505-42

ODU ASNK6L/256,04 HP SB=3L GE3504-42

ODU ASNK6L/256,04 HP SB=4H GE3507-42

ODU ASNK6L/256,04 HP SB=4L GE3506-42

ODU ASNK6U/340 HP CH=1H GE2101-42

ODU ASNK6U/340 HP CH=1L GE2100-42

ODU ASNK6U/340 HP CH=2H GE2103-42

ODU ASNK6U/340 HP CH=2L GE2102-42

6
ODU ASNK6U/340 HP CH=3H GE2105-42

ODU ASNK6U/340 HP CH=3L GE2104-42

ODU ASNK6U/340 HP CH=4H GE2107-42

ODU ASNK6U/340 HP CH=4L GE2106-42

ODU ASNK6U/340 HP CH=5H GE2109-42

ODU ASNK6U/340 HP CH=5L GE2108-42

ODU ASNK6U/340 HP CH=6H GE2111-42

ODU ASNK6U/340 HP CH=6L GE2110-42

ODU ASNK6U/340 HP CH=7H GE2113-42

ODU ASNK6U/340 HP CH=7L GE2112-42

ODU ASNK6U/340 HP CH=8H GE2115-42

ODU ASNK6U/340 HP CH=8L GE2114-42

ODU ASNK7H/245 SB=1H GE8557-42

ODU ASNK7H/245 SB=1L GE8556-42

ODU ASNK7H/245 SB=2H GE8559-42

ODU ASNK7H/245 SB=2L GE8558-42

ODU ASNK7H/245 SB=3H GE8561-42

ODU ASNK7H/245 SB=3L GE8560-42

7
ODU ASNK7L/154 SB=1H GE8621-42

ODU ASNK7L/154 SB=1L GE8620-42

ODU ASNK7L/154 SB=2H GE8623-42

ODU ASNK7L/154 SB=2L GE8622-42

ODU ASNK7L/154 SB=3H GE8625-42

ODU ASNK7L/154 SB=3L GE8624-42

MN.00224.E - 018 407

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU ASNK7L/154 SB=4H GE8627-42

ODU ASNK7L/154 SB=4L GE8626-42

ODU ASNK7L/161 SB=1H GE8519-42

ODU ASNK7L/161 SB=1L GE8518-42

ODU ASNK7L/161 SB=2H GE8521-42

ODU ASNK7L/161 SB=2L GE8520-42

ODU ASNK7L/161 SB=3H GE8523-42

ODU ASNK7L/161 SB=3L GE8522-42

ODU ASNK7L/161 SB=4H GE8533-42

ODU ASNK7L/161 SB=4L GE8532-42

ODU ASNK7L/196 SB=1H GE8525-42

ODU ASNK7L/196 SB=1L GE8524-42

ODU ASNK7L/196 SB=2H GE8527-42

ODU ASNK7L/196 SB=2L GE8526-42

ODU ASNK7L/196 SB=3H GE8529-42

ODU ASNK7L/196 SB=3L GE8528-42

ODU ASNK7L/196 SB=4H GE8531-42

ODU ASNK7L/196 SB=4L GE8530-42

7 ODU ASNK7LM/161 SB=1H GE8475-42

ODU ASNK7LM/161 SB=1L GE8474-42

ODU ASNK7LM/161 SB=2H GE8477-42

ODU ASNK7LM/161 SB=2L GE8476-42

ODU ASNK7LM/161 SB=3H GE8479-42

ODU ASNK7LM/161 SB=3L GE8478-42

ODU ASNK7LM/161 SB=4H GE8481-42

ODU ASNK7LM/161 SB=4L GE8480-42

ODU ASNK7M/154 SB=1H GE8535-42

ODU ASNK7M/154 SB=1L GE8534-42

ODU ASNK7M/154 SB=2H GE8537-42

ODU ASNK7M/154 SB=2L GE8536-42

ODU ASNK7M/154 SB=3H GE8539-42

ODU ASNK7M/154 SB=3L GE8538-42

ODU ASNK7M/154 SB=4H GE8541-42

ODU ASNK7M/154 SB=4L GE8540-42

ODU ASNK7M/161 SB=1H GE8545-42

ODU ASNK7M/161 SB=1L GE8544-42

ODU ASNK7M/161 SB=2H GE8547-42

408 MN.00224.E - 018

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU ASNK7M/161 SB=2L GE8546-42

ODU ASNK7M/161 SB=3H GE8549-42

ODU ASNK7M/161 SB=3L GE8548-42

ODU ASNK7M/161 SB=5H GE8485-42

ODU ASNK7M/161 SB=5L GE8484-42

ODU ASNK7M/168 HP CH=1H GE2202-42

ODU ASNK7M/168 HP CH=1L GE2201-42

ODU ASNK7M/168 HP CH=2H GE2204-42

ODU ASNK7M/168 HP CH=2L GE2203-42

ODU ASNK7M/168 HP CH=3H GE2206-42

7 ODU ASNK7M/168 HP CH=3L GE2205-42

ODU ASNK7M/168 HP CH=4H GE2208-42

ODU ASNK7M/168 HP CH=4L GE2207-42

ODU ASNK7M/168 HP CH=5H GE2210-42

ODU ASNK7M/168 HP CH=5L GE2209-42

ODU ASNK7M/168 SB=1H GE8551-42

ODU ASNK7M/168 SB=1L GE8550-42

ODU ASNK7M/168 SB=2H GE8553-42

ODU ASNK7M/168 SB=2L GE8552-42

ODU ASNK7M/168 SB=3H GE8555-42

ODU ASNK7M/168 SB=3L GE8554-42

ODU ASNK8/119 SB=1H GE8591-42

ODU ASNK8/119 SB=1L GE8590-42

ODU ASNK8/119 SB=2H GE8593-42

ODU ASNK8/119 SB=2L GE8592-42

ODU ASNK8/119 SB=3H GE8595-42

ODU ASNK8/119 SB=3L GE8594-42

ODU ASNK8/119 SB=4H GE8597-42

ODU ASNK8/119 SB=4L GE8596-42

8
ODU ASNK8/126 SB=1H GE8655-42

ODU ASNK8/126 SB=1L GE8654-42

ODU ASNK8/126 SB=2H GE8657-42

ODU ASNK8/126 SB=2L GE8656-42

ODU ASNK8/126 SB=3H GE8659-42

ODU ASNK8/126 SB=3L GE8658-42

ODU ASNK8/126 SB=4H GE8661-42

ODU ASNK8/126 SB=4L GE8660-42

MN.00224.E - 018 409

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU ASNK8/266 SB=1H GE8571-42

ODU ASNK8/266 SB=1L GE8570-42

ODU ASNK8/266 SB=2H GE8573-42

ODU ASNK8/266 SB=2L GE8572-42

ODU ASNK8/266 SB=3H GE8575-42

ODU ASNK8/266 SB=3L GE8574-42

ODU ASNK8/310 SB=1H GE8577-42

ODU ASNK8/310 SB=1L GE8576-42

ODU ASNK8/310 SB=2H GE8579-42

ODU ASNK8/310 SB=2L GE8578-42

ODU ASNK8/310 SB=3H GE8581-42

8
ODU ASNK8/310 SB=3L GE8580-42

ODU ASNK8/311,32 SB=1H GE8583-42

ODU ASNK8/311,32 SB=1L GE8582-42

ODU ASNK8/311,32 SB=2H GE8585-42

ODU ASNK8/311,32 SB=2L GE8584-42

ODU ASNK8/311,32 SB=3H GE8587-42

ODU ASNK8/311,32 SB=3L GE8586-42

ODU ASNK8/311,32 SB=4H GE8589-42

ODU ASNK8/311,32 SB=4L GE8588-42

ODU ASNK8/311,32 SB=5H GE8599-42

ODU ASNK8/311,32 SB=5L GE8598-42

ODU ASNK11 HP 490/530 SB=2H GE3609-42

ODU ASNK11 HP 490/530 SB=2L GE3608-42

ODU ASNK11 HP 490/530/500 SB=1H GE3607-42

11
ODU ASNK11 HP 490/530/500 SB=1L GE3606-42

ODU ASNK11 HP 490/530/500 SB=3H GE3611-42

ODU ASNK11 HP 490/530/500 SB=3L GE3610-42

ODU ASNK13/266 SB=1H GE8613-42

ODU ASNK13/266 SB=1L GE8612-42

ODU ASNK13/266 SB=2H GE8615-42

ODU ASNK13/266 SB=2L GE8614-42

13
ODU ASNK13/266 SB=3H GE8617-42

ODU ASNK13/266 SB=3L GE8616-42

ODU ASNK13/266 SB=4H GE8619-42

ODU ASNK13/266 SB=4L GE8618-42

410 MN.00224.E - 018

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU ASNK15/315/322 SB=1H GE8629-42

ODU ASNK15/315/322 SB=1L GE8628-42

ODU ASNK15/315/322 SB=2H GE8631-42

ODU ASNK15/315/322 SB=2L GE8630-42

ODU ASNK15/315/322 SB=3H GE8633-42

ODU ASNK15/315/322 SB=3L GE8632-42

ODU ASNK15/315/322 SB=4H GE8635-42

ODU ASNK15/315/322 SB=4L GE8634-42

ODU ASNK15/315/322 SB=5H GE8637-42

ODU ASNK15/315/322 SB=5L GE8636-42

ODU ASNK15/420 SB=1H GE8647-42

ODU ASNK15/420 SB=1L GE8646-42

ODU ASNK15/420 SB=2H GE8649-42

ODU ASNK15/420 SB=2L GE8648-42

15
ODU ASNK15/420 SB=3H GE8651-42

ODU ASNK15/420 SB=3L GE8650-42

ODU ASNK15/420 SB=4H GE8653-42

ODU ASNK15/420 SB=4L GE8652-42

ODU ASNK15/490 SB=1H GE8663-42

ODU ASNK15/490 SB=1L GE8662-42

ODU ASNK15/490 SB=2H GE8665-42

ODU ASNK15/490 SB=2L GE8664-42

ODU ASNK15/490 SB=3H GE8667-42

ODU ASNK15/490 SB=3L GE8666-42

ODU ASNK15/490 SB=4H GE8669-42

ODU ASNK15/490 SB=4L GE8668-42

ODU ASNK15/728 SB=1H GE8691-42

ODU ASNK15/728 SB=1L GE8690-42

ODU ASNK18/1008/1010 SB=1H GE8701-42

ODU ASNK18/1008/1010 SB=1L GE8700-42

ODU ASNK18/1008/1010 SB=2H GE8703-42

ODU ASNK18/1008/1010 SB=2L GE8702-42

18
ODU ASNK18/1008/1010 SB=3H GE8705-42

ODU ASNK18/1008/1010 SB=3L GE8704-42

ODU ASNK18/1560 SB=1H GE8717-42

ODU ASNK18/1560 SB=1L GE8716-42

MN.00224.E - 018 411

 RF band in GHz ODU description Part number

ODU ASNK23/1008 SB=1H GE8719-42

ODU ASNK23/1008 SB=1L GE8718-42

ODU ASNK23/1008 SB=2H GE8721-42

ODU ASNK23/1008 SB=2L GE8720-42

ODU ASNK23/1200/1232 SB=1H GE8727-42

23
ODU ASNK23/1200/1232 SB=1L GE8726-42

ODU ASNK23/1200/1232 SB=2H GE8729-42

ODU ASNK23/1200/1232 SB=2L GE8728-42

ODU ASNK23/1200/1232 SB=3H GE8731-42

ODU ASNK23/1200/1232 SB=3L GE8730-42

ODU ASNK25/1008 SB=1H GE8737-42

ODU ASNK25/1008 SB=1L GE8736-42

25
ODU ASNK25/1008 SB=2H GE8739-42

ODU ASNK25/1008 SB=2L GE8738-42

ODU ASNK38/1260 SB=1H GE8783-42

ODU ASNK38/1260 SB=1L GE8782-42

38
ODU ASNK38/1260 SB=2H GE8785-42

ODU ASNK38/1260 SB=2L GE8784-42

ODU ASNK42/1500 SB=1H GE8791-42

ODU ASNK42/1500 SB=1L GE8790-42

ODU ASNK42/1500 SB=2H GE8793-42

42
ODU ASNK42/1500 SB=2L GE8792-42

ODU ASNK42/1500 SB=3H GE8795-42

ODU ASNK42/1500 SB=3L GE8794-42

Fig.270 - Label attached on the ODU mechanical body AL

412 MN.00224.E - 018

 Section 9.
LISTS AND SERVICES

43 LIST OF FIGURES

Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication................................................ 16

Fig.2 - Elasticized band .................................................................................................. 16

Fig.3 - Coiled cord ......................................................................................................... 16

Fig.4 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419 .................................................................... 17

Fig.5 - ALplus2 1+0 ....................................................................................................... 29

Fig.6 - ALplus2 1+1 ....................................................................................................... 29

Fig.7 - ALCplus2 1+0 and ALCplus2e 2E1 1+0................................................................... 29

Fig.8 - ALCplus2 1+1 and ALCplus2e E1 2+0/1+1 and ALCplus2e 2E1 XPIC 2+0.................... 30

Fig.9 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp 16E1 ....................................................................................... 30

Fig.10 - ALCplus2 1+1 exp 16E1 ..................................................................................... 30

Fig.11 - ALCplus2 1+0 32E1 ........................................................................................... 30

Fig.12 - ALCplus2 1+1 32E1 ........................................................................................... 30

Fig.13 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp nodal..................................................................................... 30

Fig.14 - ALCplus2 1+1 exp nodal..................................................................................... 30

Fig.15 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1 ................................................................................... 31

Fig.16 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 ....................................................................... 31

Fig.17 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL ............................................................ 31

Fig.18 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1 ............................................................................ 31

Fig.19 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1 .............................................................. 31

Fig.20 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL ..................................................... 31

Fig.21 - N+0................................................................................................................. 32

Fig.22 - Synchronisation block diagram ............................................................................ 51

Fig.23 - IDU loopback .................................................................................................... 56

MN.00224.E - 018 413

 Fig.24 - ALplus2 with 16E1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram ........................................ 57

Fig.25 - ALPlus2 with 16E1, 2x(1+0) configuration, block diagram ....................................... 58

Fig.26 - Enabling Line Aggregation, Enable trunk1 ............................................................. 63

Fig.27 - Line trunking .................................................................................................... 64

Fig.28 - Radio trunking .................................................................................................. 65

Fig.29 - Line protection through distributed ELP................................................................. 66

Fig.30 - Hierarchical structure of Maintenance Domains ...................................................... 68

Fig.31 - ALCplus2 with 32E1 expansion, STM-1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram ............ 74

Fig.32 - ALCplus2 with 16E1 expansion, STM1, NBUS, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram .... 75

Fig.33 - ALCplus2 with 2E1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram ........................................ 76

Fig.34 - ALCplus2 with 16E1, 1+0 and 1+1 version, block diagram ...................................... 76

Fig.35 - Node block diagram in protected configuration ...................................................... 77

Fig.36 - ACAP: Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarization ...................................................... 82

Fig.37 - ACCP: Adjacent Channel CoPolarization ................................................................ 82

Fig.38 - CCDP: CoChannel Dual Polarization ...................................................................... 82

Fig.39 - Frequency arrangement ..................................................................................... 83

Fig.40 - Layout of 2x(1+0) with XPIC............................................................................... 83

Fig.41 - Frequency arrangements .................................................................................... 84

Fig.42 - Layout of 2x(1+0) two channels with hybrid coupler............................................... 84

Fig.43 - Frequency arrangement ..................................................................................... 85

Fig.44 - Layout of 2x(1+0) with circulator......................................................................... 85

Fig.45 - Frequency arrangement ..................................................................................... 86

Fig.46 - Layout 4x(1+0) with XPIC and hybrid coupler........................................................ 86

Fig.47 - Frequency arrangement ..................................................................................... 87

Fig.48 - Layout of 4x(1+0) with circulator......................................................................... 87

Fig.49 - Frequency arrangement ..................................................................................... 88

Fig.50 - 8x(1+0) with XPIC and multicirculator.................................................................. 89

Fig.51 - Slot numbering into multicirculator ODUs.............................................................. 90

Fig.52 - Synchronization circuit ....................................................................................... 92

Fig.53 - RED curve ........................................................................................................ 98

Fig.54 - Line trunking .................................................................................................... 99

Fig.55 - ALCplus2e block diagram .................................................................................. 112

Fig.56 - ALCplus2e 1+1 layout ...................................................................................... 112

Fig.57 - ALCplus2e 2+0 layout ...................................................................................... 113

Fig.58 - Frequency reuse system ................................................................................... 114

Fig.59 - AS, ASN or ASNK ODU ..................................................................................... 119

Fig.60 - Final 1+1 assembly with AS, ASN or ASNK ODU .................................................. 120

Fig.61 - ASNK ODU (for frequency > 15 GHz) ................................................................. 121

Fig.62 - ODU block diagram .......................................................................................... 122

Fig.63 - 1+1 hot stand–by 1 antenna ............................................................................. 123

Fig.64 - 1+1 hot stand–by 2 antennas ........................................................................... 123

Fig.65 - ATPC operation ............................................................................................... 124

Fig.66 - Grounding connection ...................................................................................... 129

414 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.67 ........................................................................................................................ 130

Fig.68 - Grounding kit positioning .................................................................................. 131

Fig.69 - IDU ALplus2 front panel ................................................................................... 133

Fig.70 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female ................................................................. 134

Fig.71 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female ................................................................. 136

Fig.72 - Antisliding strip ............................................................................................... 150

Fig.73 - 60–114 mm pole supporting plate fixing ............................................................. 151

Fig.74 - Adapting kit for 219 mm pole ............................................................................ 152

Fig.75 - Mounting position ............................................................................................ 153

Fig.76 - Possible positions of the support with ODU fast locking mechanism ........................ 154

Fig.77 - Band-it pole mounting kit ................................................................................. 155

Fig.78 - Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate ................................................. 156

Fig.79 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation
is always vertical: handle at the left side. ........................................................................ 157
Fig.80 - ODU body reference tooth ................................................................................ 158

Fig.81 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version.................................................................... 159

Fig.82 - ODU grounding ............................................................................................... 160

Fig.83 - Kit V32409 ..................................................................................................... 161

Fig.84 - Kit V32415 ..................................................................................................... 162

Fig.85 - Wall supporting plate ....................................................................................... 167

Fig.86 - Support with ODU fast locking mechanism .......................................................... 168

Fig.87 - Mounting possible positions............................................................................... 169

Fig.88 - Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate.................................................. 170

Fig.89 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation
is always vertical: handle at the left side. ........................................................................ 171

Fig.90 - ODU body reference tooth ................................................................................ 172

Fig.91 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version.................................................................... 173

Fig.92 - ODU grounding ............................................................................................... 174

Fig.93 - Kit V32409 ..................................................................................................... 175

Fig.94 - Kit V32415 ..................................................................................................... 176

Fig.95 - Centring ring position....................................................................................... 181

Fig.96 - Antislide strip.................................................................................................. 182

Fig.97 - Support mount on pole..................................................................................... 183

Fig.98 - Supporting system position ............................................................................... 184

Fig.99 - Hole E............................................................................................................ 184

Fig.100 - Antenna installation on pole support ................................................................. 185

Fig.101 -Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation
is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.................................................................... 185

Fig.102 - Support system for ODU housing and reference tooth in evidence ........................ 186

Fig.103 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 187

Fig.104 - ODU housing final position for vertical polarization ............................................. 188

Fig.105 - ODU housing final position for horizontal polarization .......................................... 188

Fig.106 - Hybrid and polarization disk ............................................................................ 189

Fig.107 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13GHz and 15 GHz)........................................... 190

MN.00224.E - 018 415

 Fig.108 - Hybrid mount on pole support ......................................................................... 191

Fig.109 - ODU housing final position for 1+1 version........................................................ 192

Fig.110 - Vertical and horizontal adjustments.................................................................. 193

Fig.111 - Antenna aiming block ..................................................................................... 194

Fig.112 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 195

Fig.113 - 1+0 pole mounting ........................................................................................ 200

Fig.114 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 201

Fig.115 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisa-
tion is always horizontal. Handle at the right side. ............................................................ 201

Fig.116 - 1+0 support.................................................................................................. 202

Fig.117 - ODU housing final position for both polarization ................................................. 203
Fig.118 - Antenna aiming ............................................................................................. 204

Fig.119 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 205

Fig.120 - Hybrid and twist disk...................................................................................... 206

Fig.121 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz).......................................... 207

Fig.122 - Hybrid installation .......................................................................................... 208

Fig.123 - 1+1 ODUs installation .................................................................................... 209

Fig.124 - Assembled structure (DP antenna, OMT, mounting system) ................................. 214

Fig.125 - Centring ring................................................................................................. 215

Fig.126 - Fast lock ODU support .................................................................................... 215

Fig.127 - ODU ASN/ASNK Standard lock ......................................................................... 216

Fig.128 - ODU AS Fast lock........................................................................................... 217

Fig.129 - 1+0 pole mounting ........................................................................................ 223

Fig.130 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 224

Fig.131 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisa-
tion is always horizontal. Handle at the right side. ............................................................ 224
Fig.132 - 1+0 support.................................................................................................. 225

Fig.133 - ODU housing final position for both polarization ................................................. 226

Fig.134 - Antenna aiming ............................................................................................. 227

Fig.135 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 228

Fig.136 - Hybrid and twist disk...................................................................................... 229

Fig.137 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz).......................................... 230

Fig.138 - Hybrid installation .......................................................................................... 231

Fig.139 - 1+1 ODUs installation .................................................................................... 232

Fig.140 - AS and ASN/ASNK ODUs................................................................................. 240

Fig.141 - ODU ASN/ASNK with fast lock coupling flange.................................................... 241

Fig.142 - ODU ASN/ASNK with standard coupling flange ................................................... 242

Fig.143 - 1+0 ODU installation ...................................................................................... 243

Fig.144 - 1+1 ODU installation ...................................................................................... 244

Fig.145 - Polarization disk ............................................................................................ 245

Fig.146 - 1+0 antenna flange ....................................................................................... 245

Fig.147 - 1+1 antenna flange ....................................................................................... 246

Fig.148 - 1+1 ASN support kit (60-114) code V60100-01 ................................................. 250

Fig.149 - 7GHz multichannel support, code V60361 ......................................................... 251

416 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.150 - ODU with screws and O-ring from code V60049-10 ............................................ 252

Fig.151 - Mounting ODUs onto multichannel support ........................................................ 253

Fig.152 - Mounting multichannel short V60366 onto multichannel support........................... 254

Fig.153 - Mounting flexible waveguides from antenna to multichannel support..................... 255

Fig.154 - 8+0 layout.................................................................................................... 256

Fig.155 - 8+0 layout and measures in mm ..................................................................... 257

Fig.156 - Detected voltage versus RF received signal ....................................................... 263

Fig.157 – Ethernet port setting...................................................................................... 264

Fig.158 – Radio port setting.......................................................................................... 265

Fig.159 - Local Lan-1 port to remote Lan-1 port connection .............................................. 270

Fig.160 - Modulation and capacity ................................................................................. 271

Fig.161 - View Current Configuration ............................................................................. 271

Fig.162 - Switch general settings................................................................................... 272

Fig.163 - Lan-1 interface settings .................................................................................. 273

Fig.164 - Vlan settings for LAN-1.................................................................................... 273

Fig.165 - Vlan settings for Port A ................................................................................... 274

Fig.166 - Priority setting for Lan-1 and Port A ................................................................. 274

Fig.167 - 3 ports to 3 ports connections with segregated traffic ......................................... 275

Fig.168 - Modulation and capacity ................................................................................. 275

Fig.169 - View Current Configuration ............................................................................. 276

Fig.170 - Switch general settings................................................................................... 276

Fig.171 - Lan-1 interface settings .................................................................................. 277

Fig.172 - Lan1 Vlan settings ......................................................................................... 278

Fig.173 - Lan2 Vlan settings ......................................................................................... 278

Fig.174 - Lan3 Vlan settings ......................................................................................... 279

Fig.175 - Port A Vlan settings........................................................................................ 279

Fig.176 - Vlan Configuration Table ................................................................................. 280

Fig.177 - 3 ports to3 ports connections with segregated Tagged and Untagged traffic ........... 280

Fig.178 -Modulation and Capacity .................................................................................. 281

Fig.179 - View Current Configuration ............................................................................. 281

Fig.180 - Switch general settings................................................................................... 282

Fig.181 - Lan1 Vlan settings ......................................................................................... 282

Fig.182 - Lan2 Vlan settings ......................................................................................... 283

Fig.183 - Lan3 Vlan settings ......................................................................................... 283

Fig.184 - Port A Vlan settings........................................................................................ 284

Fig.185 - Vlan Configuration Table ................................................................................. 284

Fig.186 - Subnetwork Craft Terminal - Communication setup ............................................ 286

Fig.187 - IP Ethernet ................................................................................................... 287

Fig.188 - LCT PPP ........................................................................................................ 287

Fig.189 - PPP Radio ..................................................................................................... 288

Fig.190 - Store Routing Table ....................................................................................... 289

Fig.191 - Stored Routing Table...................................................................................... 290

Fig.192 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard .................................................................... 291

MN.00224.E - 018 417

 Fig.193 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard - Actual Configuration ..................................... 292

Fig.194 - Add new station............................................................................................. 293

Fig.195 - Add New Network Element .............................................................................. 294

Fig.196 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard .................................................................... 295

Fig.197 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard .................................................................... 296

Fig.198 - ALCplus2 node connections ............................................................................. 298

Fig.199 - Nodal ALCplus2 Manager ................................................................................ 299

Fig.200 - Drag and drop E1 stream ................................................................................ 301

Fig.201 - VC auto loop ................................................................................................. 302

Fig.202 - Pass-through cross-connection ........................................................................ 303

Fig.203 - Drag and drop E1 stream ................................................................................ 304

Fig.204 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 305

Fig.205 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 306

Fig.206 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 307

Fig.207 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 308

Fig.208 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 309

Fig.209 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 310

Fig.210 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 311

Fig.211 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 312

Fig.212 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 313

Fig.213 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 313

Fig.214 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 314

Fig.215 - Ethernet switch settings.................................................................................. 315

Fig.216 - Node composition .......................................................................................... 317

Fig.217 - Node composition .......................................................................................... 318

Fig.218 - Current alarms .............................................................................................. 320

Fig.219 - STP/Trunking tab (Trunk active) (Port A contextual area) .................................... 322

Fig.220 - Trunking tab (Trunk active)............................................................................. 324

Fig.221 - OAM-FM Domain contextual area ..................................................................... 326

Fig.222 - OAM-FM MA/MEP contextual area ..................................................................... 327

Fig.223 - Vlan status and commands ............................................................................. 327

Fig.224 - ELP Enabling Protection .................................................................................. 329

Fig.225 - Inserting allowed IP address............................................................................ 330

Fig.226 - List of allowed IP address................................................................................ 331

Fig.227 - Sync transmitted from local to remote radio ...................................................... 332

Fig.228 ...................................................................................................................... 334

Fig.229 ...................................................................................................................... 334

Fig.230 ...................................................................................................................... 335

Fig.231 ...................................................................................................................... 335

Fig.232 ...................................................................................................................... 336

Fig.233 ...................................................................................................................... 336

Fig.234 ...................................................................................................................... 337

Fig.235 - E1 retiming ................................................................................................... 337

418 MN.00224.E - 018

 Fig.236 ...................................................................................................................... 338

Fig.237 ...................................................................................................................... 347

Fig.238 ...................................................................................................................... 348

Fig.239 ...................................................................................................................... 349

Fig.240 ...................................................................................................................... 349

Fig.241 ...................................................................................................................... 349

Fig.242 ...................................................................................................................... 349

Fig.243 ...................................................................................................................... 350

Fig.244 ...................................................................................................................... 352

Fig.245 ...................................................................................................................... 353

Fig.246 - Direction of alarms......................................................................................... 359

Fig.247 ...................................................................................................................... 371

Fig.248 ...................................................................................................................... 372

Fig.249 ...................................................................................................................... 373

Fig.250 - Loop ............................................................................................................ 377

Fig.251 - Termination points for the Performance Monitoring ............................................. 377

Fig.252 - IDU GAI0165 ................................................................................................ 380

Fig.253 - IDU GAI0166 ................................................................................................ 380

Fig.254 - IDU P/N........................................................................................................ 381

Fig.255 - ALCplus2 1+0 ............................................................................................... 382

Fig.256 - ALCplus2 1+1 ............................................................................................... 382

Fig.257 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp 16E1.................................................................................. 383

Fig.258 - ALCplus2 1+1 exp 16E1.................................................................................. 383

Fig.259 - ALCplus2 1+0 32E1 ....................................................................................... 383

Fig.260 - ALCplus2 1+1 32E1 ....................................................................................... 383

Fig.261 - ALCplus2 1+0 exp nodal ................................................................................. 383

Fig.262 - ALCplus2 1+1 exp nodal ................................................................................. 383

Fig.263 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 2xE1 ............................................................................... 386

Fig.264 - ALCplus2e 1+1 4GE 34E1 2xSTM1 ................................................................... 386

Fig.265 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL......................................................... 386

Fig.266 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 2xE1 ........................................................................ 386

Fig.267 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 34xE1 2xSTM1........................................................... 386

Fig.268 - ALCplus2e 2+0/1+1 4GE 18E1 2xSTM1 NODAL.................................................. 386

Fig.269 - ALCplus2e 1+0 4GE 18E1 ............................................................................... 386

Fig.270 - Label attached on the ODU mechanical body AL ................................................. 412

MN.00224.E - 018 419

420 MN.00224.E - 018
 44 LIST OF TABLES

Tab.1 - Artificial respiration .............................................................................................15

Tab.2 - ALCplus2e IDU configurations ...............................................................................25

Tab.3 - ALCplus2e IDU configurations (updated hardware)...................................................26

Tab.4 - Optical interface characteristics .............................................................................35

Tab.5 - Ethernet optical interfaces characteristics, SFP and LLC connectors ............................35

Tab.6 - Guaranteed Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) for ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e

(Ethernet only) ...............................................................................................................36

Tab.7 - Estimated Ethernet throughput ............................................................................37

Tab.8 - Guaranteed Ethernet Latency (ms) for ALplus2/ALCplus2/ALCplus2e (Ethernet only) ....37

Tab.9 - Rx Alarm Priority .................................................................................................41

Tab.10 - Maximum outage due to the Tx switching .............................................................41

Tab.11 - IDU power consumption .....................................................................................42

Tab.12 - IMAX ................................................................................................................43

Tab.13 - E1 priority ........................................................................................................54

Tab.14 ..........................................................................................................................91

Tab.15 - Characteristics of the cables.............................................................................. 127

Tab.16 - 10/100/1000BaseT, RJ45 ................................................................................. 133

Tab.17 - 8xE1, 50 pin SCSI female 75 Ohm .................................................................... 134

Tab.18 - 8xE1, 50 pin SCSI female 120 Ohm) .................................................................. 135

Tab.19 - RS232 SUB-D 9 pin male ................................................................................. 136

Tab.20 - SUB-D 9 pin male USER IN/OUT) ....................................................................... 137

Tab.21 - MNGT/1 and MNGT/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection
(RJ45) .........................................................................................................................137

Tab.22 - CH2 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface (RJ45) ....................... 137

Tab.23 - 2 Mbit/s wayside connector pin-out (RJ45).......................................................... 138

Tab.24 - Trib A, B connector .......................................................................................... 139

Tab.25 - SUB-D 9 pin male USER IN/OUT ....................................................................... 140

Tab.26 - Trib A, B connector .......................................................................................... 142

Tab.27 - SUB-D 9 pin male USER IN/OUT ....................................................................... 143

Tab.28 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 147

Tab.29 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 148

Tab.30 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency ............................................... 149

Tab.31 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 164

Tab.32 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 165

Tab.33 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency ............................................... 166

Tab.34 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 179

Tab.35 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 199

Tab.36 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 221

MN.00224.E - 018 421

 Tab.37 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 235

Tab.38 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency ............................................... 239

Tab.39 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency ............................................... 249

Tab.40 - Common alarm group ..................................................................................... 361

Tab.41 - Common group alarms - Concatenations............................................................. 363

Tab.42 - ETH LAN group alarms ..................................................................................... 363

Tab.43 - ETH LAN group alarms - Concatenations ............................................................. 363

Tab.44 - IDU group alarms ........................................................................................... 364

Tab.45 - IDU group alarms - Concatenations.................................................................... 364

Tab.46 - Node group alarms .......................................................................................... 365

Tab.47 - Plug-in module group alarms............................................................................. 366

Tab.48 - Radio group alarms.......................................................................................... 367

Tab.49 - Radio group alarms - Concatenations ................................................................. 367

Tab.50 - RIM group alarms ............................................................................................ 368

Tab.51 - RT group alarms.............................................................................................. 368

Tab.52 - RT group alarms - Concatenations ..................................................................... 369

Tab.53 - STM-1 group alarms ........................................................................................ 369

Tab.54 - STM-1 group alarms - Concatenations ................................................................ 370

Tab.55 - SETS group alarms .......................................................................................... 370

Tab.56 - SETS group alarms - Concatenations.................................................................. 370

Tab.57 - IDU part number .............................................................................................. 380

Tab.58 - Part number and description ............................................................................. 387

Tab.59 - ODU ASN part number and description ............................................................... 403

Tab.60 - ODU ASN HP part number and description .......................................................... 406

Tab.61 - ODU ASNK part number and description ............................................................. 407

422 MN.00224.E - 018

 45 ASSISTANCE SERVICE

For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the com-
pany manufacturing the product.

SIAE helpdesk mail is: help@siaemic.it

MN.00224.E - 018 423

424 MN.00224.E - 018